PTC ProE - Fundamentals of Drawing

PTC Global Services
Fundamentals of Drawing
Release 2001
T782-320-01
Copyright
Copyright © 2001 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
This Fundamentals of Drawing Training Guide may not be copied, reproduced, disclosed, transferred, or reduced to any
form, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, or transmitted or publicly performed by any means,
electronic or otherwise, unless Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) consents in writing in advance.
User and training documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) is subject to the copyright laws of the
United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of
such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed user the right to make copies in printed form of this
documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license
agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and
any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or
reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the
prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes.
Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should
not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or
inaccuracies that may appear in this document.
The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and
proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries.
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND
CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.
Registered Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary: Advanced Surface Design, CADDS,
CADDShade, Computervision, Computervision Services, Electronic Product Definition, EPD, HARNESSDESIGN,
Info*Engine, InPart, MEDUSA, Optegra, Parametric Technology, Parametric Technology Corporation, Pro/ENGINEER,
Pro/HELP, Pro/INTRALINK, Pro/MECHANICA, Pro/TOOLKIT, PTC, PT/Products, Windchill, and the InPart logo.
Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary
3DPAINT, Associative Topology Bus, Behavioral Modeler, BOMBOT, CDRS, CounterPart, CV, CVact, CVaec,
CVdesign, CV-DORS, CVMAC, CVNC, CVToolmaker, DesignSuite, DIMENSION III, DIVISION, DVS,
DVSAFEWORK, EDE, e/ENGINEER, Electrical Design Entry, e-Series, Expert Machinist, Expert Toolmaker,
Flexible Engineering, ICEM, Import Data Doctor, Information for Innovation, i-Series, ISSM, MEDEA, ModelCHECK,
NC Builder, Nitidus, PARTBOT, PartSpeak, Pro/ANIMATE, Pro/ASSEMBLY, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING,
Pro/CDT, Pro/CMM, Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CONVERT, Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER, Pro/DESKTOP,
Pro/DETAIL, Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW, Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE, Pro/FEATURE, Pro/FEM-POST,
Pro/FLY-THROUGH, Pro/HARNESS-MFG, Pro/INTERFACE, Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY,
Pro/LIBRARYACCESS, Pro/MESH, Pro/Model.View, Pro/MOLDESIGN,Pro/NC-ADVANCED, Pro/NC-CHECK,
Pro/NC-MILL, Pro/NCPOST, Pro/NC-SHEETMETAL, Pro/NC-TURN, Pro/NC-WEDM, Pro/NC-Wire EDM,
Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR, Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PDM, Pro/PHOTORENDER,
Pro/PHOTORENDER TEXTURE LIBRARY, Pro/PIPING, Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR, Pro/PLOT,
Pro/POWER DESIGN, Pro/PROCESS, Pro/REPORT, Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN-TOOLS, Pro/SHEETMETAL,
Pro/SURFACE, Pro/VERIFY, Pro/Web.Link, Pro/Web.Publish, Pro/WELDING, Product Structure Navigator,
PTC i-Series, Shaping Innovation, Shrinkwrap, The Product Development Company, Virtual Design Environment,
Windchill e-Catalog, Windchill e-Series, Windchill ProjectLink, CV-Computervision logo, DIVISION logo, and
ICEM logo.
Copyright
Third-Party Trademarks
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation. Java and all Java based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems. Metaphase is a registered trademark of Metaphase Technology Inc.
Baan is a registered trademark of Baan Company. Unigraphics is a registered trademark of EDS Corp. I-DEAS is a
registered trademark of SDRC. SolidWorks is a registered trademark of Solidworks Corp. Matrix One is a trademark of
Matrix One Software. SHERPA is a registered trademark of Inso Corp. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk,
Inc. CADAM and CATIA are registered trademarks of Dassault Systems. Helix is a trademark of Microcadam, Inc. IRIX
is a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor Company. SAP and R/3
are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany. FLEXlm is a registered trademark of GLOBEtrotter Software, Inc.
Rational Rose 2000E, is copyrighted software of Rational Software Corporation. RetrievalWare is copyrighted software
of Excalibur Technologies Corporation. VisualCafé is copyrighted software of WebGain, Inc. VisTools library is
copyrighted software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI) containing confidential trade secret information belonging to VKI.
HOOPS graphics system is a proprietary software product of, and is copyrighted by, Tech Soft America, Inc. All other
brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND
This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to
FAR 12.212(a)-(b) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a), and are provided to the Government under a limited
commercial license only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the
Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and
Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at
FAR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, Massachusetts 02494 USA
© 2001 Parametric Technology Corporation. Unpublished – all rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United
States.
PRINTING HISTORY
Document No. Date Description
T782-320-01 07/10/01 Revisions to Fundamentals of Drawing for Release 2001
Order Number DT-782-320-EN

Printed in U.S.A
PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers
Education Services Registration in North America

Tel: (888) 782-3773
Fax: (781) 370-5553
Technical Support (Monday - Friday)

Tel: (800) 477-6435 (U.S.)
(781) 370-5332 or (781) 370-5523 (outside U.S.)
Fax: (781) 370-5650
License Management
Tel: (800) 216-8945 (U.S.)
(781) 370-5559 (outside U.S.)
Fax: (781) 370-5795
Contracts
Tel: (800) 791-9966 (U.S.)
(781) 370-5700 (outside U.S.)
In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Web site
contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directions to training
facilities, and course descriptions. You can also find general information about
PTC, Pro/ENGINEER, Consulting Services, Customer Support, and
Pro/PARTNERS.
Training Agenda
Day 1
Welcome and Introduction to Fundamentals of Drawing
Creating Views
Assembly and Multiple Model Drawings
Modifying Views
Day 2
Showing Dimensions and Manipulating Detail
Creating Dimensions
Creating Notes
Tolerances on Drawings
Day 3
Drawing Tables
Cosmetic Features
2-D Drafting
Symbols
Using Layers to Control Drawing Display
Day Four
Resolving Regeneration Problems
Drawing Formats
Creating a Bill of Materials
Family Tables
Day 5
Working with Large Drawings
Drawing Standards and Templates
Plotting
Markup Mode
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION 1-1
PRODUCTION DRAWINGS IN PRO/ENGINEER .........................................................1-2
Using Drawing Templates ..........................................................................1-2
Using Configuration Files ..........................................................................1-3
Files Automatically Loaded by the System ................................................1-5
Editing the Configuration File during a Pro/ENGINEER Session.............1-5
Using Drawing Setup Files.........................................................................1-6
DRAWING INTERFACE ..................................................................................................1-7
Performing Tasks........................................................................................1-7
Messages...................................................................................................1-10
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ........................................................................................1-12
EXERCISE 1: Setting Up for Detailing Using a Configuration file ........1-12
EXERCISE 2: Create a Drawing Using a Template ................................1-14
EXERCISE 3: Set Up a Default Drawing Setup File ...............................1-17
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................1-19
CREATING VIEWS 2-1

VIEW CREATION.............................................................................................................2-2
Creating Different View Types ..................................................................2-2
Controlling the View Display.....................................................................2-5
Adding Cross-Sections ...............................................................................2-6
Specifying the View Scale..........................................................................2-8
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS ................................................................................2-8
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS.................................................................................2-9
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing of the Plunger...................................2-13
EXERCISE 2: Create an Align Cross-Section .........................................2-22
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................2-26
ASSEMBLY AND MULTI-MODEL DRAWINGS 3-1

ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS.................................................................................................3-2
Adding Exploded Views.............................................................................3-2
MULTI-MODEL DRAWINGS ......................................................................................... 3-2
Applications ............................................................................................... 3-2
Creating and Manipulating Multi-Model Drawings................................... 3-3
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ......................................................................................... 3-5
EXERCISE 1: Displaying Multiple Models in a Drawing ........................ 3-5
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 3-12
MODIFYING VIEWS 4-1

MANIPULATING VIEWS................................................................................................ 4-2
Changing Location ..................................................................................... 4-2
CONTROLLING THE VIEW DISPLAY ......................................................................... 4-5
Using Hidden Line and Tangent Line Display........................................... 4-5
Removing Views ........................................................................................ 4-6
Modifying the View Scale.......................................................................... 4-6
Modifying View Boundaries, Callouts, and the Reference Point .............. 4-6
Changing a Cross-Section .......................................................................... 4-9
Modifying Assembly Views..................................................................... 4-10
Creating Exploded Views......................................................................... 4-13
Changing View Type ............................................................................... 4-14
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS.............................................................................. 4-15
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS ...................................................... 4-16
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ....................................................................................... 4-18
EXERCISE 1: Manipulating Views......................................................... 4-19
EXERCISE 2: Altering the Display of Views ......................................... 4-25
EXERCISE 3: Modifying Assembly and Multi-Model Drawing ............ 4-28
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 4-36
SHOWING DIMENSIONS 5-1

DRAWING DETAILS....................................................................................................... 5-2
Showing and Erasing Detail Items ............................................................. 5-2
MANIPULATING DETAIL ITEMS................................................................................. 5-5
Changing Location ..................................................................................... 5-5
Changing Dimension Displays................................................................... 5-7
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS .............................................................................. 5-14
EXERCISE 1: Displaying Dimensions .................................................... 5-19
EXERCISE 2: Displaying Axes............................................................... 5-29
EXERCISE 3: Displaying Symbolic Dimensions.................................... 5-31
EXERCISE 4: Displaying Dual Dimensions ........................................... 5-36
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................5-41
CREATING DIMENSIONS 6-1

CREATING DIMENSIONS ON A DRAWING................................................................6-2
Creating Driven Ordinate Dimensions .......................................................6-2
Creating Reference Dimensions .................................................................6-3
Redefining Features in Drawing.................................................................6-3
Creating Draft Dimensions .........................................................................6-4
Hole Tables.................................................................................................6-4
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS ................................................................................6-5
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ..........................................................................................6-7
EXERCISE 1: Creating Dimensions on a Drawing ...................................6-8
EXERCISE 2: Modifying the Dimensioning Scheme..............................6-13
EXERCISE 3: Create Ordinate Dimension Automatically and Create a
Hole Table ................................................................................................6-16
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................6-19
CREATING NOTES 7-1

ADDING NOTES TO A DRAWING ................................................................................7-2
Specifying the Content of a Note................................................................7-2
Manipulating Notes ....................................................................................7-3
Saving Notes...............................................................................................7-6
Modifying the Text Style............................................................................7-6
Creating Style Libraries..............................................................................7-8
INSERTING OLE OBJECTS.............................................................................................7-8
Manipulating the Embedded Object ...........................................................7-9
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS ..............................................................................7-11
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS...............................................................................7-11
EXERCISE 1: Creating Notes on a Drawing ...........................................7-12
EXERCISE 2: Creating Parametric Notes................................................7-17
EXERCISE 3: Manipulating the Note and Inserted Objects ....................7-19
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................7-21
TOLERANCES ON DRAWINGS 8-1

LINEAR TOLERANCES...................................................................................................8-2
Tolerance Standard .....................................................................................8-2
Specify Dimension Tolerances before Model Creation..............................8-2
Displaying Dimension Tolerances..............................................................8-3
Changing Dimension Tolerances ............................................................... 8-3
GEOMETRIC TOLERANCES.......................................................................................... 8-4
Creating a Geometric Tolerance ................................................................ 8-4
Geometric Tolerances in Assembly Drawings........................................... 8-7
Modifying a Geometric Tolerance ............................................................. 8-7
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS................................................................................ 8-7
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS ................................................................................ 8-9
EXERCISE 1: Using Linear and Geometric Tolerances ......................... 8-10
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 8-17
DRAWING TABLES 9-1

PURPOSE OF DRAWING TABLES................................................................................ 9-2
Creating a Drawing Table .......................................................................... 9-2
Setting the Justification for Each Column.................................................. 9-3
Adding Text to the Cells ............................................................................ 9-4
Manipulating a Drawing Table .................................................................. 9-5
Repositioning Drawing Tables................................................................... 9-7
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ......................................................................................... 9-8
EXERCISE 1: Creating and Modifying a Drawing Table ......................... 9-8
EXERCISE 2: Manipulate an Embedded Excel Spreadsheet and Movie
Object ....................................................................................................... 9-15
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 9-17
COSMETIC FEATURES 10-1

COSMETIC SKETCHES ................................................................................................ 10-2
Working with Regular Sections ............................................................... 10-2
Working with Projected Sections............................................................. 10-2
Showing Cosmetic Sketches on a Drawing.............................................. 10-3
COSMETIC THREADS .................................................................................................. 10-3
Creating Cosmetic Threads ...................................................................... 10-3
Displaying Cosmetic Threads and Parameters on a Drawing .................. 10-5
Changing the Format of a Thread Note.................................................... 10-6
USER-DEFINED FEATURES ........................................................................................ 10-7
Creating a UDF ........................................................................................ 10-8
Placing a UDF ........................................................................................ 10-11
Summary of Technique for Creating Cosmetic Threads UDF............... 10-13
Creating Cosmetic Threads using Standard Hole .................................. 10-13
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ..................................................................................... 10-15
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Cosmetic Sketch ........................................... 10-15
EXERCISE 2: Creating Cosmetic Threads ............................................10-18
EXERCISE 3: Using UDF to Standardize a Thread Note......................10-22
EXERCISE 3: Cosmetic Threads Using Standard Holes .......................10-27
MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................10-30
2-D DRAFTING 11-1

2-D DRAFTING CAPABILITIES ...................................................................................11-2
2-D Drafting Applications ........................................................................11-2
Types Draft Geometry ..............................................................................11-2
Locating Draft Geometry..........................................................................11-3
Manipulating Draft Geometry ..................................................................11-5
Modifying Draft Geometry.......................................................................11-6
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS...............................................................................11-7
EXERCISE 1: Updating a 2-D Drawing ..................................................11-8
MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................11-13
SYMBOLS 12-1
CREATING DRAWING SYMBOLS ..............................................................................12-2
Creating Symbol Geometry ......................................................................12-2
Adding Text to a Symbol..........................................................................12-2
Grouping Symbol Geometry.....................................................................12-3
Controlling Symbols.................................................................................12-4
Storing Symbols .......................................................................................12-5
PLACING SYMBOLS ON A DRAWING ......................................................................12-6
Defining the Relationship between the Symbol Instance and Original
Symbol......................................................................................................12-7
Changing Variable Text Values in a Symbol Instance.............................12-7
Selecting Groups to Include in the Instance .............................................12-8
REDEFINING EXISTING SYMBOLS ...........................................................................12-9
Updating a Redefined Symbol in a Drawing............................................12-9
USING WELDING SYMBOLS.......................................................................................12-9
USING SURFACE FINISH SYMBOLS........................................................................12-10
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS.............................................................................12-11
LABORATORY PRACTICAL ......................................................................................12-12
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Symbol with Variable Text...........................12-12
EXERCISE 2: Creating Symbol Groups ................................................12-18
MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................12-24
USING LAYERS TO CONTROL DRAWING DISPLAY 13-1
LAYERS IN DRAWING MODE .................................................................................... 13-2
Setting up Default Layers in Drawing...................................................... 13-2
Creating a Layer Manually in a Drawing................................................. 13-5
Specifying the Display of a Layer............................................................ 13-6
Controlling Layer Display in the Drawing............................................... 13-7
EXERCISE 1: Using Layers to Control Drawing Display ...................... 13-9
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 13-14
RESOLVING REGENERATION PROBLEMS 14-1

RESOLVING FEATURE FAILURES ............................................................................ 14-2
Identifying the Failed Feature .................................................................. 14-2
Determining the Cause of the Failure ...................................................... 14-3
Fixing the Failure ..................................................................................... 14-4
Tips on Resolving Regeneration Failures ................................................ 14-5
EXERCISE 1: Resolving Failed Features................................................ 14-6
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 14-11
DRAWING FORMATS 15-1

CREATING A DRAWING FORMAT............................................................................ 15-2
Importing a Format from Another System............................................... 15-2
Creating a Format with 2-D Drafting....................................................... 15-3
Creating a Format in Sketcher Mode ....................................................... 15-4
ADDING INFORMATION TO A FORMAT ................................................................. 15-4
Including Parametric Information in a Format......................................... 15-4
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Multi-Sheet Drawing Format ......................... 15-7
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 15-17
CREATING A BILL OF MATERIALS 16-1

CREATING A BOM USING PRO/REPORT ................................................................. 16-2
Generating a BOM Report ....................................................................... 16-2
Manipulating a BOM Report.................................................................... 16-4
Using Repeat Region Relations................................................................ 16-7
Calculating a Total Cost........................................................................... 16-8
Creating a Summation ..............................................................................16-9
Pagination .................................................................................................16-9
Showing BOM Balloons.........................................................................16-10
EXERCISE 1: Creating an Automatic BOM..........................................16-12
MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................16-23
FAMILY TABLES 17-1

ADVANTAGES OF USING FAMILY TABLES ...........................................................17-2
Saving Space with Instances.....................................................................17-2
Reducing Development Time ...................................................................17-2
CREATING A FAMILY TABLE ....................................................................................17-2
Creating the Generic Part..........................................................................17-2
Specifying Items for the Table to Drive ...................................................17-3
Creating New Instances ............................................................................17-3
Verifying the Validity of the Model Instances .........................................17-5
USING FAMILY TABLES IN DRAWING MODE........................................................17-5
Creating a Parts Catalog ...........................................................................17-5
Creating a Separate Drawing for Each Instance .......................................17-8
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Family Table .................................................17-12
EXERCISE 2: Showing Family Tables on a Drawing ...........................17-18
EXERCISE 3: Creating Separate Drawings for Each Instance ..............17-21
MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................17-22
WORKING WITH LARGE DRAWINGS 18-1

MANAGING LARGE DRAWINGS ...............................................................................18-2
Drawing Retrieval and Regeneration Process ..........................................18-2
APPROACHES TO PERFORMANCE IMPROVEMENT .............................................18-3
Reducing the Repaint Time ......................................................................18-3
Reducing Drawing View Regeneration Time...........................................18-4
Reducing Drawing Retrieval Time...........................................................18-8
Implementing the Large Drawing Configuration File Settings ................18-8
Drawing Rep Tool ....................................................................................18-9
Merging Drawings ..................................................................................18-10
Model Simplification..............................................................................18-11
EXERCISE 1: Reducing Regeneration and Repaint Time.....................18-14
EXERCISE 2: Creating Simplified Representations ............................. 18-19
EXERCISE 3: Merging Two Drawings into One .................................. 18-21
EXERCISE 4: Create a Drawings Rep .................................................. 18-23
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 18-25
DRAWING STANDARDS AND TEMPLATES 19-1

SETTING UP YOUR DRAWING STANDARDS.......................................................... 19-2
Setting up Your Configuration File.......................................................... 19-2
Setting up Your Drawing Setup File ........................................................ 19-2
CREATING DRAWING TEMPLATES ......................................................................... 19-9
Model Requirements .............................................................................. 19-10
Template View Definition...................................................................... 19-10
Dimension and Balloon Priority............................................................. 19-11
View Symbol.......................................................................................... 19-11
EXERCISE 1: Setting Drawing Standards through the Drawing Setup
File.......................................................................................................... 19-12
EXERCISE 2: Creating Drawing Templates ......................................... 19-16
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 19-25
PLOTTING 20-1
PLOTTING INTERACTIVELY...................................................................................... 20-2
Print Destination....................................................................................... 20-2
Plotting Using the Pro/BATCH Utility ............................................................................ 20-6
Working in the Pro/BATCH Environment............................................... 20-6
EXERCISE 1: Creating Plot Files for Drawings ................................... 20-12
MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 20-16
MARKUP MODEL 21-1

ENGINEERING MARKUPS .......................................................................................... 21-2
Creating a Markup.................................................................................... 21-2
Saving and Viewing a Markup................................................................. 21-3
Retrieving Markups.................................................................................. 21-3
OVERLAYS .................................................................................................................... 21-4
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Markup on a Drawing .....................................21-5
MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................21-9
CREATING ISO-STANDARD DRAWINGS A-1

CONFIGURATION FILES AND DRAWING SETUP FILES ........................................A-2
Using Configuration File Options ............................................................. A-2
Using Drawing Setup File (.dtl) Options................................................... A-3
TOLERANCE TABLES....................................................................................................A-5
Using Tolerance Tables for ISO Standards ............................................... A-5
ISO SURFACE FINISH SYMBOLS ................................................................................A-7
LABORATORY PRACTICAL .........................................................................................A-9
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing in Accordance with the ISO
Standard ..................................................................................................... A-9
MODULE SUMMARY...................................................................................................A-22
USING PTC HELP B-1

PTC HELP OVERVIEW...................................................................................................B-2
PTC Help Features..................................................................................... B-2
USING THE Pro/ENGINEER HELP SYSTEM ...............................................................B-2
Launching Help: Four Methods................................................................. B-2
There are four procedures for launching the help system.......................... B-2
PTC HELP MODULE LIST..............................................................................................B-7
PTC GLOBAL SERVICES: TECHNICAL SUPPORT C-1

FINDING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT WEB PAGE...................................................C-2
OPENING TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALLS ..................................................................C-2
Opening Technical Support Calls via E-mail ............................................ C-2
Opening Technical Support Calls via Telephone ...................................... C-3
Opening Technical Support Calls via the Web ......................................... C-3
Sending Data Files to PTC Technical Support .......................................... C-3
Routing Your Technical Support Calls ..................................................... C-4
Assigning Technical Support Call Priorities ............................................. C-5
Software Performance Report Priorities.................................................... C-5
REGISTERING FOR ON-LINE SUPPORT.....................................................................C-5
ONLINE SERVICES.........................................................................................................C-5
ONLINE SERVICES.........................................................................................................C-6
FINDING SOLUTIONS IN THE KNOWLEDGE BASE ................................................C-6
Terminology used by Technical Support................................................... C-7
GETTING UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION ....................................................................C-8
CONTACT INFORMATION ........................................................................................... C-9
PTC Technical Support Worldwide Electronic Services. ..........................C-9
Telephone .................................................................................................C-10
ELECTRONIC SERVICES ............................................................................................ C-14
INDEX…………………………………………………………………………………….I-1
Module
1
Introduction
In this module, you learn how to use configuration and drawing
setup files to change various characteristics of the drawing. You also
learn how to automate the drawing creation process using templates.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to:
• Create and modify configuration and drawing setup files.

• Use an existing drawing template.
Page 1-1
NOTES
PRODUCTION DRAWINGS IN PRO/ENGINEER

Pro/ENGINEER drawings are generated from 3-D models instead of
drafting lines. The resulting drawings are fully associated to the models.
That is, when you make a change to the model, the system reflects that
change in the drawing; likewise, when you make a change to the drawing,
it reflects that change in the associated models. The drawing appearance
can be easily controlled and customized during the drawing creation
process. However, in order to reduce repeated work, to achieve a
consistent look and for standardization purposes, it is very important to
define the drawing appearance in advance.
You can use configuration files, drawing setup files and drawing templates
to predefine drawing appearance prior to drawing creation.
Using Drawing Templates

Templates can help significantly automate the drawing creation process.
However, they are often practically used as a good starting point for
creating a production-ready drawing and typically need some sort of
manipulation. For instance, after the drawing is created using a template,
you might need to add views and insert detailed items to suit your need.
Within drawing templates you can set up parametric views, tables, notes,
symbols, and other intelligent information. Information from the model
can also be extracted, and fed into drawing automatically. Drawing
templates can automate the drawing creation process in the following
ways:
• Define the layout of views

• Set view display
• Place notes
• Define tables
• Create snap lines
• Show dimensions
Pag e 1 - 2 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g
NOTES
Figure 1 Creating a drawing using a drawing template.
There are default templates provided by the system. Customized drawing

templates can also be created. These drawing templates will typically be
created and maintained by a system administrator. The creation of drawing
templates will be discussed in a later chapter. Once these templates are
created, they can be used during drawing creation.
Using Configuration Files

Using Pro/ENGINEER configuration files, you can customize your
working environment by specifying startup values for environment options
and other global settings. For example, you can turn the bell on or off,
select a suitable background color, or set the model display to hidden line
mode.
Introduction Pag e 1- 3
NOTES
Some configuration file options are not retroactive. For example, you can
use the configuration file options to define the value and the format of the
dimensional tolerances when you create the model. However you can not
use the same technique to change the value and the format of the
dimensional tolerances already exist in a model and it’s drawing. So it is
very important to customize the configuration files in advance.
The following table lists some of the configuration file options that affect
the appearance of a drawing. For a complete listing of the configuration
file options available in Pro/ENGINEER, refer to PTC HELP.
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Drawings

Option Value Description
drawing_file_editor editor Sets the editor that you can use to edit
protab drawing setup files (.dtl).
drawing_setup_file filename.dtl Points the system to the file
containing drawing setup parameters.
All new drawings use this file as the
default setup file.
draw_models_read_only no Makes the model (part, or assembly)
yes read-only in a drawing.
draw_points_in_model_ no If set to “yes,” the system defines the
units yes current draft coordinate values as
model units rather than drawing units.
dwg_select_across_ no Controls the default option from the
pick_box yes PICK MANY menu. If set to “yes,”
the default is Across Box . If set to
“no,” the default is Inside Box .
mapkey keystroke Sets up macros, allowing you execute
a set of commands using an
established key sequence.
pro_dtl_setup_dir directory path Specifies the directory in which the
system should store drawing setup
files. If you do not set it, the system
uses the default setup directory.
rename_drawings_with_ none Controls whether the system copies
object part associated drawings automatically
with parts and assemblies.
assem
both
save_objects changed_and Controls whether the system stores an
_specified object and its dependent objects (such
changed as a part used in an assembly).
all
NOTES
Files Automatically Loaded by the System

Pro/ENGINEER can read configuration files from several directories. If a
particular option is present in more than one configuration file, however, it
uses the latest value. When the system initially starts, it reads in
configuration files from the following directories, in the order in which
they are listed:
• Config.sup in the loadpoint/text directory (the directory in which

you install Pro/ENGINEER) – Usually, only the system administrator
has the ability to change the options in this file because they are
generally company standards and you cannot override them with other
configuration files. Use this file to lock in certain requirements for all
users.
• Config.pro in the loadpoint/text directory (the directory in which
you install Pro/ENGINEER) – The system administrator also manages
this file to set global search paths to library directories. Other
configuration files can override the options in this file.
• Config.pro in the your home directory – This file is located in your
home directory. If the system encounters an option in this file that is
the same as one in the loadpoint config.pro file, it uses this option,
overriding the option in the other file.
• Config.pro in the current directory – This file is located in the
directory from which you launched Pro/ENGINEER. If the system
encounters an option in this file that is the same as one in the loadpoint
config.pro directory or the home directory config.pro, it uses this
option, overriding the others.
Note:
If you do not set an option in any of these configuration files,
the system uses the default value for that option.
Editing the Configuration File during a

Pro/ENGINEER Session
You should set the options in your configuration file before you start a
Pro/ENGINEER session.
NOTES
Global Considerations
Keep in mind that configuration file options impact your model globally—
that is, they affect the model in all modes of Pro/ENGINEER and they
affect every associated drawing. To control the appearance of an
individual drawing, you can modify your drawing setup file.
Using Drawing Setup Files

To change the drawing appearance, you can modify the individual items,
such as the height of a selected text. You can also change the
characteristics of all items of a drawing by accessing the drawing setup
file of that drawing.
By modifying this drawing setup file, you can customize the

characteristics of the current drawing such as dimension and note text
height, text orientation, geometric tolerance standards, font properties,
drafting standards, and arrow lengths, etc.
The drawing setup file of a drawing is a local copy of the system default
drawing setup file. When creating a drawing, PRO/ENGINEER copies the
default drawing setup file into the new drawing. You can then modify this
local copy to control the appearance of the current drawing, without
affecting other modes of Pro/ENGINEER or other drawings.
Specifying Your Default Drawing Setup File

In order to standardize drawing and reduce repeated work, you should set
the options in the default drawing setup file to appropriate values.
You can specify your default drawing setup file by setting the
configuration file drawing_setup_file. This option is not
retroactive. So it is important to perform this step before starting your
drawing.
NOTES
DRAWING INTERFACE
Drawing mode interface is similar to that of part mode and assembly
mode.
Performing Tasks
Drawing mode provides multiple ways of performing tasks. Depending on
the type of the task, you can use DRAWING menu, pull-down menus, pop-
up menu, icons or even the MODEL TREE.
Drawing Menu
The DRAWING menu is located to the right of the graphic pane. It is also
known as side menu or MENU MANAGER. You can access commands to
perform tasks such as, view creation, table creation, drawing setup etc.
Pull-Down Menu
The pull-down menus are located on the top of the graphic pane. You can
use them to perform tasks that are available in other modes of
Pro/ENGINEER. You can also use them to perform various drawing
specific tasks such as, inserting and editing detail items, changing the
format of detail items etc.
NOTES
Figure 2: Edit and Insert menus
Figure 3: Sketch and Format menus
NOTES
Icons
Icons are short cuts for commands located in MENU MANAGER and pull-
down menus. Using icons located on the top and right side of the graphic
pane, you can perform various drawing tasks. You can also add the system
defined icons, create mapkeys and assign icons to mapkeys just like in
other modes of Pro/ENGINEER.
Table 2: Drawing icons

Icon Description
Set active drawing model icon.
Move and align several objects.
Delete one or more drawing objects.
Clean up dimensions in one or more views.
Switch one or more detail items to another view.
Change sheet.
Enable sketching chain.
Remember parametric sketching references.
Select.
Create lines.
Create circles and ellipses.
Create arcs.
Create a fillet.
Create a spline curve.
Create a point.
Create a chamfer.
Pop-up Menu
A quick and easy way to perform a task is to use the pop-up menu. To
access the pop-up menu, you need to go through the following steps:
• Click [Select] icon.

• Select the object using left mouse button. To select multiple objects,
press and hold < Shift > key.
• Press and hold the right mouse button to access a pop-up menu.
NOTES
Right mouse button is object sensitive. Depending on the type of selected

object, a specific set of commands will be enabled. The following figure
contains examples of object specific commands for views and dimensions.
Figure 4: Object Sensitive Pop-up Menu
Model Tree
You can use the Model Tree to perform drafting selections and context-
sensitive actions such as showing dimensions.
Figure 5: Use the MODEL TREE Short Cut Commands
Messages
Just like other using modes of Pro/ENGINEER, it is important to read
messages in drawing mode. When performing tasks such as showing axis
by view, and inserting note with leaders, the messages will guide you
through the process. By default, the message area is located on top of the
graphic pane and below the icons.
Pag e 1 - 1 0 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g
NOTES
Table 3: Drawing Setup File Options

drawing_units inch Specifies the units for all
foot drawing parameters.
mm
cm
m
drawing_text_height 0.15625 Specifies the default text
value height for all text in the
drawing using the units set
by the configuration file
option drawing_units.
text_thickness 0.000000 Specifies the default
0<value<0.5 thickness for new text.
text_width_factor 0.80000 Specifies the default ratio
0.235<value<8 between the text width and
the text height. The
system maintains this ratio
until you change the width
using the Text Width
option.
NOTES
LABORATORY PRACTICAL
Goal
To customize Pro/ENGINEER by creating a configuration and drawing
setup file.
Method
In first exercise, a configuration file is created in the current working
directory.
In second exercise, drawing templates are used to automate the drawing

creation process.
In second exercise, a drawing setup file is created and the default values
for options are modified.
EXERCISE 1: Setting Up for Detailing Using a

Configuration file
Task 1. Customize your working session by creating a configuration
file.
1. Change the working directory to FUND_DRAW_320. Click File >

Set Working Directory > FUND_DRAW_320 > OK .
2. Create a default configuration file for the current session. Click

Utilities > Options . The OPTIONS dialog box appears on the
screen.
3. In the OPTION input box of the OPTIONS dialog box, begin

entering the first option listed in the table below. The system will
complete the option. Select the VALUE from the drop down list.
Click Add/Change . Do the same for each option.
NOTES
Table 4: Configuration File Options

Option Value
bell NO
display HIDDENVIS
highlight_new_dims YES
parenthesize_ref_dim YES
4. Apply the changes and save the configuration file to a new name.
Click Apply , followed by [Save as ]. Enter [ my_config ]
as the name and click OK .
5. Click Close from the OPTIONS dialog box.
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Create a Drawing Using a Template

Task 1. Create a new drawing of a rotor shield part with a previously
created drawing template.
1. Click File > New > Drawing .
2. Enter [rotor_shield] as the name. Leave the Use defult

template checkbox checked and click OK .
3. Specify the default model. In the DEFAULT MODEL area, click

Browse and locate 1490_SHIELD.PRT, followed by Open .
4. In the SPECIFY TEMPLATE area, leave the Use template

checkbox checked.
5. Specify the template. In the TEMPLATE area, click Browse .

Locate TEMPLATE_PRT.DRW, followed by Open .
6. Click OK in the NEW DRAWING dialog box.
7. This model has a family table. Specify the generic instance as the
default model. In the SELECT INSTANCE dialog box, leave The
generic highlighted. Click Open .
8. As you can see, the views are placed automatically. Parametric

information are extracted from the model and filled in tables and
notes.
9. Save and erase the drawing.
Task 2. Create a new drawing using a drawing template.
2. Enter [X123456] for the name and click OK . Ensure the Use
Default Template checkbox is checked. You will need to browse
for both the Default Model and template.
3. Click the Browse button to locate the Default Model and

Template. Make sure the NEW DRAWING dialog box options are
selected as shown in the following figure. The model and the
template are both stored in your current directory.
NOTES
Figure 6: New Drawing Dialog Box
4. Click OK . The drawing should look like the following figure.
5. Save the drawing.
Figure 7: The Initial Drawing
NOTES
Note:
The template specified the following actions to take place
automatically:
- Place four views
- Set the scale of all views to .500
- Set the display of the isometric view to No Hidden
- Set the display of the planar views to Hidden Line
- Place a standard note on the drawing
- Create snap lines offset a predefined distance from the views
- Show the dimensions for the model with a view location

priority of FRONT, RIGHT and TOP.
-Locate the dimensions on the snap lines
NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Set Up a Default Drawing Setup File

Task 1. Edit the drawing setup file of an existing drawing and save it to
the disk.
1. Modify the existing drawing setup file. Click Advanced > Draw
Setup . The OPTIONS dialog box appears with the initial settings
for the drawing setup file.
2. Change the options as shown in the following table. Scroll down

through the list, select the option, enter the value and click
Add/Change .
Table 5: Drawing Setup File Options
Option Value
drawing_text_height 0.2
crossec_arrow_length 0.25
crossec_arrow_width 0.1
witness_line_offset 0.15
draw_arrow_style filled
circle_axis_offset 0.25
3. Save the changes to the file. Click [Save as], for the name
type [my_dtl ]and click OK .
4. Click OK from the OPTIONS dialog box.
5. Zoom-in to view the changes to the arrowhead styles.
Task 2. Add an option to the configuration file so that the system

always loads the drawing setup file that you just created for all new
drawings.
1. Click Utilities > Options . The default configuration file is

CURRENT_SESSION.
2. Open the file MY_CONFIG.PRO. Click [Open], select

MY_CONFIG.PRO, and click Open.
NOTES
3. For option, type [drawing_setup_file] click Browse , select

MY_DTL.DTL, and click Open . Click Add/Change .
4. Click OK to close the OPTIONS dialog box.
5. Close the current window. Click Window > Close.
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
You have learned that:
• You can use configuration files to customize the drawing.

• You use drawing setup files to customize the drawing.
• You can use a drawing template to automate the drawing creation.
Module
2
Creating Views
In this module, you learn about the different view types and how to
place views on a drawing.
Objectives
• Create a drawing and place various types of views.

• Create different types of cross-section views.
Page 2-1
NOTES
VIEW CREATION
There are several different types of views you can add to a
Pro/ENGINEER drawing. These include general, detailed, projection,
auxiliary, and revolved, as shown in the following figure. As you create
each view type, you can specify how much of the model should be visible
in the drawing, and whether the view should be of a single surface on the
model or have a cross-section. You can also specify view scales for certain
types of views.
General View Revolved View Auxiliary View
Projection View
General View Detail View
Figure 1: View Types.
Creating Different View Types

General Views
When a drawing is created without a template, the first view of a model
that the system places on a drawing is a general view. These view types
are unique because they enable you to specify any orientation of the model
for the view. Initially, the system places a general view in its default
NOTES
orientation; you can then reorient it using default datum planes or

predefined named views.
Orienting General Views Using Predefined Named Views

You can define the orientation of a general view by using a named view
that has been saved previously in a Part or Assembly. When creating
saved views, you should use default datum planes as the references
because they are the only references on your model that will never change.
Orienting General Views Using Default Datum Planes

When manually orienting a general view, you should specify top, bottom,
left, right, front, or back as the primary direction (corresponding to the
direction of your computer screen such as front of the screen, top of the
screen, etc.). You should use default datum planes as the references
because they are the only references on your model that will never change.
When specifying datum planes for references, keep in mind that the
yellow side of the datum plane faces the side of the screen that you pick.
For example, if you select top and DTM2, the yellow side of DTM2 faces
the topside of the screen.
Projection Views
A projection view is an orthographic projection seen from the top, bottom,
left, or right of a selected drawing view. To create it, you specify a
location with respect to another drawing view and Pro/ENGINEER
automatically determines how to project it. Once it determines a suitable
view, it automatically orients and positions it correctly.
Once you have placed a projection view, the system associates it with the
view from which it projected it. If the parent view moves, the projection
view maintains its alignment.
Auxiliary Views
An auxiliary view is a projection of another view 90 degrees from an
inclined surface, a datum plane, or along an axis. Consider an auxiliary
view to be a projection at an odd angle, as opposed to the right, left, top, or
bottom.
C reat ing Vi ew s Pag e 2- 3

NOTES
• If you pick an edge as the reference, the view shows the surface to
which the edge belongs, parallel to the computer screen.
• If you pick a datum plane, the view shows the datum plane parallel to
the computer screen.
• If you pick a datum axis, the view looks along the datum axis. This
would be useful for looking through a hole on a model.
As with projection views, once you have placed an auxiliary view, the
system associates it with the view from which it is projected. If the parent
view moves, the auxiliary view maintains its alignment.
Detailed Views
A detailed view displays a portion of an existing view in a larger scale,
making it easier to see the geometry and dimensions. To create a detailed
view, you must specify:
• A location for the detailed view

• A reference point on the model to define the location of interest.
• A view boundary. You will sketch a spline around the area that you
want to show.
• A location for the callout note
Pro/ENGINEER relates a detailed view to the view from which you create
it, but you can move the detail view independently of its parent.
Revolved Views
A revolved view is a section view revolved 90 degrees about the cutting
plane line and offset along its length. The section is an area cross-section,
showing only material cut by the cutting plane.
Graph Views
A graph view shows a datum graph on a drawing to associate a function
with the part. Once you have created the datum graph feature, you can
show it in your drawing, as shown in the following figure.
NOTES
Figure 2: Graph View
Controlling the View Display

In addition to determining which type of view to place, you can also
control how much of the model the system shows in the view by using
these options in the VIEW TYPE menu, as shown in the following figure:
• Full View – Displays the entire model in the view.

• Half View – Displays only a portion of the model using a datum plane
to control how much is visible.
• Broken View – Displays a portion of a large model by removing an
area of the model from the display and brings the pieces of the model
on either side of the removed area closer together.
! Several options exist for defining what the break will look like.
You can manually sketch the break geometry or choose S-curve or
heartbeat break geometry.
• Partial View – Shows a localized portion of the model using the same
technique that you would use to create a detailed view.
Broken View Partial View
Full View Half View
Figure 3: View Options.

NOTES
Adding Cross-Sections
You can add the following types of cross-sections to a view, as shown in
the following figure:
• Full – Displays the entire view as a cross-section.

• Half – Displays the cross-section on one side of a datum plane without
affecting the other side.
• Local – Displays the cross-section in localized areas by sketching a
boundary (using the same techniques that you would use to create
detailed and partial views).
• Full and Local – Displays the entire model as one cross-section while
a local area displays another.
Note:
Use the Of Surface option in the VIEW TYPE menu to show
only one surface in a particular view.
Figure 4: Cross-Section Types. From the top left, clockwise: Full cross-section, Half
cross-section, Full & Local cross-section Local cross-section.
Full Cross-Sectional Views

Using the XSEC TYPE menu, you can manipulate full cross-sectional
views in the following ways:
NOTES
• Use Total Xsec to show all edges of a full cross-section, including

those behind the cutting plane, as shown in the following figure.
• Use Total Align to show a total cross-section that is unfolded around
an axis.
• Use Total Unfold to show a total cross-section unfolded so that the
cutting planes are parallel to the screen.
• Use Area Xsec to show only the geometry on the cutting plane, as
shown in the following figure.
• Use Align Xsec to show an area cross-section that is unfolded around
an axis, as shown in the following figure.
• Use Unfold Xsec to show an area cross-section unfolded so that the
cutting planes are parallel to the screen, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 5: Total versus Area cross-section. From the left, Total cross-section, Area
cross-section
Figure 6: Aligned Cross-Section

NOTES
Figure 7: Unfolded Cross-Section
Specifying the View Scale

When you create a view in a drawing, the scale of the view appears at the
bottom of the graphics area. Pro/ENGINEER determines the scale based
on the model and drawing sheet size. When creating a general view and a
detailed view, you have the option to specify a unique scale for the new
view.
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS

The following table lists configuration file options that affect view
display. The default values are shown in italics.
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting View Display

Option Value Definition
default_draw_scale no Sets the default drawing
value (positive) scale for views added with
the No Scale option.
When set to “no,” the
system does not set a
default scale. You can set
this option to a positive
number to predefine the
scale when you choose No
Scale.
make_proj_view_notes no Adds view names
yes automatically for
projection views in the
format “VIEW viewname-
viewname.”
orientation trimetric Establishes the view
isometric orientation as isometric,
user-defined, or trimetric.
user_default
NOTES
selection_of_removed_ yes Controls the selection of

entities no entities in front of a cross-
section. If set to “yes,” you
can select entities even if
they are in front of the
cross-section, clipped, or
erased with the EDGE
DISP menu.
DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS

The following table lists the drawing setup file options that affect view
display. The default values are shown in italics.
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting View Display

broken_view_offset 1.0 Sets the offset distance
value between the two halves of
a broken view.
crossec_arrow_length 0.0625 Sets the length of the

value cross-section cutting
plane arrow heads.
crossec_arrow_width 0.1875 Sets the width of the

value cross-section cutting
plane arrows.

NOTES
crossec_arrow_style tail_online Sets the arrowhead

head_online display, either head online
or tail online.
crossec_text_place after_head Sets location of the cross-

before_tail section text.
above_tail
above_line
no_text
cutting_line_adapt no If set to “yes,” the system

yes uses adaptive line fonts to
display cross-section
arrows; that is, they begin
and end in the middle of a
complete line segment.
def_view_text_height 0 Sets the default text
value height for view names
and arrows in cross-
section and detailed
views.
def_view_text_thickness 0 Sets the default text
value thickness for view names
and arrows in cross-
section and detailed
views.
detail_circle_line_style solidfont Sets the line style for
font_name circles indicating a
detailed view in a
drawing. The value for
this option can be any
available system-defined
or user-defined line styles.
detail_circle_note_text default Determines the text
displayed in non-ASME-
94 detail view reference
notes.
NOTES
detailed_view_circle on Controls the display of the

off circle encompassing the
detailed view.
half_view_line solid Controls the display of the
symmetry half view. If set to “solid,”
system draws solid lines
none where material is present.
If set to “symmetry,”
system draws a centerline
extending beyond the part
and acting as a break line.
If set to “none,” the
system draws the object a
short distance past the
symmetry line. You must
specify a datum to create
the half view and use a
centerline to indicate the
actual half.
Solid Symmetry None

projection_type third_angle Specifies the projection
first_angle type: first or third angle.
show_total_unfold_seam yes Controls the display of
no seams in a total unfolded
cross-section.
view_scale_denominator 0 Determines the view scale

integer denominator for the view
scale before you simplify
the fraction.

NOTES
view_scale_format decimal Determines whether the

fractional system expresses a scale
as a decimal, fraction, or
ratio_colon ratio.
NOTES
Goal
To create a drawing and place different views types on the drawing.
Method
In the first exercise, a new drawing of a plunger part is created and
different view types are created.
In the second exercise, a new drawing of a barrel part is created and views
are created. The barrel part is modified, and the associative drawing also
updates.
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing of the Plunger
Figure 8: Finished Plunger Body Drawing

NOTES
Task 1. Retrieve the plunger part to become familiar with its geometry.
1. Click File > Open > PLUNGER_BODY.PRT > Open.
2. Spin the model to review the geometry.
3. Click Window > Close Widow .
Task 2. Create a new drawing named PLUNGER_BODY.DRW as

shown in the preceding figure. Use PLUNGER_BODY.PRT as the model.
Place a general view and two projection views.
1. Click File > New > Drawing , enter [PLUNGER_BODY] as drawing

name. Clear the Use default template checkbox and click OK .
2. Accept the defaults in the NEW DRAWING dialog box and click
OK .
3. Place a general view. Click Views , accept the defaults and click
Done . Locate the view by centering it at the bottom of the
drawing.
4. Orient the view as shown in the following figure. Accept defaults

and select DTM1 on the screen for the Front and DTM2 on the
screen for the Top. Click OK .
Figure 9: First View
NOTES
Note:
You should use default datum planes to orient general views.
When picking datum planes to face in a particular direction,
the yellow side of the datum will face in the specified
direction.
5. Place a projection view to the left of the first view, as shown in the
following figure. Click Add View , accept the defaults and click
Done . Locate the view to the left of the first view.
Figure 10: First Projection
6. Place a second projection view above the first projection view that
you just created, as shown in the following figure. Click Add
View , accept the defaults and click Done . Locate the view above
the projection view.
Figure 11: Second Projection

NOTES
Task 3. Create a general view with a cross-section through the middle

of the model.
1. Click Add View > General > Full View >Section > No Scale >
Done .
2. To define the type of cross-section, accept the defaults and click

Done . Locate the view above the first view.
3. Orient the view as shown in the following figure. Expand the

Saved Views list, select FRONT and click Set > OK .
Figure 12: Cross-section A-A
4. Click Create , accept the defaults and click Done . Enter [A] as the
cross-section name.
5. Specify DTM3 as the plane to use for the cross-section. Select

DTM3 from the MODEL TREE.
6. Select the second projection view in the upper left corner of the
screen as the view in which to locate the cutting plane arrows.
Task 4. Create a detailed view that displays the tab in the lower right
corner of the second projection view.
1. Click Add View > Detailed , accept the defaults and click Done .
Locate the view on the right side of the sheet, as shown in the
following figure. Enter [4] as the scale.
NOTES
Figure 13: DETAIL 1
2. Define the center point of the detail view. Zoom in on the lower
right corner of the second projection view. Select the edge as
Figure 14: DETAIL 1 Center Point
3. Sketch a spline that encompasses both the center point and the
geometry for the detailed view. (Refer to the previous figures).
Click the middle mouse button to complete the spline.
4. Enter [1] as the name.
5. Click Circle and locate the note for the detail to the lower left of
the circle.

NOTES
Task 5. Create a detailed view displaying the geometry of two of the

cooling fins on the plunger body shown in Section A-A.
1. Click Add View > Detailed , accept the defaults and click Done .
Locate the view on the right side of the sheet, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 15: DETAIL 2
2. Enter [4] as the scale of the detailed view.
3. Zoom in on Section A-A and select the edge of the flange that is
second from the right as the center point, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 16: DETAIL 2 Center Point
4. Sketch a spline that encompasses both the center point and the
geometry for the detailed view. (Refer to the previous figures).
Enter [2] as the name of the detailed view.
5. Click Circle and locate the note for the detail to the upper left of
the callout.
NOTES
Task 6. Create a partial view that displays the cross-sectional geometry

of one of the tabs on the plunger body.
1. Click Add View > General > Partial View > Section > Scale >
Done .
2. Click Done to accept the default values for the type of section to
be created.
3. Locate the view on the right side of the sheet, as shown in the
following figure. Enter [4] as the scale for the partial view.
Figure 17: Cross-Section B-B
4. Orient the view using the FRONT saved view. Click OK .
5. Create a planar cross-section through the hole of one of the tabs on

the plunger body. Click Create , accept defaults, and click Done .
Enter [B] as the name of the cross-section.
6. Click Make Datum and create a datum that goes through the axis
in the tab and parallel to DTM3. If the axis or datum plane is not
visible on the drawing, turn on the display and pan the drawing to

NOTES
repaint. You may find it helpful to select DTM3 from the model
tree.
7. Select the projection view in the upper left corner of the screen to
specify the view in which to place the cross-section arrows.
8. Specify the center point for the outer boundary on the current view.
Select an edge of the through hole, as shown in the following
figure, and sketch a spline that encompasses both the center point
and the geometry for the partial view.
Figure 18: Partial View Center Point
Task 7. Create a 3-D view in an isometric orientation.
1. Click Add View > General > Done . Locate the view in the upper
right corner of the drawing.
2. Orient the view similar to the view shown in the following figure.
Temporarily orient the model to the FRONT saved view.
3. From the TYPE pull-down list select ANGLES. From the

REFERENCE pull-down list select VERTICAL as the first
reference, enter [-45], and click Apply .
4. Click Add to add a second rotation. From the TYPE pull-down list
select HORIZONTAL as the reference and enter [35] and click
Apply .
5. If the view is oriented correctly as shown in the following figure,

click OK . If the orientation is not correct, repeat steps 2 through 5
of this task.
NOTES
Figure 19: Isometric View
6. Click Views > Move View and reposition the views as shown in
the finished drawing in the beginning of this exercise.
7. Save the drawing. Click File > Save and accept default name.
8. Close the window.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Create an Align Cross-Section
Figure 20: Finished Barrel Drawing
Task 1. Retrieve the barrel drawing. Create a projection view with an

align cross-section through the patterned holes to the right of the first
view.
1. Click File > Open > BARREL.DRW > Open .
2. Click Views > Add View > Projection > Full View > Section >
Done .
3. Specify the cross-section type. Click Align XSEC > Done . Locate
the view to the right of the first view, as shown in the following
figure.
NOTES
Figure 21: Section A-A
4. Click Create > Offset > Done to create an offset cross-section

through the center hole and two of the patterned holes.
Note:
The One Side/Both Sides options define which way the
system cuts the cross-section: in one or both directions
perpendicular to the sketching plane. In this case, you could
use either one because of DTM2 position, but you should use
the default Both Sides .
5. Enter [A] as the name of the cross-section. The barrel part appears
on the screen.
6. Select DTM2 as the sketching plane and click Okay to view the
sketching plane from above.
7. You may have to show the DTMS_PART_DEF layer to see the

datum planes. Click View > Layers and show the layer. Repaint
the screen to see the axes and close the LAYERS dialog box
8. For the reference plane click Bottom and select DTM3.

Pro/ENGINEER orients the view and places you in Intent
Manager. Close the Sketcher Enhancement- Intent Manager
window if it appears.
9. Create the section as shown in the following figure. For additional

references, select the axes and cylindrical surface of the barrel
from the screen as shown in the following figure.
10. Close the REFERENCES dialog box when you have selected the
references needed for this sketch.
11. Click Sketch > Line and sketch the two lines shown in the
following figure.

NOTES
Select Axis A_2

as a reference
Sketch these lines
Select Axis A_5

as a reference
Select Axis A_1 as a

reference
Select the both halves of the

outside surface as a reference
Figure 22: Sketch for Align Cross-Section
12. Click Sketch > Done to complete the section.
13. Select axis A_1 in the current view as the axis to unfold around.
14. Press the middle mouse button to abort section arrow creation.
Task 2. Place a projection view to the right of cross-section A-A. After

placing the view, retrieve the model and modify the number of holes.
Return to the drawing to observe how the drawing updated and verify that
the cross-section is still valid.
1. Click Add View from the VIEWS menu, then click Projection >
Done . Locate the view to the right of Section A-A, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 23: Projection View Location
NOTES
Task 3. Retrieve the barrel part and modify the number of holes in the
barrel to verify that the cross-section updates correctly.
1. Open the barrel part.
2. Click Modify, select one of the 5 patterned holes and select the
parameter controlling the number of instances in the pattern.
3. Enter [7] and click Regenerate .
4. View the updated drawing. Click Window > BARREL.DRW . There

are now seven holes and the align cross-section updated correctly.
5. Click Window > BARREL.PRT . Change the number of holes back

to five and regenerate the model.
6. Save and close BARREL.DRW.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create different view types on a drawing.

• Views can contain all of the model geometry, a portion of the
geometry, or a planar section of the geometry.
• Drawing views are associative and will update to reflect changes in the
model.
Module
3
Assembly and Multi-Model Drawings
In this module, you learn to create an assembly model drawing. You
also learn how to create a drawing with two or more models in the
same drawing.
Objectives
• Create assembly drawings with exploded views.

• Create drawings that display views of multiple models.
Page 3-1
NOTES
ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS
To create a drawing of an assembly, you must specify an assembly as the
model for your drawing. The system then displays the name and type of
the model along the bottom of the window.
Adding Exploded Views

When placing an exploded view of an assembly, you can place it in the
default explode state, as shown in the following figure. However, if the
assembly has multiple explode states, the system allows you to specify
which one to display. If you place the default exploded view on the
drawing, it automatically updates with any changes that you make to the
explode state in the assembly. You can also modify the exploded view on
the drawing.
Figure 1: An Exploded View
MULTI-MODEL DRAWINGS
Applications
You may need to use two or more models on the same drawing, as shown
in the following figure. For example, you may want to create a drawing of
a component and the assembly in which it is used. By creating a multi-
NOTES
model drawing, you can display an assembly and all of its component
parts. You can also do the following:
• Clearly show all part and assembly dimensions in the same drawing.
• Display several members of the same family with different sets of
features.
• Work with detail items, tables, repeat regions, and so on that belong to
any one of the models.
Figure 2: Multi-Model Drawing
Creating and Manipulating Multi-Model Drawings

Adding the Model to the Drawing
Before you can use a model in a view, you must add it to the drawing.
However, adding a model to a drawing does not place a view of that
model—it only enables the drawing to reference the model so that you can
place a view. After you add the model, the system retrieves the part or
assembly when you retrieve the drawing.
Setting the Active Model

In multi-model drawings, many operations are model related. For example
adding a view, setting the drawing scale and writing relations.
Ass embl y and Mult i-Mod el D raw ings Pag e 3- 3

NOTES
• To add views of a particular model, you must set that model as active,
but only one model on the drawing can be the active model at any
given time. The system references the active model any time that it
needs a default model to perform an operation, such as when you add
views or regenerate a model. The last model that you add to a drawing
becomes the current model.
• The system sets the drawing scale of each model independently. You
may notice the scale value at the bottom-left corner changing when
you set different models. To modify the scale for each model, it must
be active.
• When you add relations, the system adds them to the current model;
therefore, you should select a model before adding a relation.
• The active model name is displayed at the bottom of the graphic pane.
Tips for Working with Multiple Models in a Drawing

When working with multi-model drawings, keep in mind the following:
• Pro/ENGINEER allows you to use as many models on a drawing as

you need; however, you must add all models that are shown in the
drawing to the drawing before you can display them as views.
• The system retrieves all part and assembly files when it retrieves the
drawing. This may dramatically increase your retrieval time for the
drawing.
• Deleting the views of a model does not disassociate the model from
the drawing. Once you add a model to a drawing, the system associates
that drawing to it, regardless of whether any views are showing. To
disassociate a model, you must delete that model from the drawing.
NOTES
Goal
To create drawings of assembly models and drawings with more than
one model.
Method
This exercise creates a new drawing of an assembly and creates the
drawing views including exploded views. We also add a second model to
the drawing and create views of second model.
EXERCISE 1: Displaying Multiple Models in a

Drawing
Figure 3: Upper Housing Drawing

NOTES
Task 1. Retrieve the end cap part and the upper housing assembly to
view the models that you are going to include in this drawing.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_CAP.PRT and become familiar with its

geometry.
2. Shade and spin the model to view all sides of the part.
3. Close the active window.
4. Retrieve UPPER_HOUSING.ASM and become familiar with its

geometry.
5. Shade and spin the model to view all sides of the part.
Task 2. Create a new drawing called UPPER_HOUSING that includes

the upper housing assembly and the end cap part, as shown in the
following figure.
1. Click File>New>Drawing .
2. Enter [UPPER_HOUSING] as the drawing name. Clear the Use

default template check box. Confirm that
UPPER_HOUSING.ASM is the drawing model and specify a C-
size sheet and landscape orientation.
Task 3. Place a cross-sectional exploded view of the upper housing

assembly on the drawing. The cross-section should be planar and pass
through the middle of the housing.
1. Click Views > Section > Exploded > Done . For the cross-section
type, accept the defaults and click Done .
2. Place the view in the bottom right corner of the sheet and select the
default exploded view. From the SEL STATE menu, confirm that
the Default check box is selected and click Done .
NOTES
Figure 4: Exploded View
3. Once you have placed the view, orient it to look like the view
shown in the preceding figure. From the ORIENTATION dialog
box, click Saved Views to display any views that have been. From
the list of saved views, select SIDE and click Set> OK .
4. Create a new cross-section that passes through the middle of the

assembly parallel to the screen. Click Create , accept the defaults,
and click Done . Enter [A] as the cross-section name. Select datum
plane ADTM3 to create the cross-section. Select ADTM3 by
clicking Sel By Menu > ADTM3 > Select .
5. Do not display arrows on the drawing at this time. Press the middle
mouse button to continue drawing creation without displaying any
cross-section arrows for section A-A.
6. After you have placed the view on the drawing, turn off the display
for the datum planes and coordinate systems.
Task 4. Place a projection view of the upper housing assembly to the

left of the first view. Explode the view without a cross-section. Place a
second projection view directly above section A-A. Unexplode the view
without a cross-section.
1. Create an exploded projection view to the left of section A-A, as

shown in the following figure. Click Add View > Exploded >
Done . Locate the view to the left of section A-A.
2. Create an unexploded projection view above section A-A, as

shown in the following figure. Click Add View > Done . Locate the
view above section A-A.

NOTES
Figure 5: Projection Views
Task 5. Add the plunger cap part as a second model to the drawing.
Place a general view of this model in the upper left corner of the drawing
and orient the view, then place a projection view to the right of the first
view of the plunger cap.
1. Click Dwg Models > Add Model . A dialog box lists all of the parts
and assemblies in the current directory. Select
PLUNGER_CAP.PRT and click Open .
2. Add a general view of the plunger cap to the drawing. Place the
view in the upper left corner of the sheet. Click Add View > Done .
Locate the view in the upper left corner of the sheet.
3. Orient the view as shown in the following figure. From the

REFERENCE 1 drop-down list, select BACK and select DTM2 on
the screen. From the REFERENCE 2 drop-down list, select RIGHT
and select DTM1. After orienting the view correctly, click OK .
NOTES
Figure 6: Plunger Cap
Note:
Although you turned off the display of datum planes earlier,
the system temporarily turned them back on when orienting
the view. After you place the view, the system automatically
turns off the datum plane display.
4. Create a projection view of the plunger cap to the right of the first
view, as shown in the following figure. Click Add View > Done .
Locate the view to the right of the first view of the plunger cap.
Figure 7: Projection View

NOTES
Task 6. Add a 3-D view of the upper housing assembly by setting the
upper housing as the active model. Any views that you add to a drawing
are for the active model only.
1. Click Dwg Models > Set Model . Select UPPER_HOUSING from

the list of models associated with the drawing. It is now the active
model.
Note:
You can only add views of the active model. Before placing a
view on a drawing that contains multiple models, make sure
that the correct model is active. Pro/ENGINEER displays the
name and type of the active model at the bottom of the screen.
2. Create an exploded view in a 3-D orientation, as shown in the

following figure. Click Add View > General > Exploded > Scale
> Done .
Figure 8: 3-D View Location
NOTES
3. Place the view on the left side of the sheet and select the default
exploded view. Locate the view on the left side of the drawing.
From the SEL STATE menu, confirm the Default check box is
selected and click Done . Enter [.75] as the view scale.
4. Retain the view in the default orientation. In the ORIENTATION

dialog box, from the SAVED VIEWS list select DEFAULT and click
Set > OK .
5. Save the drawing and close the window.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create a drawing of an assembly and display exploded views

in the drawing.
• You can create a drawing to display views of more than one model in
the same drawing.
Module
4
Modifying Views
In this module, you learn various ways to modify drawing views.
Objectives
• Change view location, orientation, and origin.

• Remove views from drawings.
• Modify view boundaries and callouts.
Page 4-1
NOTES
MANIPULATING VIEWS
After placing views in your drawing, you can sometimes improve its
appearance by changing the location, orientation, or origin of a view.
Changing Location
You can easily move a view from one place to another within a drawing,
however, if it is a parent or child of any other view in the drawing, the
parent view causes the child view to move accordingly. For example,
moving a General view causes its Projection view, Auxiliary view and
Revolved view to update their location because of the position
dependency.
Remove the position dependency by changing the Child view to a General

view for more flexibility. Be aware that this also removes other
dependencies and causes the Child view to be completely independent.
Alignment
Using Alignment, you can easily add and remove position dependency
between views. You can align a general view to another general view or
projection view. This establishes position dependency between the views
and causes them to move together. You can unalign a child view to
remove only the position dependency. This preserves the view type and
the position dependency can be easily reestablished.
Orientation
You can change the initial orientation of a general view at any time after
you create it, but remember that the change also affects the orientation of
any dependent views. When reorienting a general view, Pro/ENGINEER
warns you that the change is also going to affect the child views as well
and highlights them on the screen.
NOTES
Note:
When you reorient a general view that has a cross-section, the
cross-section must remain parallel to the screen. If the change
in orientation does not allow this, Pro/ENGINEER does not
reorient the general view.
Origin
Every view has an origin, which controls how the system moves and
locates the view, and how the view is affected by changes in the model.
By default, the origin of a drawing view is at the intersection of the two
diagonals connecting the corners of the view extent, as shown in the
following figure.
View origin
Figure 1: View Origin
You may want to prevent a projection view from overlapping other views
when the size of the model changes, as shown in the following figure. To
set the origin of a drawing view, you can parametrically reference model
geometry and the selected point on the model will remain fixed as the
view changes.
Note:
The setting of the view origin does not change the current
position of the view. The change in origin is only noticeable
when views update to changes in the model geometry.
M o d i f y i n g Vi e w s Pag e 4- 3
NOTES
Original views
Views overlap with default Origin set at

edge
Figure 2: Changing the View Origin
When specifying a new view origin, keep in mind the following:
• For a general view, the selected location on the geometry becomes

fixed.
• If the feature you reference becomes suppressed or deleted, the system
automatically issues a warning and indicates the name of the view with
the missing origin.
• For a projection or auxiliary view, the system transfers the selected
point onto a ray passing through the origin of the parent view in the
direction of the projection. This projected point becomes the origin of
the view.
• You should control the location of the view origin when entities are
related to a view. For example, if draft geometry is related to a view,
locate the geometry with respect to the view origin, not the geometry
of the model in the view.
NOTES
CONTROLLING THE VIEW DISPLAY

With View Display settings you can control hidden line display, tangent
line display and color of model geometry. You can also remove views
from a drawing and modify the view scale.
Using Hidden Line and Tangent Line Display

The display of hidden and tangent lines can be initially set in the drawing
setup file. It can also be controlled at the drawing level through
environment display settings and in individual views. The preferred
method for controlling hidden and tangent line display on your drawing
views is to manually set the display of the individual views. This allows
you to override the environment display settings, which may vary each
time the drawing is opened. See the following figure.
Wireframe Hidden Line No Hidden

Tangent Solid Tangent Centerline Tangent Phantom
Figure 3: Display Modes
Color of Model Geometry

You can toggle the color display of selected views in Drawing mode
between the assigned drawing colors and the colors used in the original
model. This saves time because one command allows you to reuse the
model colors in the drawing.
NOTES
Removing Views
You can remove views from a drawing by permanently deleting them or
temporarily erasing them from the display. You can only delete a view if it
does not have any child views dependent on it.
Tips & Techniques:

Erasing and resuming views is an effective technique for
improving the view regeneration and repaint times of
complicated drawings.
When erasing views, keep in mind the following:
• If a note or symbol is attached to the erased view as well as other

views, the system also erases the leaders attached to the erased view.
When you resume the view, the leaders reappear.
• You cannot show dimensions on another view if you showed them on
the erased view.
• A detailed view of a view with a local X-sec, erase parent view, or
detailed view does not change to a full cross section.
Modifying the View Scale

When you place a view on a drawing, the system controls the scale in one
of two ways: by giving it its own separate scale value or by using the
drawing scale. Pro/ENGINEER uses the drawing scale in the lower left
corner of the screen to control all views that are created without an
independent scale. Modifying this global value will cause all views using
it to update automatically. In addition, when you create any new views
using the drawing scale, the system uses this value.
When placing a detailed or general view, you can specify a separate scale
value to control only that view and any associated child views.
Modifying View Boundaries, Callouts, and the

Reference Point
You can modify the following:
• Boundaries of a detailed view, partial view, or local cross-section to

show more or less detail.
NOTES
• Shape of the detailed view callout.

• Geometry that the view displays.
The following figure shows one detailed view with the outer boundary and
another without it.
Outer boundary shown Outer boundary erased
Figure 4: Manipulating the View Boundary
Changing the Callout

The size of the spline you use to create the detailed view determines the
size of the callout. Therefore, to modify the size of the callout, you must
modify the spline. You can use one of several options to define the shape
of a callout. See the following figure.
NOTES
Figure 5: Detailed View Callout
Moving the Reference Point

You can move the reference point of the view to a new location to change
the geometry that is displayed in the view. The reference point is attached
to specific model geometry; if the geometry moves, the view boundary
moves with it.
NOTES
Changing a Cross-Section
In Pro/ENGINEER you can modify cross-sections in the following ways
to achieve the correct display:
• Change the boundary, reference point, and outer display of a local

cross-section to show greater or lesser detail of a particular area.
• Remove it from the view entirely or replace it with another cross-
section.
• Change the direction in which the cutting arrows point.
• Add a cross-section to a view that was originally placed without one.
• Add and remove cutting arrows.
• Assign the cross-hatching based on the material of the model and
create user defined cross-hatching style.
Changing Cross-Hatching
• You can assign the cross-hatching based on the material of the model.
• You can modify the cross-hatching displayed for a cross-section by
changing the angle, spacing, line style, and offset distance between the
lines, as well as adding or removing lines. After you have defined a
cross-hatching pattern, you can save it in a library for future use on
other drawings.
Assembly Cross-Hatching
When modifying the cross-hatching in an assembly view, you can alter the
cross-hatching displayed for each component intersected by the cutting
plane, as shown in the following figure.
NOTES
Figure 6: Modified Assembly Cross-Hatching
Modifying Assembly Views

In many cases, you may need to create a drawing of an assembly or show
a view of the assembly on a part drawing in order to visualize the part.
When you alter an assembly view for this purpose, keep in mind the
following:
• The system must now retrieve every model that it uses in the assembly
when it retrieves the drawing. If the assembly is large, the retrieval
time could be significant. To avoid this problem, you can create a
snapshot.
• The view may be cluttered by too many hidden lines, which could
make it more difficult to visualize the model. To change the line
display, you can use several options.
• You may not be able to view the components on the default exploded
view, but you can modify an exploded assembly view.
NOTES
Creating a Snapshot
When you want to show an assembly view on a part drawing without
having to retrieve the assembly and all of its parts, you can convert the
assembly view to a snapshot, which is a collection of 2-D draft entities
that are not associated to the corresponding model. You can then delete
the assembly model from the drawing because none of the drawing views
reference it.
When you convert a view into a snapshot, the following changes occur:
• All visible geometry, axes, datums, and other entities in the view
become draft entities.
• All draft entities that were previously associated to the view become
free.
• All attached drawing items (notes, gtols, symbols, draft dimensions,
etc.) become unattached.
• All visible model dimensions become draft dimensions.
• The system deletes the original view from the drawing.
• If you select a view that has child views, the system also makes those
into snapshots and deletes the original views.
• If you select a view that has erased children, the system deletes those
as well.
Note:
Once you convert a view to a snapshot, the system no longer
parametrically associates it to the original model in any way.
Therefore, if you change the model, the snapshot geometry
does not update to reflect the changes.
Removing Entities
You can remove entities from a view by controlling the display of
members in an assembly or by using Z-Clipping to exclude geometry
behind a specified plane.
NOTES
Controlling the Display of Assembly Members
By setting the display for each component in an assembly individually as

shown in the following figure, you can display some members in Hidden
Line mode and others in No Hidden mode, as well as blank individual
components from the screen. You can also manipulate individual edges of
the model by blanking them or changing their display.
Figure 7: Changing Member Display from the default to Phantom Transparent
Excluding Geometry Behind a Specified Plane

Using Z-Clipping, you can modify the view display by excluding all the
geometry behind a specified plane. This technique is useful if you want to
see some of the hidden lines but not all of them, as shown in the following
figure. Using Z-Clipping, you can remove many background lines quickly.
When you perform Z-Clipping in a view, keep in mind the following:
• If the system cannot regenerate the reference for the clipping plane, Z-
Clipping does not take effect for the view, it displays an error message.
• You cannot perform Z-Clipping in unfolded cross-sectional, area
cross-sectional, exploded, and perspective views.
• The Z-Clipping of a detailed view is always the same as its parent.
You cannot modify it individually.
• You can place the Z-Clipping reference point on any view.
NOTES
Figure 8: Before and After applying a Z-Clipping
Creating Exploded Views

When you place an assembly view on a drawing, you can place it in a
default-exploded state or choose from any existing exploded state. In
Drawing mode, you control which components explode, as well as the
actual explode distance, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 9: Assembly Explode Modification
When modifying an exploded view, you must specify the following:
• Setting up preferences – Preferences enables you to control whether

the components move incrementally or smoothly, the number of
components to move at a time (one or many), and whether child
components should move with the parent components.
NOTES
• Controlling the direction of movement – While changing the

explode distances for a component, you can select a variety of model
references to set the explode direction.
• Specifying the components to move – You can drag all components
to a new location at the same time so that the system offsets them at
the same explode distance.
Note:
If you modify an exploded view in the drawing, the view
becomes independent of the exploded view of the assembly. If
you make changes to the exploded state in the assembly, the
system does not reflect them in the modified drawing view.
Changing View Type

You can modify certain view types for more flexibility. For example, you
can change a non-scaled general view to a scaled general view or you can
change a detail view to a general view, and so on.
Note:
Changing detail views to general views enables you to set edge
display and blanking of components in the detail view,
independent from the parent view.
NOTES

The following table lists the available configuration file options that you
can use to modify views in a drawing.
Table 1: Configuration File Options Controlling View Modification

drawing_view_origin_csys none Specifies a coordinate system as
name of CSYS the origin of a newly created
view.
hlr_for_quilts no Includes or excludes quilts from
yes the hidden line removal process
(not cross-sectional views).
pro_crosshatch_dir directory path Specifies the default directory for
a library of cross-hatching
patterns.
variant_drawing_item_ no If set to “no,” all items moved or
sizes yes copied to a different sheet retain
the same size on paper.
If set to “yes,” some items scale
and/or reposition to be the same
size or position on the paper,
while other items scale and/or
reposition to be the same size or
position on the screen.
NOTES

The following table lists the available drawing setup file options that you
can use to modify views in a drawing.
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Controlling View Modification

axis_line_offset 0.1 Sets the default distance that a
value linear axis extends beyond its
associated feature.
circle_axis _offset 0.1 Sets the default distance that a

Value circular cross-hair axis extends
beyond the circular edge.
datum_point_shape cross Controls the shape of a datum

dot point.
circle
triangle
square
datum_point_size .3125 Controls the size of the datum
value points and sketched 2-D points.
NOTES
radial_pattern_axis_circle no Sets display mode for axes of

yes rotation that are perpendicular
to the screen in radial pattern
features. If set to “no,'' displays
axis lines (Figure a). If set to
“yes,'' a circular shared axis
appears, and axis lines pass
through the center of a
rotational pattern (Figure b).
NOTES
Goal
To improve the display and clarity of drawing views.
Method
In Exercise 1, you manipulate the views of the plunger body drawing.
In Exercise 2, you manipulate the views of the barrel drawing.
In Exercise 3, you manipulate the views of a assembly/multi-model

drawing.
Figure 10: Plunger Body Drawing
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Manipulating Views

Task 1. Clean up the drawing display by changing the scale and
repositioning the views, cross-sectional arrows and view notes using the
[Select] icon.
1. Set your working directory to the folder that corresponds to the

name of the current module.
2. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_MOD_VIEWS.DRW. If you have

already finished the plunger body drawing, you can work on
PLUNGER_BODY.DRW.
3. If the datum planes and datum coordinate systems appear on the

screen, turn them off using the icons on the toolbar and repaint.
4. From the pull down menu, click Edit > Value and select the scale
value in the lower left corner of the screen. Enter [2.00] as the
new scale value.
5. Reposition the views, as shown in the preceding figure. Click the

[Select] icon. Select a view from the screen to move; the
system highlights that view and its child views. Place the views in
the correct position.
Tips & Techniques:

You can also move a view using Views > Move View
option from menu manager.
6. Move the cross-sectional arrows displayed in the upper left view to

the positions shown in the following figure. With the [Select]
icon still clicked, select the arrows and move them to the correct
position.
NOTES
Figure 11: Cross-Section Arrow Locations
7. For Detail 1, Detail 2, Section A-A, and Section B-B, reposition

the view names to place them directly beneath the corresponding
views. Using the [Select] icon, select the view names and move
them to the correct position.
Task 2. To prevent the environment settings for the hidden and tangent
line display from affecting the drawing, set the display of each view.
1. Click Views > Disp Mode > View Disp . Select the 3-D view, both
cross-sectional views, and both detail views, then click Done Sel
to display the DISP MODE menu.
Tips & Techniques:

To speed up the selection process, you can press the middle
mouse button instead of clicking Done Sel .
2. Click No Hidden > Tan Solid . Click Det Indep to set the display
mode of the detailed views differently from their parents, then
click Done .
3. Select the remaining views on the drawing and press the middle
mouse button. Click Hidden Line > Tan Solid > Done .
Task 3. Decrease the scale of the 3-D view of the plunger.
1. Click Modify View > View Type and select the 3-D view.
2. Click Scale > Done .
3. Enter [.8] as the scale value.
NOTES
Task 4. Modify the location of the tab in the upper-left view. Notice that
the detailed view no longer displays the correct geometry. Redefine the
reference point that you used for the detailed view so that it is attached to
the tab.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_MOD_VIEWS.PRT.
Note:
If you used PLUNGER_BODY.DRW in this exercise, retrieve
PLUNGER_BODY.PRT instead.
2. Modify the tab shown in the following figure, change the

horizontal 0.50 location dimension to [0.25], and click
Regenerate .
Modify the location

of this tab
Figure 12: Modify the Tab Location
3. Click Window > PLUNGER_BODY_MOD_VIEWS.DRW . DETAIL

1 should display as shown in the following figure.
Note:
The tab is no longer centered in the detailed view because the
reference point for the boundary of that detail was not an
appropriate choice. You selected the side edge of the plunger
body instead of the edge of the tab.
NOTES
Original reference
point
New reference
point
Figure 13: New Tab Location
4. Move the reference point of DETAIL 1 to the edge of the tab.

Click Views > Modify View > Ref Point and select DETAIL 1 as
the view to alter. The original reference point displays in the upper
left view. Select the edge of the tab as the new reference, as shown
in the following figure. Click Done Sel > Done.
5. Activate the window for the

PLUNGER_BODY_MOD_VIEWS.PRT.
6. Modify the location of the tab to [0.50].
7. Activate the window for the

PLUNGER_BODY_MOD_VIEWS.DRW and notice the change that
occurred in DETAIL 1.
Task 5. Reduce the amount of geometry shown in the DETAIL 2 view.

Modify the view boundary to include only one of the flanges.
1. Click Views > Modify View > Boundary and select DETAIL 2.
Figure 14: Original Detailed View
NOTES
2. Press the left mouse button to sketch a spline around one of the
flanges. Use the middle mouse button to finish the spline
boundary. Click Done from the VIEW BNDRY menu. Repaint the
screen, if necessary. Click Done > Return from the VIEWS menu.
Figure 15: New Detailed View
Task 6. Modify the cross-hatching shown in Sections A-A, B-B, and

DETAIL 2. Create new cross-hatching and save it for future drawings.
1. Click the [Select] icon, press and hold <SHIFT> and select the
cross-hatching lines in Section A-A and Section B-B. Click Edit >
Properties from the pull down menu.
2. Add a second line to the cross-hatching. Click Add Line , enter

[45] as the angle, [.1] as the offset value, [.44] to define the
distance between each segment of the new line.
3. In the MODIFY LINE STYLE dialog box, select DOTFONT from

the LINE FONT drop-down list. Click Apply > Close .
4. Decrease the spacing of the cross-hatching. Click Spacing and use

Half and Double to achieve spacing similar to that shown in the
following figure.
NOTES
Figure 16: User-Defined Cross-Hatching
5. Save this cross-hatching for future use in other drawings. Click

Save , enter [user_def] and click Done .
Note:
The system automatically updates the cross-hatching on
DETAIL 2 because a detailed view obtains its cross-hatching
from its parent view by default.
6. Decrease the spacing of the cross-hatching of DETAIL 2. Click the

[Select] icon, select the cross-hatching lines in DETAIL 2, then
click Edit > Properties f rom the pull down menu.
7. The MOD XHATCH menu appears with most of the options

unavailable because the cross-hatching of a detailed view is the
same as its parent view by default. Click Det Indep to make the
detailed view independent of its parent view.
8. Click Spacing > Half . If the cross-hatching is acceptable, click

Done to finish.
Figure 17: Detailed View Cross-Hatching
9. Save the drawing and close all the windows.
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Altering the Display of Views
Figure 18: Barrel Drawing
NOTES
Task 1. Retrieve BARREL_MOD_VIEWS.DRW and change the scale

of the sheet and the detailed view. If the views are too close, move them to
new positions.
1. Retrieve BARREL_MOD_VIEWS.DRW.
Note:
If you have finished the barrel drawing earlier, you can work
on BARREL.DRW.
2. Modify the scale of the sheet to [1.25]. From the pull down menu,
click Edit > Value and select the scale value in the lower left
corner of the screen. Enter [1.25] as the new scale value.
3. Modify the scale of DETAIL 1 to 2.5. From the pull down menu,
click Edit > Value and select the scale value beneath DETAIL 1.
Enter [2.5] as the new scale value.
4. Using the [Select] icon, position the view names directly

beneath the views.
Task 2. Modify the cross-hatching in Section A-A, retrieve the cross-

hatching that you saved in the previous exercise and add cross-sectional
arrows to the view in the upper right corner of the sheet.
1. Click the [Select] icon, the cross-hatching lines in Section A-A,

then click Edit > Properties f rom the pull down menu..
2. Click Retrieve > user_def >Open . Click Done from the MOD
XHATCH menu.
3. Click Views > Modify View > Add Arrows . Select Section A-A
and select the upper right view to place the arrows.
4. Move the arrows so that they display as shown in the following

figure.
NOTES
Figure 19: New Cross-Hatching and Arrows
Task 3. Set the display of each view on the drawing so that it is

independent of the environment settings.
1. Click Views > Disp Mode > View Disp . Select all of the views on
the drawing, then click Done Sel .
2. Click Hidden Line > Tan Solid > Done .
3. Save and close the drawing.
NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Modifying Assembly and Multi-Model

Drawing
NOTES
Task 1. Set the display of each view on the upper housing drawing so it
is independent of the environment settings.
1. Retrieve UPPER_HOUSING_MOD_VIEWS.DRW. ( If you have

already finished the upper housing drawing, you can work on
UPPER_HOUSING.DRW.)
2. Click Views > Disp Mode > View Disp . Select the two views of
the plunger cap and click Done Sel .
3. Click Hidden Line > Tan Solid > Done to display hidden lines in
these views and tangent lines as solid lines.
4. Select the upper housing views and press the middle mouse button.
Click No Hidden > Tan Phantom > Done .
Task 2. Modify the scale of the views. Move some of the views to a
new sheet and change their positions.
1. Click Dwg Models > Set Model > PLUNGER_CAP >

Done/Return .
2. Click Edit > Value and select the scale value in the lower left
corner of the screen. Enter [3.00] to modify the sheet scale for the
plunger cap.
3. Make the UPPER_HOUSING_MOD_VIEWS assembly the active

model.
4. Change the sheet scale for the upper housing to [1.25].
5. From the DRAWING menu, click Sheets > Switch Sheets , select
the two plunger cap views and the 3-D assembly view, and click
Done Sel > Done .
6. Position the views as shown in the following figure.
Task 3. Alter the right side projection of the plunger cap part to include
a cross-section. The cross-section should cut through the center of the part.
After you create the cross-section, change the cross-hatching.
1. Click Views > Modify View > View Type . Select the right side
projection of the plunger cap part and click Section > Done .
2. If the datum planes do not appear, turn them on. Repaint the
screen.
NOTES
3. Click Full > Total Xsec > Done .
4. Click Create > Planar > Done .
5. Enter [B] as the name, select DTM1 as the cutting plane and select
the left view for the arrows.
Figure 21: Section B-B
6. Turn off the datum planes.
7. Select cross-hatching lines in Section B-B and click Edit >

Properties .
8. Decrease the default spacing of the cross-hatching by half. Click

Spacing > Half , then click Done .
Task 4. Modify the orientation of the 3-D view of the upper housing
assembly. Retrieve the assembly and spin the model to an appropriate 3-D
view. Save the orientation as a named view and use it in the drawing.
1. Retrieve the UPPER_HOUSING_MOD_VIEWS.ASM. (If you

retrieved the UPPER_HOUSING.DRW at the start of this exercise,
retrieve UPPER_HOUSING.ASM instead.)
2. Spin the model to an orientation similar to the one shown in the

following figure.
NOTES
Figure 22: New 3-D Orientation
3. Click View > Reorient . Expand Saved Views in the

ORIENTATION dialog box to display any saved views. Enter [3D]
for the name and click Save > OK .
4. Click Window > Close Window . Click Window > Activate to

activate the drawing window.
5. Click Views > Modify View > Reorient .
6. Select the upper 3-D assembly view to reorient. From the list of
saved views, select 3D and clic k Set > OK .
Task 5. Change the explode distances of the components in the upper

housing assembly. Set the preferences to allow the movement of all four
bolts at the same time.
1. Click Mod Expld , select the 3D view, and click Redefine >
Position .
2. Click Preferences, select MOVE MANY, and click Close .
3. Set the direction of movement to be normal to the top of the upper

housing part. From the MOTION REFERENCE drop-down list,
select PLANE NORMAL, click Query Sel , and select the top
surface of the upper housing, as shown in the following figure.
When the correct surface highlights, click Accept to finish.
NOTES
Select this top surface

to move normal to the
plunger assembly and
the bolts
Locate the
plunger assembly
here
Figure 23: Plane Normal Surface
4. Reposition the plunger assembly below the upper housing. Click

Query Sel and select the plunger assembly inside the cavity of the
upper housing. Click Next until the plunger assembly is selected,
then click Accept > Done Sel . Press the left mouse button and
drag the plunger assembly to a position similar to the one shown in
the following figure.
Plunger cap
Plunger assembly
Normal surface for
the plunger cap
Figure 24: New Explode Positions in 3-D View
NOTES
5. Select the four bolt components and click Done Sel . Press the left
mouse button and drag the bolts to their new position.
6. Move the plunger cap as shown in the preceding figure. In the

MOTION REFERENCE area of the dialog box, click the [Select]
icon and select a suitable, normal surface for the plunger cap.
7. Select the plunger cap and click Done Sel . Drag the plunger cap to
its new position and press the left mouse button to finish the move.
Click Done Sel > OK .
8. Return to sheet one and move the views so they are evenly spaced
on the drawing. Click Sheets > Previous > Done/Return .
9. Modify the explode distances on the views of the upper housing

assembly. Click View > Modify View > Mod Expld , then select the
view in the lower right corner of the drawing.
10. Click Redefine > Position .
11. Click Preferences , select MOVE MANY, and click Close.
Note:
The system does not save the preferences that you use to
modify an exploded view. You must redo the preferences the
next time that you modify explode distances.
12. Set the direction by selecting a vertical edge on the plunger body
part. From the MOTION REFERENCE pull-down list select
ENTITY/EDGE, then select the vertical edge of the plunger body
part as shown in the following figure.
Select this edge for

the motion reference.
Figure 25: Vertical Motion Reference
NOTES
13. Change the positions of the components as shown in the following

figure.
Figure 26: New Explode Positions
Task 6. Modify the explode distances in the lower left view to match the
distances in Section A-A by changing the type of view to a general view
and then back to a projection view. The system recreates the projection
based on the new positions of the components.
1. Click Views > Modify View > View Type . Select the view in the
lower left corner of the sheet, and click General > Done .
2. Click View Type and select the same view again.
3. Click Projection > Done . Select Section A-A as the view from
which to create the projection.
Figure 27: Exploded Projection
NOTES
Task 7. Modify the cross-hatching in Section A-A of the upper housing.

For the plunger part in the upper housing assembly, retrieve a saved cross-
hatching.
1. Click the [Select] icon and select the cross-hatching lines in

Section A-A, then click Edit > Properties f rom the pull-down
menu.
2. Click Next Xsec until you highlight the cross-hatching in the

upper housing part.
3. Click Spacing from the MOD XHATCH menu. Click Half twice
to decrease the cross-hatching spacing. Click Angle from the
MOD XHATCH menu and select 135 to change the angle of the
cross-hatching.
4. Click Next Xsec to make the plunger cap active. Click Spacing >
Value and enter [0.055].
5. Click Next Xsec > Retrieve > user_def >Open > Done.
Figure 28: Section A-A Cross-Hatching
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can change view location, orientation, and origin.

• You can remove views from a drawing.
• You can modify view boundaries and callouts.
Module
5
Showing Dimensions
In this module, you learn how to display dimensions and manipulate
their display characteristics.
Objectives
• Display dimensions and related details.

• Change dimension locations.
• Convert linear dimensions to ordinate dimensions.
• Create hole charts.
Page 5-1
NOTES
DRAWING DETAILS
After you add views, you should add detail items such as dimensions to
complete production drawings. You can create detail items on a drawing
directly. You can also show detail items created in Part mode or Assembly
mode on a drawing.
To avoid repeated work and preserve associativity before you create new
dimensions in your drawings, you should show dimensions and other
detail items that were created in Part mode or Assembly mode. Keep in
mind the following:
• It is quicker to show a dimension on the drawing and move it than to

recreate the dimension.
• Because of Pro/ENGINEER’s associativity, you can modify the
dimensions you showed from 3D models at the drawing level and the
system reflects it at the part or assembly level.
• Drawing templates can be used to automate the Displaying and
positioning of dimensions.
Showing and Erasing Detail Items

You can use the MODEL TREE, the SHOW/ERASE dialog box, as well as
the popup menu to show and erase the detailed items.
Using the MODEL TREE

The easiest way to show dimensions of features in part drawings and
dimensions of parts in assembly drawings is using MODEL TREE.
Figure 1 Using Model Tree to Show Dimensions
NOTES
Using the Show/Erase Dialog Box

While the MODEL TREE provides a quick and easy access to feature and
part dimensions, the SHOW/ERASE dialog box gives you more options and
control when detailing a drawing.
Specifying the Type of Detail Item to Show
The SHOW/ERASE dialog box as shown in the following figure, allows

you to show various types of detail items in a drawing. You can show any
number of detail items at one time, but it is easier to show one type on the
drawing at a time.
Figure 2: Show/Erase Dialog Box
Specifying Items to Show

• Feature – Shows detail items for a selected feature in a view
determined by the system. This option is useful if you did not build the
model yourself. You can use the MODEL TREE to make sure that you
select every feature.
• View – Shows detail items for a selected view.
Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s Pag e 5- 3
NOTES
• Feat _ View – Select a feature in a view to show detail items for that
feature in that view. This option gives you the most control in
displaying items.
• Part– Shows detail items in specific parts within an assembly
drawing.
• Part _ View – Shows detail items in a specific part and view within an
assembly drawing.
• Show All – Shows all detail items in all views. If you use this method
to show items, you should also preview the drawing.
Note:
When Displaying part dimensions in an assembly drawing, the
View and Show All options do not display part dimensions.
Using Filtering Options

• Erased – Show only items that have been previously erased from the
drawing, without displaying items that have never been shown before.
• Never Shown – Show items that have never been shown on the
drawing.
• Switch to Ordinate – Show dimensions as ordinate using an existing
baseline.
Previewing Detail Items
You can preview detail items in the drawing and decide if you want to
show them. You can show all of them, erase all of them, or select
individual items to display or remove.
Erasing Detail Items

To erase dimensions and other detail items from a drawing, you can use
the SHOW/ERASE dialog box with the same technique that you use to
show dimensions.
You can also select the item on drawing and using pop up menu to erase
and unerase them.
NOTES
Figure 3 Erase and Unerase Dimension Using Pop-Up Menu
MANIPULATING DETAIL ITEMS

After you show the detailed items in a drawing, you can change their
locations as well as their appearances.
Changing Location
You can manually change the location of the detailed items using the drag
handles and the snap lines. You can also position the detailed items using
the [Clean Dim] option.
Move the Detailed Items Manually
Using [Select] icon, dimensions and other detail items can be easily
selected and moved. Drag handles will be displayed. They can be used to
perform various move operations.
NOTES
Figure 4 Move a dimension
Using the Snap Lines

Snap lines are dashed lines used to locate detail items to exact locations on
drawings.
You can define snap lines on individual drawings to locate detail items
such as dimensions, notes, geometric tolerances, symbols, and surface
finish symbols. The system positions the snap lines relative to the view
outline, or a selected model edge or datum plane.
You can manipulate snap lines by changing the offset distances,

modifying the length, blanking them or deleting them from the drawing.
When working with snap lines, keep in mind the following:
• You can turn on and off snap lines display from the Environment.
• You can place snap lines on layers and blank them, but once you blank
them, you cannot add new items to them. Existing items continue to
snap.
• When you delete a view, the system deletes its snap lines also.
• You cannot add entities of one view to another view’s snap line.
• If you place a dimension at the intersection of two snap lines, you can
snap to either or both of the snap lines.
Cleaning Up Dimensions
You can improve or clean up a cluttered display of linear dimensions on a
drawing. You can use this option after you initially display dimensions on
a drawing to move those that are overlapping one another or to move them
NOTES
off the model itself. You can also use this technique to automatically
locate your dimensions according to exact specifications such as the
following:
• A certain distance away from a view.

• A certain distance away from each other.
• Centered in between the witness lines.
You can also use the CLEAN DIMENSIONS dialog box to flip the
dimension arrows, create snap lines where the dimensions are located, and
break the intersecting witness lines.
Note:
The Clean Dims option only affects linear dimensions. You
cannot use it to modify the display of diametric, radial, or
angular dimensions.
Changing Dimension Displays

Using Dual Dimensioning
Dual dimensioning allows you to show dimensions in English and metric
units at the same time. Through the drawing setup file, you can set the
dimensions to dual and specify their format. The following drawing setup
file options affect dual dimensioning:
• dual_dimensioning
• dual_secondary_unit
• dual_digits_diff
• decimal_marker
• dual_dimension_brackets
• dual_metric_dim_show_fractions
Ordinate Dimensions
Pro/ENGINEER displays ordinate dimensions in a drawing using a single
witness line without a leader. The system associates one set of ordinate
dimensions with a baseline reference, as shown in the following figure.
For a set of ordinate dimensions to reference the same baseline, they must
share a common plane or edge that you can use as a baseline reference.
NOTES
You can use the following ways to place ordinate dimensions on drawing:
• Show dimensions as ordinate using an existing baseline

• Convert existing dimensions to ordinate dimensions
• Create ordinate dimensions
A suitable baseline is required when using any of the above options.
Creating a Baseline Reference
To create a baseline, you must convert a linear dimension to ordinate and

select one of its witness lines as the baseline reference. You can then use it
to place dimensions in an ordinate form.
You can convert ordinate dimensions back to linear at any time. However,
when converting ordinate dimensions back to linear, the system does not
automatically remove the baseline for that dimension from the drawing.
You must delete it manually. You can delete a baseline reference if none
of the drawing dimensions are using it and you do not need it any longer.
Note:
When converting dimensions, you can add a jog to the witness
line to improve the spacing of the dimensions.
Figure 5: Ordinate Dimensions
Using the Dtl Option

• iso_ordinate_delta ― It improves the display of the offset
between an ISO-ordinate dimension and the witness line. If you set it
NOTES
to yes, the system uses the drawing setup file option

witness_line_delta. If you set it to no, the offset differs by
approximately 2 mm. The default value is no to preserve old drawings.
• orddim_text_orientation ― It is used to specify the
orientation of ordinate dimensions, you can set the drawing setup file
option to parallel or horizontal.
Adding Text to Dimensions

Using the DIMENSION PROPERTIES dialog box, you can manipulate
dimension text in the following ways:
• Add a prefix (R) or postfix (TYP) to a dimension.

• Change the dimension symbol.
• Specify that the system always show the symbol, regardless of the
other dimensions, by changing the dimension text from @D to @S.
This would be useful, for example, if you wanted to indicate the
direction of the width of the model. You could change the symbol to
width and specify that Pro/ENGINEER always show the symbol
instead of the value.
Manipulating Dimension Arrows and Extension Lines

After you clean up the dimension display on a drawing, you can also
manipulate the arrows and extension lines in the following ways:
• Flip arrows – You can change the direction of linear, radial, and
diametric dimension arrows, as shown in the following figure.
Arrows
flipped
Figure 6: Flipping Arrows
• Clip the extension lines – Clip refers to creating a gap between the
end of an extension line and object being dimensioned.
! Pro/ENGINEER automatically determines if it should clip
extension lines when it performs an overlap check before plotting. To
check if extension lines are properly clipped, you can plot to the
screen, as shown in the following figure.
NOTES
! System uses the drawing setup file option

witness_line_offset to control the gap size.
! You can manipulate the gap of individual extension line using

the drag handle when you move a dimension.
Figure 7: Clipping Dimensions

• Insert Jogs – You can jog the extension line of dimensions or the
leader of a note to create more space for text, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 8: Making a Jog

• Insert Breaks – You create breaks on extension lines and cutting lines
to prevent overlapping and intersecting.
! Dimension cleanup includes automatic breaks in intersecting
witness lines
! You can add simple breaks in individual extension lines and

cutting lines as shown in the following figure,
! You can create a parametric break on one extension line around

another extension line so that it updates when the model changes
NOTES
Break added around

geometry
Figure 9: Simple Break
• Align sets of dimensions – Using [Move & align several objects]

icon, you can line up sets of dimensions and move them as a group. It
is very useful when working with ordinate dimensions.
• Change the diameter dimension type – You can change a diameter
dimension to a linear dimension, or vice versa, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 10: Changing the Diameter Type
• Erase the witness lines – The system automatically displays

dimensions with witness lines, but you can easily remove them to
reduce the clutter, as shown in the following figure.
Sh o wi n g Di m e n s i o n s Pag e 5 - 1 1
NOTES
Figure 11: Line Display

• Change the arrow style – You can remove the dimension arrow, or
change it to a dot, double arrow, slash, integral, or box, as shown in
Figure 12: Various Arrow Styles

The following table lists the available configuration file options that affect
the display of dimensions on a drawing.
NOTES
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Dimension Display

allow_move_attach_in_ yes If set to “yes,” Move acts
dtl_move no as Move and Mod
Attach for radial and
diameter dimensions. If set
to “no,” each acts
separately.
ang_units ang_deg Sets display for angle
ang_min values to degrees, degrees
and decimal minutes, or
ang_sec degrees, minutes, and
decimal seconds.
default_dec_places 2 Sets default number of
value decimal places displayed
in all modes. Does not
affect the number of digits
of dimensions changed
using Num Digits .
dim_fraction_denominator 32 Sets largest denominator
value for fractional dimensions.
If the fraction can be
reduced, converts it to the
lowest possible
denominator.
highlight_new_dims no Highlights new
yes dimensions added to the
drawing until you move or
refresh them.
mark_approximate_dims no When set to “yes,” if a
yes dimension is driven by a
relation with a value that is
not equal to the displayed
dimension, displays a tilde
(~) in front of the
dimension.
use_major_units no Determines display of
yes fractional dimensions
(feet-inches or meter-mm).
For example, if the units
are inches, if you convert
25.125 to a fraction, it
becomes 2’ 1-1/8”.
NOTES

The following table lists the available drawing setup file options that
affect the display of dimensions in drawing views.
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Dimension Display

allow_3d_dimensions no Shows dimensions in
yes isometric views.
clip_dimensions no Controls display of
yes dimensions in detailed
views. When set to “yes,”
does not display
dimensions totally outside
a detailed view boundary,
and shows those that cross
a detailed boundary with a
special double arrow.
When set to “no,” displays
all dimensions.
decimal_marker comma_for_metric_dual Determines which

period character marks the
decimal point in secondary
comma dimensions.
default_dim_elbows yes Determines whether
no dimensions display with or
without elbows.
dim_leader_length 0.5 Sets the length of the
value dimension leader line
when the leader arrows are
outside the witness lines.
dim_text_gap 0.5 Controls the distance

factor between the dimension
text and dimension leader
line, and represents the
ratio between the gap size
and text height.
NOTES
draw_ang_units ang_deg Sets the display of angular

ang_min dimensions in a drawing to
degrees; degrees and
ang_sec decimal minutes; or
degrees, minutes, and
decimal seconds.
draw_arrow_length 0.1875 Sets the length of leader
value line arrows.
draw_arrow_style closed Specifies the arrow type.

open
filled
draw_arrow_width 0.0625 Sets the width of leader

value line arrows.
dual_digits_diff -1 Specifies the number of

value digits to the right of the
decimal that the secondary
dimension differs from the
primary dimension.
dual_dimension_brackets yes Displays dimension units
no that occur second in
brackets.
dual_dimensioning no Specifies the format for the
primary[secondary] display of dual
dimensions. Primary units
secondary[primary] are the model units.
secondary
dual_secondary_unit mm Sets the units for the
inch display of secondary
dimensions.
foot
cm
m
iso_ordinate_delta no Improves the display of the
yes offset between an ISO-
ordinate dimension and the
witness line.
NOTES
lead_trail_zeros std_default Controls the use of leading

std_metric and trailing zeros in a
dimension. If set to
std_english “std_default,” displays the
both dimension according to its
units. If set to
“std_metric,” displays the
dimension with leading
zeros (0.9). If set to
“std_english,” displays the
dimension with trailing
zeros (.90). “Both”
displays both leading and
trailing zeros, regardless of
whether the units are
English or metric.
leader_elbow_length 0.25 Determines the length of
value the leader elbow (the
horizontal leg attached to
the text).
model_grid_balloon_size 0.2 Specifies the default radius
value of balloons shown with the
model grid in the drawing.
model_grid_negative_ “-“ (default) Controls the negative
prefix any string values shown in the
balloons of the model grid.
model_grid_num_dig_ 0 Controls the number of
display value (integer) digits displayed in grid
coordinates that appear in
grid balloons. You can
specify the number of
decimal places or use the
default (0) to display
coordinates as integers.
parallel_dim_placement above Determines whether the
below dimension value appears
above or below the leader
line when
“text_orientation” is set to
“parallel.” This option
does not apply to dual
dimensions.
NOTES
text_orientation horizontal Sets the orientation of

parallel dimension text in the
drawing.
parallel_diam_horiz
witness_line_delta 0.125 Sets the extension of the

value witness line beyond the
dimension leader arrows.
witness_line_offset 0.0625 Sets the gap between a
value dimension line and the
object being dimensioned.
NOTES
Goal
To show and manipulate dimension on a drawing.
Method
In the first exercise, dimensions are shown for features in any view and for
features in a selected view. After the dimensions are shown, they are
switched to different views, moved, and the default display is enhanced.
In the second exercise, dimensions are shown in their symbolic form and
the default symbolic name is modified.
In the third exercise, the dimensions on a multi-model and assembly

drawing are displayed as dual dimensions.
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Displaying Dimensions
Figure 13: Plunger Drawing
Task 1. Using MODEL TREE, show dimensions on the plunger body

drawing for a selected feature in any view.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_SHOW_DIMS.PRT.
NOTES
Note:
If you have finished the plunger body drawing earlier, you can
work on PLUNGER_BODY.PRT and
PLUNGER_BODY.DRW.
2. Highlight features in MODEL TREE and become familiar with its

geometry. Then close the window.
3. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_SHOW_DIMS.DRW and turn off all

datum features.
4. Show the dimensions for the first protrusion. Right click the first
protrusion in MODEL TREE, choose Show Dimensions .
Figure 14 Using MODEL TREE to show dimensions of the first protrusion
5. Repeat this for Cut id 198, Hole id 801, Cut id 772, Hole id 1803.
Task 2. Move dimensions, flip arrow of the dimension and use drag
handle to move text.
1. Move the dimensions in the front view. First, select the .750
dimension using [Select] icon. Move it to its new position, as
shown in the following figure, and press the left mouse button to
place it.
2. Select and move the 1.500 dimension and flip the arrow. While
moving the dimension, press the right mouse button to flip the
arrows. Move it to its new position as shown in the following
figure and press the left mouse button to place it.
3. Repeat this for the 1.125 and .250 diameter dimensions.
NOTES
Figure 15: Dimension Locations
4. Move the dimensions in lower left view. First, move the 3.000
dimension to its new position, as shown in the preceding figure.
5. Repeat this for the .100 and the .300 linear dimensions.
6. Select the .100 linear dimension and use the correct move handle
to move the text to the other side of the elbow.
7. In the upper left view, move the .100 diameter dimension as shown
in the preceding figure.
8. Using the correct move handle, move the text to the other side of
the leader.
Task 3. Switch dimensions to other views
1. Switch the remaining dimensions in the lower left view to Section

A-A. Press and hold <Shift> and select the two remaining
dimensions, click Edit > Switch to View . When system prompt for
a view, select Section A-A.
Note:
You can also use pop up menu or [Switch View] icon to
perform switch view.
NOTES
2. Once you have switched the dimensions to the new view,

reposition them as shown in the preceding figure. Flip arrows as
necessary.
Task 4. Using SHOW/ERASE dialogue box, show dimensions for a

selected feature in a selected view on the drawing.
1. Click View > Show and Erase . Select Show . Select the dimension
icon under the TYPE section. Select Feat_View under the SHOW
BY section.
2. Show the dimensions for the holes in Section B-B. Click Query
Sel from the menu and select the surface of the through hole. Click
Accept when the correct feature highlights.
3. Repeat this for the counter-bore hole in Section B-B, as shown in

Counter-bore hole
Through hole
Figure 16: Section B-B
4. Click Query Sel from the menu and select the surface of the tab
from DETAIL 1, as shown in the following figure.
5. Repeat the previous step for the surface of the round in DETAIL 1,
as shown in the following figure. Click Done Sel > Sel To
Remove . Select the . 500 dimension. Click Done Sel to finish the
selections.
6. Clear the With Preview check box and close the SHOW/ERASE
dialog box.
NOTES
Tab
Round
Figure 17: DETAIL 1
7. Use the asynchronous pop-up menu to move the dimensions

displayed in Section B-B and DETAIL 1 to the locations shown in
the following figure. Experiment with the dimension handles that
are available for the different dimension types.
Task 5. Use Mod Attach to move a dimension.
1. Display the .05-radius dimension on the other side of the tab. Right
click the .05 dimension to bring up ASYNCHRONOUS pop-up
menu
NOTES
2. Click Mod Attach . The system displays all possible locations in

magenta. Select the round surface on the other side of the tab and
press the middle mouse button to finish.
3. Move and flip the arrows on the remaining dimensions for

DETAIL 1 and SECTION B-B so the drawing looks like the
preceding figure.
Task 6. Show the dimensions for the flanges in the upper left view
using learned techniques.
1. From pull down menu, click View > Show/Erase > Show >
. Select FEAT_VIEW. Select the flange shown in the
following figure to show the dimension, then close the dialog box.
Select this witness

line as the baseline
Select this flange to
display dimensions
Figure 19: Flange Dimensions
2. Move the dimensions to the positions shown in the preceding

figure using the techniques discussed earlier.
3. Switch the .05 thickness dimension to DETAIL 2, then reposition

it as shown the preceding figure.
4. If the witness lines are extending too far, resize it using appropriate
drag handle.
Task 7. Convert the .650 and 1.700 dimensions in the upper left view to
ordinate.
1. Click Edit > Linear to Ordinate .
NOTES
2. Accept the default of Create Base and select the 1.700 dimension.
Specify a baseline by selecting the witness line on the left side.
3. Select the .650 dimension to convert it to ordinate.
Task 8. Show the dimensions for the other flanges as ordinate

dimensions.
1. Click View > Show and Erase , click the Options tab and select
Switch to Ordinate.
2. Select the .00 as the ordinate baseline dimension and press the
middle mouse button to finish. Select each flange to display the
dimensions as ordinate. Close the dialog box.
Task 9. Line up multiple dimensions using [Move & align several

objects] icon. Use the draft grid to locate dimensions. Create jogs.
1. Click [Move & align several objects] icon and select each
ordinate dimension. Use the middle mouse button to finish
selecting and place the dimension above the view.
2. Create a draft grid to locate some jog points. Click View > Draft
Grid from pull down menu, click Show Grid from the GRID
MODIFY menu.
3. Click Grid Params > X&Y Spacing and enter [.2].
4. To turn the grid snap on, click Utilities > Environment . In the
ENVIRONMENT dialog box, select SNAP TO GRID and click OK .
5. Create jogs in the ordinate dimensions to increase the space

between them. Click Insert Jog from pull down menu and select
the .650 dimension. Select a point on the witness line to start the
jog, move to another location and click to finish it.
6. Click other dimensions and create jogs on the ordinate dimensions

as shown in the following figure.
Note:
Once you have created jogs, you can move the locations of the
jog points.
NOTES
Figure 20: Ordinate Jog Locations
7. Turn off the grid and the grid snap. Click View > Draft Grid from
pull down menu, click Hide Grid from GRID MODIFY menu.
8. Click Utilities > Environment , then clear the Snap to Grid check
box and click OK .
Task 10. Show dimensions and erase some dimension using the dialog
box for any feature in a selected view only, then use the Clean Dims
option to clean up the dimension display quickly.
1. Click View > Show and Erase then select VIEW for the SHOW
BY option.
2. Select the view in the upper left corner and the view in the lower
left corner of the drawing. Close the dialog box.
3. Clean the dimension display by moving the dimensions off of the

views and one another. Click Tools > Clean Dims .
4. Select the upper and lower left views as the views to clean. Press
the middle mouse button to finish selecting.
5. Click Apply to apply the default settings and close the dialog box.
6. Using the options that you used earlier in this exercise, manipulate
the dimensions so that they display as shown in the following
figure. You must erase some of them.
NOTES
7. Click Erase and select SELECTED ITEMS for the Erase By

option. Select the dimensions to erase, then click Close .
Tips & Techniques:

When you place a dimension near two snap lines, the system
prompts you to specify a snap line to which it should snap the
dimension. You can use the Next option to highlight one or
both snap lines and then click Accept .
Task 11. Append text to the dimensions in DETAIL 2 to annotate them

as being typical.
1. Select both the .050 and .125 dimensions in DETAIL 2 using

<Shift>. Click Edit > Properties.
2. Click the Dimension Text tab, then enter [TYP] in the Postfix
area. Click OK to finish.
3. Turn off the display of the snap lines. Click Utilities >
Environment . Clear the Snap Lines check box, click OK to close
the dialog box and repaint the screen.
NOTES
Note:
The system does not plot snap lines, regardless of whether they
display on the screen.
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Displaying Axes

Task 1. Show the datum axes for the holes on the drawing, and then
manipulate them to display them in the correct sizes.
1. Show axes by view. Click View > Show and Erase > Show >
. Click to deselect, if it is currently selected.
S elect View for the SHOW BY option. Click the Preview tab and
click With Preview .
2. Select the upper left view, then click Accept All .
3. Select Section B-B. The system shows two axes, one on top of the
other. Click Sel To Keep , select one of the axes to retain, and click
Done Sel .
4. Select DETAIL 1 and click Accept All .
5. Show the axes for the first protrusion. Select Feature for the
SHOW BY option, select the first feature protrusion listed in the
MODEL TREE, then click Done Sel .
6. Click Sel To Remove and select the axes in the 3-D view.
Task 2. Show the axes using Feat_View option for the tabs in the front
view and the left side view.
1. Show the axes for the tabs in the front view. Choose Feat_View for
the Show By option, select a tab displayed in the front view, and
click Done Sel , select front view. Click Accept All to retain the
displayed axes.
Note:
When using Feat_View option, you need to pay close
attention to the messages.
2. Repeat this for the other tab in front view and the axes of the tabs
in the left side view.
3. Show the axes for the .100 diameter hole in Section A-A. Select
the hole and click Done Sel . Select Section A-A as the view in
which to show the axes and click Accept All to show them.
NOTES
4. Repeat the previous step for the lower left side view. Turn off the
preview, click the Preview tab and clear the With Preview check
box. Close the dialog box.
5. Manipulate the lengths of the individual axis segments in the front

view. Use the [Select] icon to select the segment of the axis
that you want to move. Place the axis in the new position. Notice
that you only moved one segment.
6. To move all four segments of an axis perpendicular to the screen,

select the name of the axis. The system moves all four segments
together.
7. Use the techniques discussed previously to change the lengths of

the axes on the drawing as shown in the following figure. Use
[Datum Axis Display] icon to turn off the display of the axis names
and repaint the screen.
Figure 22: Axis Locations
NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Displaying Symbolic Dimensions
Task 1. Show the dimensions of the barrel by using the Show All
option, then switch them to the correct views.
1. Retrieve BARREL_SHOW_DIMS.DRW. If you have finished the

barrel drawing earlier, you can work on BARREL.DRW.
NOTES
2. Click View > Show and Erase > Show > . If necessary,
un-select the [Axes] icon. Select SHOW ALL from the
Show By area. When the system asks you to confirm, click Yes ,
then close the dialog box.
Note:
When you use Show All , Pro/ENGINEER attempts to show
the dimensions in the first view that you created on the
drawing. If it cannot show a dimension in that view, it then
attempts to show it in the second view, etc.
3. Switch the dimensions for the oval cut to DETAIL 1.
4. Click the [Switch View] icon and click the .10 and the R1.38
radius dimensions.
5. Click the middle mouse button to finish selecting.
6. When the system prompts for a view, select DETAIL 1.
7. Note that the R1.38 dimension move to DETAIL 1, but the .10
does not. Click Done Sel to finish and move the R1.38 dimension
to an appropriate position.
Task 2. Using Show/Erase instead of switch view to place dimension in

the right view.
1. The .10 dimension is attached to a pattern instance outside of the

view's boundary. Erase the dimension. Right click the .10
dimension and choose Erase .
2. Show the cut dimensions in DETAIL 1. Using SHOW/ERASE

dialogue box, click Show and select Feat_View , then select the
oval cut in DETAIL 1, keep the dimension when prompted. Close
the dialog box, then move the dimensions to the positions shown in
NOTES
Figure 24: DETAIL 1 Dimension Locations
3. Switch the dimensions for the patterned holes to the view on the
right side of the drawing. Using the technique learned early, switch
the 1.25 , .75 , and 72.0 dimensions to the view on the right.
Reposition the dimensions as shown in the following figure.
4. Erase the 90.0 using pop up menu.
5. Reposition the remaining dimensions as shown in the following

figure.
NOTES
Note:
The system does not display the width of the barrel and the
hole depth dimensions because it cannot show dimensions in
Align Cross-Sections, and no other view is suitable for those
dimensions.
Task 3. Set part of the dimension to display in symbolic form, then

change the symbolic names of the dimensions so that they are more
meaningful.
1. Select both the .75 , and 4.00 dimensions using < SHIFT > and
[Select] icon. Press and hold the right mouse button to bring up the
pop up menu, choose Properties .
2. Click the Dimension Text tab from the DIMENSION PROPERTIES

dialog box to change the dimension text for the selected
dimensions.
3. In the text area, remove the diameter symbol and change the @D
to an @S. Click OK to close the dialog box.
4. Click an empty location on the drawing sheet to deselect both

dimensions.
5. Bring up DIMENSION PROPERTIES dialog box for D7 using

technique discussed earlier.
NOTES
6. Click the Dimension Text tab and enter [CYLINDER_DIA] for the
name. Click OK to close the dialog box.
7. Repeat this step to change D2 to [BARREL_DIA].
Task 4. Show the datum axes for the patterned holes on the drawing and
change the appearance of radial patter axis.
1. Click View > Show and Erase > Show > . Select View
from the SHOW BY area.
2. Show all the axis in the right side, left side, and DETAIL 1 views.
Select the view and click Accept All when prompted. Close the
dialog box.
3. Click Advanced > Draw Setup to change the axes to display at an

angled orientation with a pattern circle.
4. In the drawing setup file, change the setting of

radial_pattern_axis_circle to yes. Click Add/Change
> OK . Repaint the screen to view the changes, as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 27: Change axis display.
NOTES
EXERCISE 4: Displaying Dual Dimensions
NOTES
Task 1. Set end cap as the active model, and show all of its dimensions.
Note:
If you have finished the upper housing drawing earlier, you
can work on UPPER_HOUSING.DRW.
1. Retrieve UPPER_HOUSING_SHOW_DIMS.DRW. Click Sheets >

Next to switch to sheet 2.
2. Click Views > Dwg Models > Set Model >

PLUNGER_CAP_MOD_VIEWS to set the plunger cap as the active
model.
3. Click View > Show and Erase > Show and ensure is the
only item selected. Click Show All > Yes > Accept All . Close the
dialog box.
Note:
Had you not set the active model to the plunger cap, when
using Show All option , dimensions from the other model
will also be shown.
4. Click Tools > Clean Dims and select the two views of the plunger
cap to clean the dimension display by moving them off the model.
5. Click Done Sel . Accept the default options and click Apply >
Close .
6. Reposition the dimensions as shown in the following figure.
NOTES
Task 2. Show some dimensions of the parts in the upper housing

assembly using PART_VIEW option and move them to other locations.
1. Click Sheets > Previous to switch back to Sheet 1.
2. Click View > Show and Erase > Show > . Select
PART_VIEW and select the left bolt in the lower left view, accept
all dimensions.
3. Select FEAT_VIEW and select the outside surface of the plunger

and the tab on the upper housing in the lower right view, as shown
in the following figure.
4. Erase any dimensions that do not appear in the following figure.

Click Erase then select the dimensions. Click Done Sel to finish
and close the dialog box.
NOTES
Figure 30: Showing Part Dimensions
Task 3. Convert the dimensions on this drawing to dual dimensions so

that you can display English and metric values for each dimension.
1. Click Advanced > Draw Setup to retrieve the drawing setup file.
2. For dual_dimensioning, select

PRIMARY[SECONDARY]from the VALUE drop down list.
Click Add/Change > OK .
3. Repaint the screen if needed.
4. Clean up the dimension display by moving dimensions, if

necessary.
NOTES
Figure 31: The Finished Drawing
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can show detail items in a drawing.

• You can change the location of dimensions and switch them to other
views.
• You can convert location dimensions to ordinate.
Module
6
Creating Dimensions
In this module you learn how to create various types of dimensions.
Objectives
• Create driven, reference and draft dimensions.

• Modify the dimensioning scheme of the model.
Page 6-1
NOTES
CREATING DIMENSIONS ON A DRAWING

To reduce repeated work you should show dimensions from part or
assembly when detailing drawings.
Sometimes a desired dimension may not exist in the 3-D model because
the design intent requires a different dimensioning scheme. In this
situation, you can create dimensions directly on a drawing. By creating
dimensions on a drawing, you can achieve desired drawing appearance
without altering the design intent of the model.
The created dimension is referred to as driven dimension because it is

driven by the model geometry and reflects changes in the model. Driven
dimensions cannot be modified.
Common Reference
If a number of dimensions you are creating reference the same piece of
geometry, you can use Common Reference option to reduce mouse
picks. The system uses the first reference of the first dimension as the first
dimensioning reference for all dimensions that you create.
Attachment Types
When creating dimensions in drawing mode, you have more attachment
types in addition to what is available in sketcher in 3-D mode.
• Midpoint — Attach leader to the midpoint of an entity.

• Center — Attach leader to the center of a circular entity.
• Intersect — Attach leader to the intersection of two entities.
• Make Line — Make a line for leader attachment.
Creating Driven Ordinate Dimensions

You can create driven ordinate dimensions manually by using an existing
baseline. Created driven ordinate dimensions cannot be converted back to
linear dimension.
NOTES
Create Ordinate Dimensions Automatically

You can automatically create ordinate dimensions for a flat state of a
sheetmetal part. Ordinate dimensions to all sharps, axes, bend lines, arc
centers, and punch and form centers, and ejector pins (also including
vertices, parallel edges, points, and coordinate systems) are created based
on a selected model coordinate system.
Creating Reference Dimensions

You can use the same technique to create reference dimensions.
Reference dimensions behave in the same manner as driven dimensions

except that they have different appearance and they do not show
tolerances. You can denote a reference dimension with parentheses ( ) or
by appending REF after the dimension value.
You can create reference dimensions in part mode. If you create them by
setting up named views in the model, you can show the reference
dimensions in their true size.
Once created in part, you can show reference dimension on drawing using
SHOW/ERASE dialog box.
Redefining Features in Drawing

You can change the design intent of the model while in Drawing mode by
redefining feature. You can redefine the shape of the section, the depth
type, the feature’s direction, etc.
Any dimensions that you deleted from the feature’s section disappear from
the drawing. However, you must actually show any dimensions that you
created in the section; the system does not display them automatically.
When you redefine the feature in Drawing mode, it changes the model in
all other modes of Pro/ENGINEER as well. Because this changes the
design intent, you should avoid redefining feature to simply display a
particular dimension on a drawing.
C re a t i n g Dim en s i o n s Pag e 6- 3
NOTES
Creating Draft Dimensions

Using the method to create driven dimensions, you can also create
reference, associative, or non-associative draft dimensions on a drawing to
dimension draft entities. The system displays reference draft dimensions
and reference dimensions in the same way.
Associative Draft Dimensions

Associative draft dimensions reflect changes to the entities. When a draft
dimension is associative, you can perform the following procedures on a
draft entity and its dimension at the same time:
• Delete items.
• Switch items to another sheet.
• Translate and rotate items.
• Rescale items, including changing drawing format size.
By altering configuration file and drawing setup file in one of the
following three ways, you can make subsequent draft dimensions
associative.
• Set the drawing setup file option, ASSOCIATIVE_DIMENSIONING, to

Yes and select draft entities to dimension.
• Set the configuration file option,

CREATE_DRAWING_DIMENSIONS_ONLY, to Yes and select model
entities to dimension.
• Set the configuration file option, DRAWING_MODELS_READ_ONLY,
to Yes and select model entities to dimension.
Note:
If the dimensions are non-associative, you must perform the
procedures on them individually. If you move or rescale the
draft entity, the system does not update the dimension or move
it with the draft entity.
Hole Tables
You can create hole tables in a specified view. This functionality
automatically creates a table for locations of drillable hole features, datum
points and datum axes with respect to a coordinate system of the model.
NOTES
Information displayed in a hole table

Hole table can display the following information:
• Location of Holes, Datum Points, Datum Axes in X and Y coordinates

(Z for datum points).
• Diameter of holes.
• User-defined parameters in additional columns.
Manipulating a hole table

• Sort Setup: X, Y, Diameter, Default.
• Hole Naming: Numerical versus Alphanumerical.
• Ability to paginate tables.
• You can modify the hole in the model or the drawing, and update the
parameters displayed in the hole table.
Figure 1: Hole Chart

The following table lists the available configuration file options that affect
the creation of dimensions on a drawing.
NOTES
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Dimension Creation

create_fraction_dim no If set to yes, displays all
yes dimensions as fractions.
create_drawing_dims_only no If set to yes, stores
yes dimensions that you create
in the drawing in the actual
drawing. If set to no, stores
them in the part.
drawing_models_read_ no Makes the model in a
only yes drawing read-only.
Highlight_new_dims yes Highlights newly-created
no dimension in red; good for
drawings with many dims
parenthesize_ref_dims no If set to yes, displays
yes reference dimensions
within parentheses. If set
to no, appends the
dimension with REF.
NOTES
Goal
To create driven and reference dimensions on a drawing and modify the
dimensioning scheme of the model.
Method
In the first exercise, you learn how to create dimensions on a drawing and
learn when it is appropriate to do so. You erase some model dimensions
and create some driven dimensions. You also modify the dimensioning
scheme to change the design intent of the model.
In the second exercise, you modify the dimensioning scheme of the barrel
from within the drawing and show any new dimensions on the drawing.
NOTES
EXERCISE 1: Creating Dimensions on a Drawing
Figure 2: Plunger Drawing
Task 1. Create a reference dimension for the cut in the upper left view.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_CREATE_DIMS.DRW. If you have

finished the plunger body drawing earlier, you can work on
PLUNGER_BODY.DRW.
2. If the datum planes, datum coordinate systems, and axis names

appear on the screen, turn them off.
NOTES
3. Select Insert > Reference Dimension > New Reference, accept

default On Entity option. Select the edge shown in the following
figure with the black end of the pointer. Locate the dimension by
pressing the middle mouse button. Click Return to finish.
Reposition it, if necessary.
Select this edge

to dimension
Place
dimension
here
Figure 3: Reference Dimension
Task 2. Create ordinate dimensions.
1. Erase the dimensions from the drawing that you no longer need, to
avoid changing the design intent of the part. Use the pop up menu
to erase the .300 dimension in the lower left view and the 1.750
dimension in the upper left view.
2. Use the [Switch view] icon to move the .500 dimension on the
left side of the upper left view to the lower left view.
! Select [Switch view] icon and select the .500 dimension.
! Press the middle mouse button to finish.
! Select the lower left view to display the dimension.
3. Convert the .500 and 3.000 dimensions in the lower left view to
ordinate. Select Edit > Linear to Ordinate and select the 3.000
dimension. Select the left side witness line as the baseline, as
shown in the following figure. Select the .500 dimension to convert
it, as well.
NOTES
Select this
as the
baseline
Figure 4: Converting to Ordinate Dimension
4. Click the [Move and align objects] icon, select the two
dimensions and the baseline to align the ordinate dimensions. Press
the middle mouse button to finish selecting, then place the
dimensions using left button.
5. Select Insert > Dimension > Ordinate , accept the default Create
Dims and select the .00 baseline to create driven dimensions for
the cuts in the lower left view, as shown in the following figure.
6. Left click the vertical edge of the flat cut and press the middle
mouse button at the location where you want to display the
dimension. Select the second edge and press the middle mouse
button where you want to display that dimension.
7. Align all the ordinate dimensions.
Select this edge for

the second driven
dimension reference.
Select this dimension

for the first driven
dimension reference
Figure 5: Creating Ordinate Dimensions
NOTES
Task 3. Modify the dimensioning scheme in drawing mode to

accommodate a change in the design intent. Dimension the tabs on the
open end of the plunger body from the other tabs. Show any new
dimensions on the drawing.
1. Click Edit > Redefine Feature . Select Query Sel and select the
tab shown in the following figure.
2. Click Next until the tab protrusion highlights, then click Accept . A
sub-window appears along with the dialog box for the tab
elements.
Modify the
scheme of this
tab first
Modify the
scheme of this
tab second
Figure 6: Modify Dimensioning Scheme
3. Click Section > Define> Sketch .
4. Click Sketch > Dimension > Normal and select the center of the
sketched arc to create a new dimension to locate the tab to the
other tab on the left side of the model.
5. Select the cylindrical surface of the other tab on the front of the
model and place the dimension with the middle mouse button.
Delete the .50 dimension.
6. Click Sketch > Done and OK to finish the section. Repaint the
drawing to show the changes.
C reat ing Dim ensio ns Pag e 6- 11

NOTES
Note:
The .500 location dimension disappeared from the drawing
because you deleted it. The system does not automatically
show the new dimension. To display it, you must show it
again.
7. Repeat the procedure for the other tab. After changing the
dimensioning scheme of the second tab, show the new dimensions
on the drawing.
8. Click View > Show and Erase > and select FEAT_VIEW,
then click the tab shown in the following figure. Close the dialog
box and move the dimension as shown in the following figure.
Show dimensions
for this tab
Figure 7: New Dimensioning Scheme
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Modifying the Dimensioning Scheme
Task 1. Create two driven dimensions in Section A-A for the barrel
width and hole depth.
1. Retrieve BARREL_CREATE_DIMS.DRW. If you have finished the

plunger body drawing earlier, you can work on BARREL.DRW.
2. Click Insert > Dimension > New Reference . Accept the defaults,
then select the bottom edge of the barrel in Section A-A. Press the
middle mouse button where you want to display the dimension, as
shown in previous figure.

NOTES
3. Select the horizontal edge of one of the blind holes and press the
middle mouse button to place the dimension. Reposition the
dimension, if necessary.
Task 2. Modify dimension scheme. The dimensioning scheme of the

radial holes in the barrel includes a linear dimension from the center axis
to the axis of the radial hole. Change the design intent to use a diameter
dimension instead.
1. Click Edit > Redefine Feature . Click Query Sel and select the
hole shown in the following figure. Click Next until the hole is
highlighted, then click Accept .
2. A sub-window appears along with the dialog box for the hole.
Modify the
scheme of this
hole
Figure 9: Hole Dimensioning Scheme
3. From the dialog box, select Diameter from the PLACEMENT

TYPE drop-down menu. Select the green checkmark to accept.
The system closes the sub-window, and automatically shows a
diameter dimension for redefined hole.
Task 3. Change the name of a dimension and display symbolic name.
1. Select the 2.50 diameter dimension and use the pop-up menu to
bring up the DIMENSION PROPERTY dialog box.
2. Click the Dimension Text tab. In the text area, remove the
diameter symbol and change the @D to @S. In the Name area,
type [CENTERLINE_DIA], then close the dialog box.
NOTES
3. Reposition the Centerline_Dia dimension as shown in the

following figure.
Task 4. Create an angular dimension to locate the patterned holes.
1. Click Insert > Dimension > New Reference .
2. Accept the defaults, then select the axes lines shown in the
following figure.
3. Place the dimension using the middle mouse button. Reposition as

necessary.
Select this axis

from which to
dimension
Select this axis

from which to
dimension
Figure 10: Angle Dimension

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Create Ordinate Dimension

Automatically and Create a Hole Table
Task 1. Replace the drawing model with it family table instance.
1. Retrieve the ROTOR_SHIELD_FLAT.DRW. If you have finished

the exercises in chapter 1, you can work on ROTOR_SHIELD.DRW
that you previously saved.
2. Replace the drawing model with it family table instance. Click

View > Dwg Models > Replace .
3. Select SHEETMETAL_FLAT1. Click Open . The drawing should

display the flat state of the sheetmetal part.
Task 2. Insert Ordinate dimensions on the flat state sheet metal part
automatically.
1. Click Insert > Dimension > Ordinate > Auto Create .
2. In the lower left view, select the surface shown in the following
picture.
Figure 11: Select the indicated surface to insert its dimensions
3. Select PRT_CSYS_DEF as the coordinate system.
NOTES
4. Repaint the screen. The view should display the following figure.
Figure 12: Finished view
Task 3. Create a hole table.
1. Click Advanced > Hole Table > Create > Holes .
2. Select the same coordinate system used in the previous task.
3. Locate the table on top of the view, as shown in the following

picture.

NOTES
Figure 13: Finished Hole table
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create driven, reference and draft dimensions.

• You can modify the dimensioning scheme of the model.

Module
7
Creating Notes
In this module, you learn how to create a drawing note, add it to a
drawing, and manipulate it. You also learn how to use style libraries
to store text styles for your drawings.
Objectives
• Create notes on a drawing.

• Manipulate drawing notes.
• Use style libraries to store text styles.
Page 7-1
NOTES
ADDING NOTES TO A DRAWING

A drawing note is text that you add to a drawing as supporting
information.
Specifying the Content of a Note

Drawing notes are composed of text and symbol. You can also include
parametric information in notes. The system updates the parametric
information contained in notes to reflect any changes.
Dimensions and System-Defined Parameters

You can add model, reference, or driven dimensions, as well as system-
defined parameters (number of instances in a pattern) to a drawing note by
typing in the symbolic name of the parameter preceded by an ampersand.
When you are creating a note in Pro/ENGINEER, the dimensions and
parameters automatically convert to their symbolic form.
User-Defined Parameters
To associate specific information to a model (such as the color, cost, or
vendor), you can create a user-defined parameter at the part, assembly, or
drawing level. To place a user-defined parameter in a drawing note, you
must precede the name of the parameter with an ampersand (for example,
&total_holes).
Drawing Labels
You can use the following drawing labels in a note, preceded by an
ampersand:
• &todays_date – Adds the date of the note’s creation. To control the

format of the date, set the configuration file option
todays_date_note_format.
• &model_name – Adds the name of the model used in the drawing.
• &dwg_name – Adds the name of the drawing.
• &scale – Adds the scale of the drawing.
• &type – Adds the model type (part or assembly).
NOTES
• &format – Adds the format size.

• &linear_tol_0_0 through &linear_tol_0_000000 – Adds linear
tolerance values for one to six decimal places.
• &angular_tol_0_0 through &angular_tol_0_000000 – Adds angular
tolerance values for one to six decimal places.
• &current_sheet – Adds the current sheet number.
• &total_sheets – Adds the total number of sheets in the drawing.
• &dtm_name – Adds the name of a datum plane.
User-Defined Symbols
You can add a user-defined symbol to a note such as electronic symbol or
welding symbols by entering [&sym(symbol_name)]. For example, to
include the symbol delta in a note, enter [&sym(delta)] using the
keyboard.
Special Symbols
You can add common drawing symbols to a note by selecting them from
the Symbol Palette tool displayed on your screen during the note creation
process.
Manipulating Notes
Once you have placed a note on a drawing, you can change it in various
ways.
Cutting, Copying and Pasting Notes

You can manipulate detail items using the Cut , Copy, and Paste
commands. These commands use a clipboard to allow a variety of detail
items, such as notes, symbols, draft entities, and tables to be copied to the
same sheet, a different sheet, or a different drawing.
Deleting notes
After selected using the [Select] icon, notes can be easily deleted using
< DEL >.
C re a t i n g N o t e s Pag e 7- 3
NOTES
Moving a Note
Using various techniques, you can change the location of a note in a
drawing at any time. After a note is selected, the drag handles will be
displayed along with highlighted note. Depending on the note type
different drag handles is needed.
• You can move a free note or one that has a standard leader to any
location using the drag handle at the center of the note
• If you created the note with a normal or tangent leader, the system
constrains the note leader to a particular orientation, using the center
drag handle, you can only move it along the leader line. To rotate the
note, you can use the drag handle at the attachment point. must modify
the attachment of the arrow. Since the arrow must stay normal or
tangent to the entity, if you move the arrow, the note moves with it.
• To attach the leader of a note to a different entity, you can use the Mod
Attach command located in the pop up menu.
Resize note
Free movement
Move text without
moving the leader
Move attachment point
Figure 1: Asynchronous Move
User Defined Margin and Wrap Function for Long Note

Word wrap functions let you wrap long notes or table entries into a user-
defined margin. You can drag the margins to the desired size using an
appropriate drag handle, as shown in the preceding figure. Whatever text
doesn’t fit on one line will automatically be moved down to the next line.
Changing the Content of a Note

Using ENTER TEXT dialog box, you can change the content of a note as
well as modify the text style of the note. You can access the ENTER TEXT
dialog box using Edit > Properties or pop up menu.
NOTES
Attaching the Leader to Multi-Line Text

You can attach the note leader to any line of text by entering the
placeholder parameter @o (alphabetic character, not zero) at the beginning
of that line, as shown in the following figure. Once you add this
placeholder to a line, the leader automatically attaches to that line. You
can add the parameter to the line as you create the note or add it later. If
you add @o to more than one line of note text, the system attaches the
leader to the first line containing it.
@o added to the
beginning of the
second line
Figure 2: Leader Attachment
Entering Superscripted and Subscripted Text

To add superscripted and subscripted text to a note, you can create it
separately or include it in a text line with regular text on either side of it.
However, you can superscript or subscript only plain text and special
symbols; you cannot do so with dimensions, instance numbers, other
parameter values, or geometric tolerances. The system positions
superscripted and subscripted text by reference to the closest line of
regular text, whether that text belongs to another note, or to the note that
you are currently creating.
• To create superscripted text, enter [@+text@#].
• To create subscripted text, enter [@-text@#].
• To create both super- and subscripted text, enter: [@+text@#@-

text@#]
NOTES
Creating a Box Around a Note

You can enclose a note in a box by entering [@[text@]] .If you place the
@[ without @], the system encloses all texts that come after @[ in a box, as
Figure 3: Boxed Note
Saving Notes
To avoid having to retype standard notes, you can save them for future use
in other drawings. Using the configuration file option pro_note_dir,
you can set up a library of standard notes that contain parameters, special
symbols, and super- or subscripted text. However, you cannot include
information concerning text style such as text height, text width, text
angle, and slant angle. You must change this information manually after
placing the note.
You can save a note using one of these methods:
• When editing a note using ENTER TEXT dialog box, you can open
system text editor to edit and save the note. You should save the note
as plain text with a .txt extension.
• Use the INFO pull-down menu at the top of the Pro/ENGINEER main
window to write it to a file. The system saves each selected note as a
separate file. When specifying the filename, do not add the
extension—Pro/ENGINEER automatically appends .txt and a
version number, for example .txt.1. If you type the same filename,
it increments this extension automatically to avoid overwriting an
existing file.
Modifying the Text Style

Once you have placed a note on a drawing, you can change its text style.
However, Pro/ENGINEER sometimes selects more than just the text that
you specifically select. For example, if you choose one word in the first
line of a note, the entire line might highlight because all the texts in that
line belong to the same text field.
NOTES
Text Fields
Pro/ENGINEER separates a note into portions referred to as text fields, as
shown in the following figure. You can manipulate text fields separately
from the rest of the note, for example, assigning text style. The system
breaks up text strings into portions wherever there is a new line of text or a
parameter (such as dimensions), and encloses each portion of the text in {}
(braces), giving it an integer label. Labels identify the initial order of the
text, and any attributes for that portion.
∅ 1.50 THROUGH HOLE {0: ∅}{1:&d23}{2:THROUGH HOLE}

ONE PLACE {3:ONE PLACE}
Figure 4: Text Fields
Separating texts into text fields

To assign different text styles to the neighboring texts, you must separate
them into different text fields.
To break the note into smaller fields, you can add braces and an integer
label. When editing text or adding more lines, you can copy the attributes
of a text field by using the same integer label. If you do not want to copy
the attributes of any existing lines, use an integer label that you have not
used already.
Text Style Attributes

The system separates the attributes that you can define into two groups:
those that only affect the selected fields and those that affect the entire
note, as shown in the following table.
Table 1: Text Style Attributes

Attributes Affecting Attributes Affecting
Selected Fields the Entire Note
Text font Line spacing
Text height Placement angle
Text thickness Justification
Text width Color
Slant angle Mirroring
Underlining
NOTES
Creating Style Libraries

You often apply the same text style to many detail items on a drawing. To
save time, you should store predefined styles in a style library so that you
do not have to specify text attributes each time that you begin a new
drawing.
To define a style, you need to specify a name and attributes such as font,
text height, slant angle, etc. It is a good practice to create the text style
library in the drawing templates, so that it is available in the drawings
created using the drawing templates.
Using Tables to Access Styles

Pro/ENGINEER only allows you to set up libraries on a drawing-by-
drawing basis. However you can use table to transfer the text style library
to drawings that does not have a style library.
To use a table to reused text style, first, you need to create a table in a
drawing that uses the styles and save it; then retrieve it into the second
drawing. Once you have brought the table into the second drawing, you
can use its styles. You should then place the table on a layer and blank it
so that it does not show on the drawing.
Adding Auxiliary Font

To add the available auxiliary fonts in the text style dialog box, you can
add font files in the “text” directory under the installation (loadpoint)
directory.
INSERTING OLE OBJECTS

Using the OLE Embedding functionality. You can insert objects, such as
text files, images, pictures, charts etc. into a Pro/ENGINEER drawing.
The follow discussion is based on an inserted Microsoft Word Document.
NOTES
Figure 5: Insert Object Types
Manipulating the Embedded Object

Using the pop-up menu, you can edit the embedded object within
Pro/ENGINEER or open up a separate window to edit the object.
Figure 6: OBJECT Pop-Up Menu
Editing an Object within Pro/ENGINEER

Using pop-up menu or by double clicking the object, you can edit an
object within Pro/ENGINEER. A small Microsoft Word window along
with Microsoft Word icons will be displayed within Pro/ENGINEER
interface. You have access to all Microsoft Word’s functionality.
NOTES
Figure 7 Edit a Microsoft Word Document in Pro/ENGINEER
Editing an Object from Outside Pro/ENGINEER

If you open a separate window, the Microsoft Word is customized to
provide additional functionality:
• You can implement changes using the Update button under the File
pull-down menu.
• You can use Close & Return button to return to Pro/ENGINEER.
• You can also access Windchill functionality.
Figure 8: Additional functionality in a separate Microsoft Word window
NOTES

The following table lists the available configuration file options that
control drawing notes.
Table 2: Configuration File Options Affecting Note Creation

pro_note_dir directory_path Specifies a directory from which
to retrieve notes.
switch_dims_for_notes yes Displays dimensions in their
no symbolic format during drawing
note creation.
symbol_palette_input yes Controls display of the special
no symbol palette for note creation.

control drawing notes.
Table 3: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Note Creation

default_font font Sets the default text font to those

font index name listed in the specified font index.
draw_attach_sym_height default Sets the height of leader line
value slashes, integral signs, and boxes.
If set to “default,” uses the value
set for “draw_arrow_width.”
draw_attach_sym_width default Sets the width of leader line for
value slashes, integral signs, and boxes.
If set to “default,” uses the value
set for “draw_arrow_width.”
draw_dot_diameter default Sets the diameter of leader line
value dots. If set to “default,” uses the
value set for
“draw_arrow_width.”
yes_no_parameter_ yes_no Controls the display of “yes/no”
display true_false parameters in notes.
NOTES
Goal
To create and manipulate drawing notes.
Method
In the first exercise, you create parametric notes on the plunger body
drawing and manipulate the text style of other notes on the drawing.
In the second exercise, you add a prefix to the increment angle between
holes and also use a parameter to display the number of holes in the view
note.
EXERCISE 1: Creating Notes on a Drawing
NOTES
Task 1. Create a parametric note for the holes in Section B-B. The note
should include the diameter of the through hole and the diameter and
depth of the counterbore.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_CREATE_NOTES.DRW. If you have

PLUNGER_BODY.DRW.
2. Create a note with a standard leader for the holes in Section B-B.
Click Insert > Note > Leader > Make Note .
3. Select the left side edge of the through hole in Section B-B.
4. Click Done Sel > Done . Locate the note as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 10: Note for Holes
5. Select the symbols from the SYMBOL PALETTE window and type
the text as shown in the following figure. For example, you would
enter &d63 to have the .100 diameter dimension appear.
Figure 11: Parametric Note Text
NOTES
6. Click Done/Return .
Task 2. Edit view note by adding PARTIAL to the note.
1. Change the note below Section B-B to include the word PARTIAL
in the second line. Using the [Select] icon, select the note
below Section B-B. Hold down the right mouse button again and
click Edit Text .
2. In the ENTER TEXT dialog box, press the left mouse button at the
end of the first line, press <ENTER>, and type [PARTIAL] to add
the word partial in the second line of the note.
3. Click OK to finish modifying the note.
Task 3. Create a new text style to use for the cross-section names.
Apply the created text style for the word Section in the view notes.
1. Click Format > Text Style Gallery then click New .
2. Type [sections] for the style name.
3. From the FONT drop-down list, select Filled .
4. For the height, clear the default check box and type [.25].
5. Type [15 ] for the slant angle.
6. Specify the justification for the text by selecting CENTER from the
JUSTIFY HORIZ drop-down list.
7. Click OK and then close the TEXT STYLE LIBRARY dialog box.
8. Click Format > Text Style and select the word Section in the view
notes for Sections A-A and B-B. Click Done Sel .
9. From the STYLE NAME drop-down list, select SECTIONS. Select

Apply > OK to make the changes.
Task 4. Define a new text style by copying the text style that you just
created. Apply the text style to A-A and B-B.
1. Click Format > Text Style Gallery > New .
2. Type [sect_names] as the NEW NAME, STYLE NAME.
NOTES
3. From the COPY FROM, STYLE NAME drop-down list, select

SECTIONS to copy the settings.
4. Type [.35] in the HEIGHT text box. Click OK > Close .
5. Click Format > Text Style and select A-A and B-B in the view
notes for these sections. Click Done Sel . From the STYLE NAME
drop-down list, select SECT_NAMES. Click Apply > OK .
6. Reposition the notes directly beneath the corresponding views.

Select the view name Section A-A. Center it beneath the view.
Repeat this for Section B-B.
Task 5. Create a note by reading in an existing text file . Locate the note
in the lower left corner of the drawing. Change text in the first line of the
note.
1. Click Insert > Note > No Leader > File > Make Note .
2. Place the note in the lower left corner of the drawing.
3. Open note.txt. The note appears on the drawing. Click

Done/Return . Reposition the note, if necessary.
4. Select the note below Section B-B using the [Select] icon. Hold
down the right mouse button and click Edit Text.
5. Backspace over the 0.10 and type [0.15] in its place.
Task 6. Modify the view note for DETAIL 1. Add a new line that calls
out the number of places in which the tab exists on the model. Make the
note center-justified.
1. Edit the view note for DETAIL 1 using the pop up menu.
2. Add a third line to the note and type [4 PLACES]. Close the editor
to finish the note.
3. Click Format > Text Style and select the view note for DETAIL
1. Select CENTER from the JUSTIFICATION HORIZONTAL drop-
down list. Click Apply > OK to finish the modification.
4. Reposition the view note for DETAIL 1 directly beneath the view.
NOTES
Task 7. Create a note for the 1.125 diameter cut in the center view.
Alter the default text field and change the note to read µm instead of mm.
1. Click Insert > Note > Leader > Enter > Normal Ldr > Make
Note .
2. Accept Arrow Head and select the edge of the cut in the front
view. Locate the note and enter it as shown in the following figure.
Note:
Use the technique discussed earlier to include the dimension in
the note.
Figure 12: Note Location
3. Reposition the note using appropriate drag handle. Change the text
fields so that the first “m” in 20 mm is in its own separate text
field. Select the new note. Right click and select Properties .
4. Separate the first “m” into a new text field. Change {3:FINISH
SURFACE TO 20mm}, to {3:FINISH SURFACE TO
20}{4:m}{5:m}. Click OK to close the dialog box.
5. Modify the text style for the first “m” in the note in the front view.
Click the Text Style from the FORMAT pull down menu. Click the
first “m” in the note, followed by Done Sel .
6. Select CAL_GREK from the FONT drop-down list. For Height,

clear the Default check box and enter [0.15]. Click Apply. Click
OK to finish.
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Parametric Notes
Task 1. Show notes and add a prefix to the increment angle for the
patterned holes to show the number of holes.
1. Retrieve BARREL_CREATE_NOTES.DRW. If you have finished

the barrel drawing earlier, you can work on BARREL.DRW.
2. Show the note for the patterned holes in the left side view. Click
View > Show and Erase . Click Show > > Show All . Click
Yes to confirm. Choose Accept All > Close .
NOTES
3. Obtain the symbol for the number of patterned holes. Click Info >
Switch Dimensions from the pull-down menu. Switch
Dimensions again to return to the numeric form.
4. Add a prefix to the 72-degree increment angle in the right side

view. Select the 72-degree angle dimension. Use the pop up menu
to bring up the DIMENSION PROPERTIES dialog box. In the
Dimension Text tab, type [&p0 x] in the PREFIX area. Click OK .
Task 2. Modify the view note for DETAIL 1 to include the number of
holes in the barrel. Use the parameter for the number of holes so that the
note updates automatically if the number changes.
1. Add a third line to the view note for DETAIL 1 that calls out the
number of slots on the model. Edit the view note for DETAIL 1
using the technique learn earlier.
2. Add a third line and type [&p0 PLACES]. Click OK to close the
dialog box.
NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Manipulating the Note and Inserted

Objects
Task 1. Use the text wrapping capabilities to drag the note margin.
1. Retrieve the ROTOR_SHIELD.DRW saved in Chapter 1.
2. Notice that the note at the top of the drawing is in a location that
may interfere with the Top view.
3. Change the size of the note by dragging the margin.
4. Select the note using the [Select] icon. The note will highlight
red.
5. Click the drag handle that is displayed as a little rectangular box on

the right hand side of the note. Your mouse cursor will turn into a
Drag icon when near the box
6. Move the mouse cursor to the left to resize the margin
7. Click again to finish.
8. Move the note using the center drag handle as necessary.
9. Notice that the note has populated with the model parameters
(Modeled _by, Job Number, Revision, Vendor, and Material).
Click Info > Switch Dimensions to verify.
Task 2. (Optional) Manipulating the embedded MS Word object. Use

spell check functionality in Microsoft Word.
1. There is another note at the bottom of the drawing. This note is a

Microsoft Word document embedded into the drawing.
2. Double-Click on the note. A small Microsoft Word window with

the note inside is displayed. Notice that the Microsoft Word icons
show up below the Pro/ENGINEER icons.
3. Hit the [Spelling and Grammar] icon and change “drawin” to

“drawing.”
4. Click outside of the note window twice to finish.
NOTES
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create notes on a drawing.

• You can manipulate drawing notes.
• You can use style libraries to store text styles.
Module
8
Tolerances on Drawings
In this module, you learn how to work with linear and geometric
tolerances at the part and drawing level.
Objectives
• Change the format and values of linear tolerances.

• Create and modify geometric tolerances.
Page 8-1
NOTES
LINEAR TOLERANCES
Linear tolerance can be used to specify the allowable deviation of a
product from the exact size specified by a dimension. In Pro/ENGINEER,
you can regenerate a model at the limits specified by linear tolerances. It
will affect model geometry.
Tolerance Standard
When you create a model, Pro/ENGINEER assigns it a tolerance standard
of ISO or ANSI based on the configuration file option
tolerance_standard.
ANSI standard linear tolerance is based on the nominal dimension’s

number of digits. ISO standard linear tolerance is based on a set of
tolerance tables. 1The details of manipulating ISO standard linear
tolerance can be found in Appendix. In this module, we only discuss ANSI
standard linear tolerance.
Specify Dimension Tolerances before Model

Creation
Every dimension on a Pro/ENGINEER model has a tolerance. The system
determines the linear tolerances for dimensions at the time the model is
created.
• If the model is created without using any template. The format and the
values of the linear tolerance are controlled by the configuration file
options that you have established prior to model creation. Therefore,
you must specify desired tolerances and format beforehand.
Pro/ENGINEER applies these settings to all dimensions.
• If the model is created using a template, the dimension tolerances are
defined by the template. The settings in the template override the
configuration file setup.
Tolerance Format
The format of the linear tolerances is controlled by the configuration file
option tol_mode. The following table lists the values of this option.
You can use these values to specify the formats for linear tolerances.
NOTES
Table 1: Tolerance Formats

Limits Displays the dimensional
tolerance as the upper and
lower limits.
Nominal Displays the dimension as
a nominal dimension.
Plus Minus Displays the dimension
with a plus value and a
minus value.
Plus Minus Symmetric Displays the dimension
with a single ± value.
Tolerance Value
The tolerance values are controlled by a number of options such as
linear_tol, linear_tol_0.0, linear_tol_0.00,
angular_tol, angular_tol_0.0, angular_tol_0.00.
• linear_tol_0.0, linear_tol_0.00 — specify a range for

default tolerance of linear dimensions. It works in conjunction with
number of decimal places of dimensions.
• linear_tol— An alternate format for setting default linear
tolerance dimensions. First value sets the number of decimal places.
Second value is the actual tolerance. For example, 6 0.000025 means
when the decimal places is set to 6, the default tolerance is 0.000025.
Angular tolerance works the same way.
Displaying Dimension Tolerances

• To show linear tolerances at the part or assembly level, you can use the
ENVIRONMENT dialog box.
• To show them at the drawing level, you can use the drawing setup file
option tol_display.
Changing Dimension Tolerances

After the model is created, the linear tolerance can be modified
individually in part, assembly and drawing mode using DIMENSION
PROPERTIES dialog box.
• Even though linear tolerances can be modified individually after the

model is created, you should set them to the values that you usually
use before model creation to reduce unnecessary work.
T o l e ra n c e s o n D ra w i n g s Pag e 8 - 3
NOTES
• The configuration file options that controls tolerance format and

values are not retroactive. When you change them, it only affects new
models. For existing models you have to manually change linear
tolerance for each dimension.
• If you need to change the format and value of the majority of tolerance
in a model, you should do that in drawing mode. Simply show all
dimensions, use pick box to select all dimensions and then edit their
properties to change tolerance format and value. Again, this can be
avoided by setting up format and value before creating the model.
• If you specify a new tolerance format and value at the part, assembly,
or drawing level, the system reflects that change in every mode of
Pro/ENGINEER. Therefore, the tolerance format for a dimension is
the same in Part, Assembly, and Drawing mode.
• To differentiate the tolerance format of a dimension from others, you
can control the display independently in Drawing mode. As a result,
you can show tolerances on a drawing without having to view them in
the part or assembly.
GEOMETRIC TOLERANCES
You can use geometric tolerances (gtols) to specify the maximum
allowable deviation of a product from the exact size and shape specified
by designers. Geometric tolerances provide a comprehensive method of
specifying the location of the part’s critical surfaces, how they relate to
one another, and how the part should be inspected to determine if it is
acceptable.
When you store a Pro/ENGINEER geometric tolerance in a solid model, it

contains parametric references to the geometry or feature it controls—its
referenced entity—and parametric references to referenced datums and
axes. As a result, the system updates the gtol’s display when you rename a
referenced datum. It creates geometric tolerances as annotations, and
always associates them with the model.
Unlike dimensional tolerances, geometric tolerances do not have any

effect on the part geometry.
Creating a Geometric Tolerance

You use the following procedure to create geometric tolerances in Part
mode, Assembly mode, or Drawing mode:
NOTES
Setting Datums
You can change the name of a datum plane, set it for use in a gtol, and
control its placement. To set a datum, you can create a new one or modify
an existing datum plane or axis.
Note:
Renaming datums could affect any layouts to which you have
declared them.
The system displays a set datum on the screen regardless of the datum
display setting in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. In Drawing mode, you
can remove it from the drawing by erasing it from a particular view. In
Part or Assembly mode, you can place a set datum on a layer and blank it
to remove it from the display.
Specifying the Tolerance Type

To specify the geometric tolerance type, select a graphical symbol from
the GEOMETRIC TOLERANCE dialog box.
Defining the Model References

If you have only one model on your drawing, the system uses it as the
default, but if you have a multi-model or assembly drawing, you can
choose the model to use. You can also create a drawing-level gtol, which
the system stores in the drawing, but it can only reference draft geometry.
Reference Entity
After you have defined the model, you must specify the reference entity
(the geometry or feature that the gtol controls). The system does not use
the reference entity in place of a set datum or as an attachment type for the
gtol. The available reference entity types change based on the type of
geometric tolerance that you are creating.
Placement Entity
Once you have specified the type, the model, and the reference entity, you
can attach the gtol symbol to an entity on the model, known as the
NOTES
placement entity. The following placement types are available, depending

on the gtol type:
• Attaching it to a dimension, datum, or another gtol.

• Using a leader.
• Displaying it as a free note.
• Creating a dimension to which you can attach it (in Drawing mode
only).
Defining the Datum References

You can define a primary, secondary, and tertiary datum reference; a basic
and a compound datum; and a material condition; however, you do not
have to define all of these references. The system displays a message in
the dialog box informing you of the minimum number of references that
you must specify for the particular type of gtol that you are creating.
Specifying the Tolerance Value

You can define the tolerance value as an overall tolerance or base it upon
some unit. To specify the material condition, you can choose from the
following:
• Maximum (MMC )
• Least (LMC )
• Regardless of feature size with a symbol (RFS(with symbol) )
• Regardless of feature size without a symbol (RFS(no symbol) )
Specifying Additional Symbols

• You can show the following symbols and modifiers in the geometric
tolerance.
! Statistical tolerance
! Diameter symbol
! Free state
! All around symbol
! Tangent plane
NOTES
! Set Boundary
• You can set up a projected tolerance zone to display inside or below
the gtol, and also specify a value for the zone height.
• option allows you add the Boundary label to
Additional Text on right
a GTOL as per ASME Y14.5M - 1994 standard
After you have defined the geometric tolerance, you can place it on the
drawing and move it. You can either define another gtol immediately or
end gtol creation.
Geometric Tolerances in Assembly Drawings

In Assembly drawings, you can create a gtol in a subassembly, a part, or
the top-level assembly.
• Subassembly or part gtols – A subassembly or part gtol can refer

only to set datums belonging to that model itself, or to components
within it. It cannot refer to datums outside its model in some
encompassing assembly.
• Top-level gtols – When you create a gtol in the top-level model (such
as a part in a part drawing or the top assembly in an assembly
drawing), the system associates the tolerance with the view in which
you have specified a reference entity. Reference datums must belong
to the same top-level model, but you can select them in any view. You
can attach an assembly gtol to a dimension, datum, or another gtol,
provided they both belong to the same assembly.
Modifying a Geometric Tolerance

After you place a gtol on a drawing, you can move it; change its
attachment position, type, or tolerance value; or redefine the steps in the
gtol creation. You can modify every aspect of a gtol symbol, except the
model reference.

control linear tolerances.
NOTES
Table 2: Configuration File Options Affecting Linear Tolerances

tol_display no Displays dimensions with
yes or without tolerances.
tol _mode limits Sets default display of
nominal tolerances.
plusminus
plusminussym
linear_tol # tolerance Sets tolerance display for
angular_tol linear and angular
dimensions. # is the
number of places after the
decimal point and
tolerance is the actual
value of the tolerance.
tolerance_standard ANSI Sets tolerance standard
ISO when creating the model.
display_dwg_tol_tags yes Controls display of the
no small tolerance block on
the screen.
tolerance_class medium Sets the default tolerance
fine class for ISO tolerance
standard models.
coarse
very coarse
tolerance_table_dir directory path Sets the default directory
for user-defined tolerance
tables for ISO tolerance
standard models.
restricted_gtol_dialog yes Determines whether the
no Geometric Tolerance
dialog restricts the user by
graying out elements that
are considered “illegal”
NOTES

control linear and geometric tolerances in drawings.
Table 3: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Linear and Geometric Tolerances
blank_zero_tolerance no When set to yes, system
yes does not display a plus or
minus tolerance value that
is zero.
gtol_dim_placement on_bottom Determines the location of
under_value a geometric tolerances
feature control frame when
attached to a dimension
symbol that contains
additional text.
tol_display no Controls the display of

yes dimension tolerances. The
Environment dialog box is
not available in Drawing
mode.
NOTES
Goal
To show linear and geometric tolerances on a drawing.
Method
In this exercise, you show linear tolerances in Part and Drawing mode, and
modify the tolerance values and formats. You also create geometric
tolerances on the plunger body drawing.
EXERCISE 1: Using Linear and Geometric

Tolerances
NOTES
Task 1. Display the tolerance display in the part. Modify the format and
values of some tolerances.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_TOLERANCES.DRW.
2. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_TOLERANCES.PRT.
Note:
If you have finished the plunger body drawing earlier, you can
work on PLUNGER_BODY.DRW and
PLUNGER_BODY.PRT instead.
3. Click Modify and select the surface of the front tab to show the
dimensions for the front tab. The system displays the dimensions
in a nominal format, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2: Tab Dimensions in Nominal Format
4. Click Utilities > Environment , select the Dimension Tolerances

check box and click OK to turn on the tolerance display.
5. Modify the format of the 2.50 location dimension. Click

Dimension from the MODIFY menu and select the 2.50
dimension. Click Done Sel .
6. In the DIMENSION PROPERTIES dialog box, change the tolerance

format and the tolerance limits. Select PLUS-MINUS from the
TOLERANCE MODE drop-down list.
T o l e ra n c e s o n D ra w i n g s Pag e 8 - 1 1
NOTES
7. Type [.02] in the UPPER TOLERANCE text box, and type [.03] in
the LOWER TOLERANCE text box. Click OK .
8. Modify the format and tolerance limit of the 0.100 location

dimension. Select the 0.100 dimension and click Done Sel .
9. Select +- Symmetric from the TOLERANCE MODE drop-down

list. Type [2] in the NUMBER OF DIGITS text box, then type [.02]
in the TOLERANCE text box. Click OK .
10. Close the window for the part and activate the window for the
drawing.
Task 2. Turn on the tolerance display in the drawing. Modify the format
and values of some tolerances.
1. Click Advanced > Draw Setup . In the drawing setup file, change
the setting for the tol_display option to yes .
Click Add/Change > OK .
2. Repaint the screen and click Done/Return .
3. Modify the tolerance format and values of the .250 dimension in

the upper left view. Select the .250 dimension, right click and
choose Properties .
4. Change the tolerance format and the tolerance limits. Select Plus-
Minus from the TOLERANCE MODE drop-down list.
5. Type [2] in the NUMBER OF DIGITS text box. Type [.02] in the
UPPER TOLERANCE text box. Type [.03] in the LOWER
TOLERANCE text box. Click OK .
6. Change any dimensions that appear in limits format to nominal.

Select dimensions to modify and click Done Sel . Select Nominal
from the TOLERANCE MODE drop-down list and click OK . Click
Done/Return .
Task 3. Create a geometric tolerance for parallelism and display it on

the 3.00 dimension in the lower left view. Use datum A as a reference.
1. Use the toolbar icons to turn on the datum planes, and repaint the
screen.
2. Reposition the datum planes appropriately in order to create gtols.

Create a new datum plane through the left side surface of the lower
NOTES
left view. Click Insert > Datum > Plane to display the DATUM
dialog box.
3. Define datum plane A through the surface shown in the following

figure. Enter [A] in the NAME section of the dialog box and click
On Surface .
4. Click Query Sel and then select the surface. Click Next until you
highlight the side surface, then click Accept . Click -A- in the
TYPE area of the dialog box to set the datum. Select FREE and
click OK .
Datum A should
pass through this
surface
Figure 3: Datum A Location
5. Use the [Select] icon to position the new datum as shown in the
preceding figure. Experiment with the two drag handles. Turn off
the datum planes and repaint the screen.
6. Erase the extra datum flags from Section A-A and the upper left
view. Select the datum flags for datum A in Section A-A and the
upper left view, press right mouse button and choose Erase .
7. Click on the empty background to finish.
8. Create the gtol for parallelism on the 3.00 dimension in the lower
left view. Click Insert > Geometric Tolerance > Select
PLUNGER_BODY_TOLERANCES.PRT from the MODEL drop-
down list.
9. Define the gtol for parallelism on the right side surface. Select
SURFACE from the REFERENCE TYPE drop-down list, then select
the surface shown in the following figure.
NOTES
10. Select DIMENSION from the PLACEMENT TYPE drop-down list

and select the 3.000 dimension.
Place the tolerance

on this dimension
Select this (end)

surface as the
tolerance reference.
Figure 4: Parallelism References
7. Click Datum Refs , then select A from the BASIC drop-down list as
the primary reference.
8. Define the tolerance value and a least material condition. Click Tol
Value and type [0.006] as the overall tolerance value. Select
LMC from the MATERIAL CONDITION drop-down list. Click OK
to finish the gtol. The tolerance should appear as shown in the
following figure except it is displayed vertically.
Figure 5: Parallelism Geometric Tolerance
Task 4. Create a geometric tolerance for concentricity and display it on

the 0.250 diameter dimension in the center view. Use datum axis D as the
datum reference, which is the axis for this hole. You must rename the axis.
1. Use the toolbar to turn on the axis names and repaint the screen.
2. Change the name of datum axis A_32 and set it. Select axis A_32
in Section A-A. Right click and choose Properties . In the AXIS
dialog box, change the name of the axis to [D]. Click -A- in the
TYPE area of the dialog box to set the datum. Select FREE and
click OK to place the datum with a free placement.
3. Remove the set datum axis from other views using pop up menu.
NOTES
4. Create the gtol for concentricity on the 0.250 diameter dimension

in the front view. Click Insert > Geometric Tolerance > and
accept the default PLUNGER_BODY_tolerance.PRT from the
MODEL drop-down list.
5. Select SURFACE from the REFERENCE TYPE drop-down list and

select the surface shown in the following figure.
6. Select DIMENSION from the PLACEMENT TYPE drop-down list

and then select the 0.25 dimension.
Specify this
surface as the
reference
Figure 6: Concentric References
7. Click Datum Refs and select D from the BASIC drop-down list as
the primary reference.
8. Define the tolerance value and a least material condition. Click Tol
Value and type [0.003] as the Overall Tolerance value. Select
LMC from the MATERIAL CONDITION drop-down list.
9. Define the tolerance to include the diameter symbol. Click

Symbols , select the Diameter Symbol check box. The tolerance
should appear as shown in the following figure.
Figure 7: Concentric Tolerance
10. Click New Gtol to repeat these steps to create the gtol for the 1.125
diameter dimension for the cut, as shown in the Plunger Body
Drawing at the beginning of the exercise. Reference the
cylindrical surface of the cut and attach the gtol to the 1.125
NOTES
diameter dimension. The complete gtol should appear as shown in

the following figure. Click Done/Return .
Figure 8: Concentric Tolerance for the 1.125 Diameter Dimension
Note:
The system displays the concentric gtol under the dimension
because the configuration file option
gtol_dim_placement controls its location.
Task 5. Modify the values and information in some of the geometric

tolerances that you just created.
1. Click Edit > Value and select the tolerance value .004 in the gtol
for the 1.125 diameter. Enter [.005].
2. Select the gtol for the .250 diameter hole. Right click and choose
Properties . Click the Tol Value tab. Select MMC from the
MATERIAL CONDITION drop-down list. Click OK .
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can change the format and values of linear tolerances.

• You can create and modify geometric tolerances.
Module
9
Drawing Tables
In this module, you learn how to create and manipulate drawing
tables.
Objectives
• Create and manipulate drawing tables.

• Save drawing tables for use in future drawings.
Page 9-1
NOTES
PURPOSE OF DRAWING TABLES

You can use a table in a drawing for many purposes, such as to show a
Bill of Materials or to create part catalogue. In Pro/ENGINEER, you can
create a table on your drawing, save it to your hard drive, and use it later
in other drawings.
Creating a Drawing Table

To create a table in a drawing, you must define the direction of the table,
its location within the drawing, and the size of the rows and columns.
Table Direction and Location

You can specify the direction of a drawing table as ascending or
descending, and as rightward or leftward, as shown in the following
figure. The options that you choose determine the default origin for the
table and the direction that the table grows if you add columns or rows.
Therefore, you should define a direction that would prevent the table from
growing off of the drawing sheet or into a drawing view.
Figure 1: Table Directions
The system prompts you to locate the first corner of the table based on the
direction that you have defined. If you have defined the table direction as
descending and rightward, for example, the system prompts you to locate
the upper left corner.
Row and Column Size

After specifying the direction of the table, you must define the size of each
row and column by specifying an actual size value or selecting the number
of characters that can fit in each cell.
NOTES
• Entering a value – You must define a value for each column and row.
To specify the units, set the drawing setup file option
drawing_units.
• Selecting the number of characters – To select the number of
characters, you must select an area on the number bar that appears on
the screen, as shown in the following figure. Pro/ENGINEER
automatically places padding that is half of a character wide at each
end of the cell which means that if you select the 7 in the number bar,
you can only fit 6 characters in that cell. Therefore, you should place
the cursor slightly beyond the number that you actually want. For
example, if you want 8 characters, you should select between the 8 and
the 9 in the number bar.
Select here to fit eight

characters in the cell
Select here to fit twelve

Left border of
characters in the cell
the table
Figure 2: Specifying Cell Size
Note:
After you specify the size of the cell by selecting the number
of characters to fit in a cell, you can still enter more characters.
If you add more characters than the cell can accommodate,
they overlap into neighboring cells. Text does not
automatically wrap and the cells do not automatically grow. To
do that, you need to use wrap text functionality.
Setting the Justification for Each Column

Prior to entering text into a table, you should define the justification for
each column, as shown in the following figure. The default justification
setting is left justified. You should specify the justification that you want
to use for the majority of the table cells. Later, you can change individual
cells, if needed.
D ra w i n g T ab l e s Pag e 9- 3
NOTES
Figure 3: Justification of a Table
Adding Text to the Cells

You can add text to the cells in a table using the keyboard and the symbol
palette. A short cut for entering text is to select the cell and use pop up
menu.
In addition to plain text, you can also include dimension and parameter
values, as you would to create a parametric note. To include a dimension
or parameter value, you must place an ampersand (&) before the symbolic
value. For example, to include the numeric value for cost in a table, you
would enter [&cost] into the table.
Changing the Content of a Cell

• You can change the content of a cell by reentering text in the cell.
Pro/ENGINEER overwrites the existing text.
• You can also edit text using ENTER TEXT dialog box just like note.
Modifying the Text Style and Setting the Justification for

Individual Cell
Once you have placed text in a table cell, you can change its style.
NOTES
Figure 4: Modified Text
• Text in a cell behaves the same way as a note when assigning text
style. As discussed in an earlier chapter, Pro/ENGINEER actually
breaks up the cell contents into text fields that you can manipulate
separately from the rest of the cell text.
• To set justification of cells after entering text, you need to change the
text style instead of setting the justification for the Columns. You can
select all of the text that should have the same justification to avoid
having to repeat the procedure.
Manipulating a Drawing Table

Once you have created a drawing table, you can manipulate it by doing the
following:
• Inserting and Removing rows and columns.

• Changing the size of columns and rows.
• Wrapping text
• Combining multiple cells into one.
• Changing the origin of the table.
• Removing individual cell borders.
Changing the Size of Columns and Rows

After creating the table, you can change the size of any column or row by
redefining the length or the number of characters that fit in the cell.
Wrapping text
If the text overlap into neighboring cells, you can use the wrap text
functionality to fit text inside the cell.
NOTES
• You can wrap text in a specific cell.

• You can wrap text in a row or column using pop up menu.
• If wrapping text doesn’t solve the problem, you need to change the cell
size of text size.
Combining Multiple Cells into One

You can combine table rows, columns, or a combination of both into one
cell by merging them together. A merged cell acts like any other cell, as
shown in the following figure. If you later choose to split the cells apart,
you can re-mesh them into individual cells.
Figure 5: Merging Cells
Changing the Origin of the Table

You can move the origin point of the table to any corner. This could be
useful if you move the table to the other side of the drawing and want to
prevent the table from growing off the sheet.
Removing Individual Cell Borders

You can blank individual cell borders from display . The cells remain
separate, as shown in the following figure. If you later decide to show the
border again, you can unblank the cell borders.
NOTES
Notice cells are still

defined
Figure 6: Blanking Cells
Repositioning Drawing Tables

You can reposition drawing tables in the following manners:
• Use the Table > Move command or simply select the table using the
[Select] icon and move it.
• Use the Sheets > Switch Sheets command.
• Use the Cut , Copy and Paste commands in the EDIT menu.
NOTES
Goal
To create a table in the drawing.
Method
In this exercise, you create a drawing table, and then modify the table size
and format. You also add text to the table and change the style of the table
text.
EXERCISE 1: Creating and Modifying a Drawing

Table
Task 1. Switch some of the views to a new sheet to make room for
table.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_TABLES.DRW. You can work on

PLUNGER_BODY.DRW, if you have finished the plunger body
drawing earlier.

appear on the screen, turn them off and repaint the screen.
3. Switch the cross-section and detailed views to a new sheet. Click

Sheets > Switch Sheet , then select the cross-section and detailed
views to switch. Click Done Sel > Done to finish.
4. Reposition the views as shown in the following figure.
5. Return to Sheet 1 and move the views to new positions, as shown

NOTES
NOTES
Task 2. Create a drawing table that presents the revision history of the
drawing. The table should consist of three rows and three columns.
1. Click Table > Create .
2. Define the table so that it grows toward the bottom left of the
sheet. Click Descending > Leftward .
3. Select near the upper right corner of the drawing for the table
origin.
4. Using the left mouse button, select immediately after the second
zero to create the first column (20 characters wide).
5. Select immediately after the first zero to create the second column
(10 characters wide).
6. Select immediately after the first 5 to create the third column (5

characters wide).
7. Press the middle mouse button to finish creating the columns.
8. Using the left mouse button, select immediately after the number 2
to create the first row (2 characters high).
9. Select immediately after the number 1 to create the second and

third rows.
10. Press the middle mouse button to finish creating the rows. The
table should appear as shown in the following figure.
5 10 20
2
1
1
Figure 8: Table Size
Task 3. Set up the columns of the table as left and middle-justified.

Add text to the cells in the table. Enter text after justification.
1. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Justify > Column . Click Left > Middle .
Select all three columns of the table to set the justification.
NOTES
2. Click Enter Text and select the upper left table cell.
3. Type [REV] for the first line of text. When the system prompts you
to enter the second line of text, press <ENTER>.
4. Select the upper middle table cell, type [DATE], and press
<ENTER>.
5. Select the upper right table cell, type [DESCRIPTION], and press
<ENTER>.
6. Repeat the process until the table appears as shown in the

following figure.
Figure 9: Adding Text to a Table
Task 4. Change the text style of the column headers. Increase the text
height, make the font bold, and center-justify the headers.
1. Click Format > Text Style . Select the three column headers, then
click Done Sel .
2. Select Filled from the FONT drop-down list.
3. Type [.30] in the TEXT HEIGHT dialog box.
4. Select Center from the JUSTIFY HORIZ drop-down list.
5. Click Apply > Close .
Task 5. Add a new row to the bottom of the table to indicate a new
revision.
1. Click Table > Mod Rows/Cols > Insert > Row .
2. Select the bottom border of the last row.
Tips & Techniques:

If you insert the row incorrectly, you can use the Remove
option to delete any unnecessary rows or columns.
NOTES
3. Enter the text into the new cells as shown in the following figure.
Figure 10: New Row Added to Table
Task 6. Create a new table on the drawing to display the release

information. The table should consist of three columns and three rows.
1. Click Create > Descending > Rightward > By Length .
2. Locate this table below the first table.
3. Create a table that is similar to the one in the following figure.
4. For each column width, enter [1.0].
5. For the height of the first row, enter [1.0]
6. For the height of the second row, enter [.5].
7. For the height of the third row, enter [.8].
8. Define the justification of the cell. Click Mod Rows/Cols >

Justify > Column , then click Center > Middle . Select all three
columns of the table to set the justification.
9. Merge the cells of the first row. Click Modify Table > Merge >
Rows & Cols , then select the upper left cell and the upper right
cell of the table.
10. Merge the cells of the second row. Select the left cell and the right
cell of the second row. The table should appear as shown in the
following figure.
NOTES
Original cells Merged cells

Figure 11: Merged Cells
Task 7. Enter text into the table and manipulate the text style.
1. Click Enter Text and select the top row.
2. Type [RELEASED PRINT] for the first line, [RESPONSIBLE

ENGINEERING ACTIVITY] for the second line, and press
<ENTER> to finish entering text.
3. Change the size and justification of text you just entered. Use the
[Select] icon to select the text. Press the right mouse button,
and choose Modify Text Style .
4. In the TEXT STYLE dialog box, type [.1] in the HEIGHT text box.
5. Select Center from the JUSTIFY HORIZ drop-down list and Top
from the JUSTIFY VERT drop-down list. Click Apply. Close the
dialog box.
6. Change the height of RELEASED PRINT. Select Text Style from

the FORMAT pull down menu. Select RELEASED PRINT,
followed by Done Sel . Clear the default check box for height.
Enter [.15] as the height.
7. Click OK to close the dialog box.
8. Using the same technique, enter [REA ORG CODE] in the second
row. Set text height to .1, Left / Middle justified.
9. Enter [REV], [REL DATE] and [REL BY] in the bottom three cells.
Set text height to .1, center / bottom justified.
NOTES
10. Click Apply > Close . The table should appear as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 12: Release Table
11. Save this table for future use. Click Save/Retrieve from the
TABLE menu, then click Store and select the table. Type
[RELEASE_INFO] as the table name.
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Manipulate an Embedded Excel

Spreadsheet and Movie Object
Task 1. Modify an embedded Excel Spreadsheet from outside
Pro/ENGINEER.
1. Exit Microsoft Excel if it is currently opened.
2. Retrieve the OLE.DRW. This drawing has two objects inserted into
it using Object Linking and Embedding, an Excel Spreadsheet and
a MPEG Movie showing an assembly sequence of the Rotor
Assembly.
3. Select the linked Excel Spreadsheet. Right click and select Open
Object . This will open a separate Microsoft Excel window.
4. The content of the cell indicated in the following figure is the

equation that drives the Graph. Change the content from SIN to
COS.
Figure 13 Change Excel cell content.
5. Drag the modified cell all the way down the column to copy the
equation change.
6. Notice how the Graphs in both the Excel and Pro/ENGINEER

update with the new values. Close the Excel window and return to
the drawing.
Task 2. Play an embedded movie.
1. Click Sheets > Next to go to Sheet 2.
2. Right click the inserted object and select Play Object .
3. Locate the movie file if prompted.
4. After the movie is played, erase the drawing.
NOTES
Note:
The integration of commonly used programs such as the
Microsoft applications, along with other types of objects
(MPEGs), can make the documentation a much easier, more
robust, and efficient process.
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
In this module, you have learned that:
• You can create and manipulate drawing tables.

• You can save drawing tables for use in future drawings.
Module
10
Cosmetic Features
In this module, you learn how to create cosmetic features on a part.
Also, you learn how to use User Defined Features (UDF’s) to
customize the cosmetic threads note.
Objectives
• Create sketched cosmetic features.

• Create cosmetic threads and show the parameters on a drawing.
• Create cosmetic threads, countersinks, counterbores, and tapping
automatically using the Standard Hole functionality.
Page 10-1
NOTES
COSMETIC SKETCHES
Sketched cosmetic features are none solid features that you draw on the
surface of a part, such as company logos or serial numbers that are
stamped on an object. Other features cannot reference sketched cosmetic
features.
Unlike solid features, you can set the color, font(if use text), and line style
of cosmetic sketched features. You can set each individual geometry
segment, whether it is a segment within a feature, a single feature or a
pattern, to a line style
Working with Regular Sections

A regular section cosmetic feature remains on the sketching plane. It is a
flat feature that Pro/ENGINEER locates directly on the plane on which
you sketched it.
You can cross-hatch regular section cosmetic features when you create
them. The cross-hatching displays in all modes of Pro/ENGINEER, but
you can only modify it in Drawing mode.
Working with Projected Sections

With Projected sections, a user can sketch the section on a datum plane or
planar surface and then project it onto a part surface, as shown in the
following figure. However, projecting it onto the part surface does result
in some distortion in the shape of the feature, depending on the shape and
orientation of the surface.
Pag e 1 0- 2 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g
NOTES
Sketch
Resulting
feature
Projection
surface
Figure 1: Projected Sketch
Showing Cosmetic Sketches on a Drawing

Cosmetic sketches appear on the associated drawing automatically. Using
the SHOW/ERASE dialog box, you can erase a cosmetic sketch on a
drawing in the same way that you would erase a dimension. You can
manipulate the line style of the segments or the sketch, as well as the
cross-hatching of the sketch. You can show or erase the cosmetic sketch in
the drawing views individually.
COSMETIC THREADS
A cosmetic thread uses a magenta halo to represent the diameter of a
thread. Unlike other cosmetic features, you cannot modify the line style of
a cosmetic thread, and hidden line display settings in the ENVIRONMENT
dialog box do not affect them.
Creating Cosmetic Threads

When you create a cosmetic thread, you must define the surface on which
to create it, the surface on which to start it, the thread depth, and the thread
diameter:
Cosm etic Feat ures Pag e 1 0- 3

NOTES
Starting Surface
To specify the starting surface, you can select a quilt surface, regular
Pro/ENGINEER surface, or split surface (such as a surface that belongs to
a revolved feature, chamfer, round, or swept feature). You must then
specify the direction of the thread.
Depth
To define the thread depth, you can use Blind , Upto Pnt/Vtx , Upto Curve ,
and Upto Surface . You must then specify a value or reference.
Thread Diameter
To define the thread diameter, you can accept the default value that the
system provides based on the diameter of the thread surface. The geometry
of the thread surface determines if the thread is external or internal. If it is
a shaft, the thread is external. If it is a hole, the thread is internal. For an
internal thread, the default diameter value is 10 percent larger than the
hole diameter. For an external thread, the default diameter value is 10
percent smaller than the shaft.
Note Parameters
The following table lists the parameters that you can define for a thread.
You can define some of them when you initially create the thread. For
example, the system bases the major diameter and placement on the values
that you specify for the diameter of the thread. In the following table, pitch
is the distance between two threads.
Table 1: Parameters for Thread Definition

Parameter Name Parameter Parameter Description
Value
MAJOR_DIAMETER Number Thread major diameter
THREADS_PER_INCH Number Threads per inch (1/pitch)
THREAD_FORM String Thread form
CLASS Number Thread class
PLACEMENT Character Thread placement (A-external, B-internal)
METRIC TRUE/FALSE Thread is metric
NOTES
You can manipulate thread parameters just as you would manipulate other
user-defined parameters, (add, modify, delete, or display them). Thread
parameters can be saved in parameter files that can be reused later.
The MAJOR_DIAMETER Parameter and Thread Diameter

When creating a cosmetic thread, the diameter value you entered will
become the dimension that actually controls the size of the thread. The
MAJOR_DIAMETER thread parameter you defined is a note parameter.
On drawing, the value displayed in the thread note is the value of the
MAJOR_DIAMETER parameter, not the dimension.
The associativity between the thread diameter and the

MAJOR_DIAMETER parameter exist initially. Once modification is made
to any one of them, the associativity cease to exit.
If you display feature information, Pro/ENGINEER displays both of them.
Placement
Pro/ENGINEER assign the initial thread placement value in the parameter
file based on whether the thread is external (surface geometry is a shaft) or
internal (surface geometry is a hole).
Displaying Cosmetic Threads and Parameters on a

Drawing
Once you create a cosmetic thread on a part, it appears on the associated
drawing automatically. The system displays it by default in magenta, just
as it would display a surface feature, and hidden line display does not
affect it. To control the effect of hidden line removal on cosmetic threads,
set the drawing setup file option hlr_for_threads to Yes or No ,
accordingly.
To show cosmetic thread parameters, you can select FEAT _ VIEW from
the SHOW page of the SHOW/ERASE dialog box, and then select the
thread in the view for which you would like to show the note. The note
appears in the drawing in the format shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Form Class
Major diameter
Placement
Threads per inch
Figure 2: Thread Note
Changing the Format of a Thread Note

The note shown in the following figure may not be in the appropriate
format for your drawings. Using the following techniques, you can modify
the format of a thread note to meet your requirements:
Using standard note to remove the spaces

If the company standards require changing the note format by removing
unnecessary spaces, you can modify notes individually or create a
standard thread note as shown in the following figure.
The note can be created using system text editor and saved as a text file.
The format of the text file should meet the company thread note standard.
The content of the note will be parametric. They should accurately reflect
the parameters of the thread. The new note can be inserted on drawing
attached to the cosmetic thread.
• &— An ampersand should precede each parameter to make sure the

note is parametric.
• :att —The postfix :att after each parameter is used to ensure that the
system uses the parameters of the feature to which you attach the note.
• [.#] — By adding [.#] after a parameter, you can control the number of
decimal places of a parameter such as the threads per inch
parameter. # is the number of decimal places desired, as shown in the
following figure.
&MAJOR_DIAMETER:att-&THREADS_PER_INCH:att[.0] &FORM:att-&CLASS:att &PLACEMENT:att
[.0] controls the number of

:att uses the parameter for the feature digits for the parameter
to which the note is attached
Figure 3: Note Format for Thread Parameter
NOTES
Using the UDF to Change the Major Diameter to a Fraction

Using the techniques discussed above, you can not change the format of
the major diameter parameter. &MAJOR_DIAMETER:att in the note
ensures the parameter value of the feature the note is attached to is
displayed, which by default will be displayed in decimal places, not
fraction.
To change the major diameter to a fraction or remove the leading zero you
need to delete the for the major diameter parameter and re-create it as a
string.
This breaks the associativity with the diameter dimension, but allows you
to display a fraction in the note.
To simplify this process, you can create a user-defined feature (UDF) for
the cosmetic thread with a built in “string” type major diameter .
Because creating a UDF can only preset the major diameter to “string”, to
display a thread note with a fraction major diameter and remove the
unnecessary spaces, you need to place the thread UDF and insert the note
using techniques discussed in the previous section.
USER-DEFINED FEATURES
To establish a library of common geometry that you can save for future
use, you can create user-defined features (UDFs)—groups of features,
their references, and dimensions. The following figure shows screw boss
geometry as an example of a UDF. It contains 1 protrusion, 1 hole, 4 ribs,
and a draft feature.
Figure 4: Screw Boss Geometry

NOTES
Once you create and save a UDF, you can reuse it quickly on future
models, as well as display cosmetic thread notes according to your
company standard. If you set up the thread parameters so that they display
correctly in the UDF, the note then displays correctly wherever you use
the UDF.
Creating a UDF
To create a UDF, you must first model the geometry that you want to save.
As you create the geometry, you should be aware of the parent/child
relationships that you are defining. You should define the features using
common external references or references to one another. Once you have
defined the geometry, you can define the UDF. This section discusses the
steps that you should follow to create a UDF of the cosmetic thread shown
in the following figure:
• Begin the definition and specify an option for storing it.

• Store reference parts.
• Name the group.
• Select features.
• Create external reference prompts.
• Define variable dimensions and elements.
• Complete the definition.
Figure 5: Cosmetic Thread
NOTES
Subordinate / Standalone UDFs

UDFs are classified as either Subordinate or Standalone. If a UDF is
stored as a standalone feature, the system stores all of the information that
it needs to create the UDF feature in the UDF file itself. If you store it as a
subordinate feature, the system uses some of the information from the
current model for the UDF features.
Note:
For a subordinate feature, if the current model is not present
when you later access the UDF, the system cannot retrieve the
UDF.
Storing Reference Parts

When creating a standalone UDF, you can store a reference part to use
later in placing the UDF on a new model. The system creates a copy of the
current part and assigns it the name UDFNAME_GP.PRT. If you store the
UDF as a subordinate feature, the current model automatically becomes
the reference part.
Naming the Group

The name that you assign to a UDF should be a valid filename that is
independent of the model from which you created it, unique and
descriptive, (to ensure that it is easily identifiable). When the system
stores the file, it appends the file extension gph. In some cases, your
company standards specify the naming convention that you should use for
UDFs.
Selecting Features
To assist you in selecting the appropriate model features to include in the
UDF, you can use Query Sel or the MODEL TREE.
Creating External Reference Prompts

Once you have finished selecting the features to include in the UDF, you
should define prompts for the external references (that is, references to
parent features other than those contained in the UDF group) to appear in
the message area, as shown in the following figure. You should create

NOTES
descriptive prompts that can assist the user in placing the feature,
especially if you are using a standalone UDF that does not have a
reference model.
Note:
You must define any parent/child reference that you create
with geometry other than the features of the UDF.
Upto surface
Thread surface
Start surface
Figure 6: External References for Cosmetic Thread
Tips & Techniques:

For each reference that you create for a UDF, you must specify
a prompt, and then specify a corresponding reference for it
when placing the UDF on a new model. Therefore, when
creating features for the UDF, you can save time by creating as
few references as possible.
Defining Variable Dimensions and Elements

As you select features for the UDF, you can define variable dimensions,
variable elements, and predefined variations of the UDF. Specifically, you
can do the following:
• Make some or all of the driving dimensions variable – You must

specify a descriptive prompt for each variable driving dimension to
indicate what it controls. For any dimensions that you do not select,
Pag e 1 0- 1 0 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g
NOTES
the system uses the same values as you assigned to the UDF when you
stored it.
• Increase its flexibility – You can define variable elements for the
UDF as well. For example, you can change the depth of the hole from
Blind to Thru All , etc.
• Define prompts and logic statements – Using Pro/PROGRAM, you

can define prompts and logic statements within the UDF.
• Create predefined variations of the UDF – Using family tables, you
can store geometry sets of various sizes internal to the UDF instead of
requiring the user to enter a set of dimensions.
Completing the Definition

Once you have defined all of the UDF elements, you can select OK from
the dialog box to automatically save the UDF and the reference part to the
hard drive. The system assigns the UDF the name UDFname.gph. You
may then want to move the file to a common group directory to give all
users in your company access to the new feature that you have defined.
Placing a UDF
When you place a UDF on a new model, the system creates a group within
the new model containing the UDF features. To retrieve the geometry
from within a new model, you can choose Feature , Create , and User
Defined or Feature , Group , Create , and From UDF Library . After you
select a UDF file, you should place it by following these steps:
• Select the driving options to control the geometry – To control the

geometry after placing it, you can define it as either independent or
UDF-driven.
• With independent placement, the system makes the group that you
created in the current model completely independent of the UDF file.
! With a UDF-driven placement, the system associates the group
to the UDF file. As a result, if the UDF file changes, the group
in the new model changes when you select Update from the
GROUP menu. You can use this method to enforce company
standards.
! Retrieve a reference part to assist you in placing the UDF, if

necessary. If you retrieve a reference part into a subwindow,
you can use it as a visual aid. As the system prompts you for
Cosm etic Feat ures Pag e 1 0-11

NOTES
geometry, it automatically highlights the equivalent of the

reference part.
• Specify values of any variable dimensions that you created and

placement references –The following figure illustrates how to
choose references for UDF placement.
Upto surface
Thread surface
Start surface
Figure 7: Choosing References for UDF Placement

• Specify the display for invariable dimensions – The system does
not prompt you for invariable dimensions when placing the UDF. You
can specify the display as Normal , Read-Only, or Blank .
• If you select NORMAL, the system displays dimensions as standard
dimensions, using the values from the UDF, but you can modify them.
This option is available only if you created the UDF as Independent .
! If you select Read Only, the system displays the dimensions as
normal dimensions using the values from the UDF file, but you
cannot modify them.
! If you select Blank, the system does not display the dimensions
in the new model, as shown in the following figure.
NOTES
Figure 8: Invariable Dimensions Blanked

• Define any optional elements – As optional elements, you can only
select those elements that you already defined in the UDF. For
example, if you had only selected Blind and Thru All , when you place
the UDF, the system would only provide you with those two choices.
• Finish the placement – Before finishing the placement, you can
preview the UDF by selecting PREVIEW from the dialog box, then
click Done . If you do not need to preview it, you can choose OK to
complete it.
Summary of Technique for Creating Cosmetic

Threads UDF
In summary, you should follow these steps to use a UDF to create a
cosmetic thread and display the thread note in the correct format on a
drawing:
• Create the cosmetic thread.

• Delete and recreate the major diameter parameter as a string with the
correct format.
• Create a UDF for the cosmetic thread.
• Create a note on the drawing with the correct format and save it to a
text file for future use.
Creating Cosmetic Threads using Standard Hole

When creating a hole, cosmetic threads can be created using the Standard
Hole > Tapped Hole option. The Standard Hole option allows for

NOTES
standard UNC, UNF and ISO holes to be created. Counterbores,

countersinks, and tapping can be included, and default sizes are included.
In tapped a hole, a cosmetic thread can be included automatically, as

Figure 9: Standard Hole Dialog Box
The Standard Hole automatically generates a 3D note as a callout, as

shown in the Hole Note Preview at the bottom of the dialog box in the
following figure. This note can be shown on a drawing, but is not
parametric.
Note:
The note created by the Standard Hole is not parametric – that
is, the values in it cannot be modified directly. To change the
values in the note, the feature must be Redefined and
modified via the dialog box.
NOTES
Goal
To create cosmetic features on the part and display them on the drawing.
Method
In the first exercise, you create a cosmetic sketch on the plunger body part
that says PTC to represent a logo on the model. In addition, you display
the sketch on the drawing of the plunger body.
In the second exercise, you create a cosmetic thread on a bolt by creating a

user-defined feature so that you can display the thread information
differently on the drawing.
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Cosmetic Sketch

Task 1. Create a projected section cosmetic sketch.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_ COSMETIC_FEATURES .PRT. You

can continue on your own project by working on
PLUNGER_BODY.PRT and corresponding drawing.
2. Click Insert >Cosmetic > Sketch . Click Project Sec > Done .
3. When the system prompts you to select the surface on which to

project the sketch, select the surface shown in the following figure.
Click Done Sel > Done Refs .

NOTES
Select this surface onto

which to project the sketch
Figure 10: Projection Surface
4. Define the sketching and reference planes for the cosmetic sketch.
Select DTM2 as the sketching plane for the feature and click Okay
to accept the default viewing direction.
5. Click Bottom and select DTM3 so that the yellow side of DTM3
faces toward the bottom of the screen.
6. Accept the default references for the sketch, which are DTM1 and
DTM3.
7. Sketch the letters PTC in the position shown in the following

figure. Click Sketch > Text and select the start and second point
8. Enter [PTC] as the text line. Type [.2] for the Aspect Ration and hit
the <Enter> key. Change the font if you would like. Close the text
dialog box.
Second Point
Start Point
NOTES
Figure 11: Text Location
9. Click Sketch> Done to finish the feature.
10. Save and close the window.
Task 2. Retrieve the plunger body drawing and erase the cosmetic
sketch from some of the views on the drawing.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_COSMETIC_FEATURES.DRW.
2. Use the toolbar icons to turn off the display of datum planes if
necessary and repaint the screen.
3. Erase the cosmetic sketch from every view except for the one in
the upper left corner of the sheet. Click View > Show and Erase
Erase > [cosmetic feature ] and click VIEW . Select every
view on Sheet 1 except the upper left view.
4. Erase the cosmetic sketch from the views on Sheet 2. Click

Window >New and type [2] as the sheet to view. Erase the
cosmetic sketch in Section A-A. Close the window for Sheet 2, and
activate the window for Sheet 1.
5. Save and erase both the drawing and the part.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Cosmetic Threads

Task 1. Create a cosmetic thread on a bolt.
1. Retrieve THREADED_BOLT.PRT.
2. Click Insert > Cosmetic > Thread . Select the cylindrical surface
of the bolt as the thread surface, as shown in the following figure.
Thread surface
Start surface
Figure 12: Thread Surfaces
3. Define the thread so that it starts at the end of the bolt. Select the
surface at the end of the bolt, as shown in the following figure, as
the start surface.
4. Define the direction of feature creation to be toward the head of the

bolt. Make sure the arrow points in the correct direction, then click
Okay .
5. Define the depth of the thread as 1.00 and the diameter as 0.45.
Click Blind > Done . Type [1.00] as the depth value. Type [0.45]
as the thread diameter.
6. Modify the thread parameters to define the class, form, placement,

and threads per inch. Click Mod Params .
7. Set the values for the thread parameters. Type the values as shown
in the following table.
NOTES
Table 2: Values for Thread Parameters

MAJOR_DIAMETER 0.45
THREADS_PER_INCH 15
FORM UNC
CLASS 2
PLACEMENT A
METRIC False
8. Click File >Exit from the text editor. Click Done/Return >
Preview > OK to create the feature.
Task 2. Show the note for the cosmetic thread. Alter the display of the
thread and the note.
1. Retrieve THREADED_BOLT.DRW.
2. Change the display of the cosmetic threads so that the hidden line
removal process affects them. Edit the drawing set-up file. Click
Advanced > Draw Setup and set hlr_for_threads to [yes]. Update
and apply changes.
3. Show the thread note on the drawing in the upper left view. Click
View > Show and Erase . Click Show > [note] and select
FEAT_VIEW. Select the thread in the upper left view and close
the dialog box.
4. Position the note as shown in the following figure. Click

[Select], select the note to highlight it, and press the left mouse
button to move it.
5. To change the arrow position, press right mouse button to access

the pop-up menu when the note is highlighted.
6. Click Mod Attach .
7. The default option is Change Ref. With this option you can select a
new reference to which to attach the arrow.
8. To access more options, click Same Ref from the menu manager
to move the arrow along the current attachment reference.

NOTES
Figure 13: Default Note Format
Task 3. Change the format of this note so that the major diameter
displays as a fraction. Also, change the spacing and the number of digits
in the note.
1. Click Window > THREADED_BOLT to return to the part window.
2. Delete the major diameter parameter. Click Set Up > Parameters

> Feature , then select the cosmetic thread. Click Delete , select
MAJOR_DIAMETER, and click Done .
3. Click Create > String to create a new string parameter called

MAJOR_DIAMETER. Type [MAJOR_DIAMETER] as the
parameter name and [7/16] as the parameter value.
Tips & Techniques:

The new major diameter parameter is not associated with the
diameter of the cosmetic thread. If you modify the thread
diameter, this parameter does not automatically update. To
make the new parameter associative to the diameter
dimension, you can use some advanced relations to convert the
dimension to a fraction.
4. Click Window > THREADED_BOLT.DRW to return to the drawing

window. The note no longer displays the major diameter.
5. Modify the thread note to use the new major diameter parameter.
Click [Select] and select the note. Press and hold the right
mouse button, select Properties .
6. Replace *** in the first field of the note by entering

[&major_diameter:fid_#], where # is the same number
displayed for the other parameters.
NOTES
7. Remove the spaces around the dash between the major diameter
and the threads per inch. Remove the spaces around the dash
between the form and the class.
8. Remove the space between the class and placement. Click OK to

finish the change.
Note:
The system displays the feature id in the format after all of the
parameter names, where FID stands for the feature ID and the
number represents the cosmetic thread ID. Since these
parameters are feature parameters, they must call out the
feature using this format.
9. Modify the number of digits for the threads per inch parameter.
Click Format > Decimal Places and enter [0] as the number of
digits to display.
10. Select the number 15.000 in the note and click Done Sel . The new
note should appear as shown in the following figure.
Figure 14: New Note Format

NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Using UDF to Standardize a Thread

Note
Task 1. To avoid making these changes every time you use a cosmetic
thread on a drawing, create a UDF for the cosmetic thread. Create some
feature parameters to use with the thread to display the note differently.
1. Click Window > THREADED_BOLT.PRT to return to the part

window.
2. Create a UDF for the cosmetic thread. Click Feature > UDF
Library > Create . Type [COSM_THREAD] as the name.
3. Define the UDF so that changes to the geometry on the original

model do not affect it. Click Stand Alone > Done .
4. When the system prompts you to include a reference part, enter

[yes ]. The system creates a copy of the current part and gives it the
name COSM_THREAD_GP.PRT.
Tips & Techniques:

When creating the geometry for the UDF, use a very simple
part so that the reference part will be small and easy to
interpret.
5. Specify the features to include in the UDF. Select the cosmetic

thread feature. Click Done Sel > Done > Done/Return .
6. Provide prompts for the external references, as shown in the

following figure. These are references to features other than those
contained in the UDF.
7. When the system highlights the cylindrical surface of the bolt, type
[Thread Surface] as the prompt.
8. When it highlights the flat surface at the end of the bolt, type
[Start Surface] as the prompt. Later, when you place the UDF,
these prompts appear in the message area.
NOTES
Start surface
Thread surface
Figure 15: Reference Prompts
9. Verify the accuracy of the prompts. As Pro/ENGINEER highlights

a surface on the screen and displays the prompt in the message
area, click Next to view the next prompt or click Enter Prompt
and type the correct prompt.
10. After setting all of the prompts, click Done/Return to finish.
11. Define the depth and the note parameters of the cosmetic thread as
variable. Select VAR ELEMENTS and click Define , then select the
cosmetic thread. Select DEPTH and click Done > Done Sel .
12. Define the diameter of the thread as the only variable dimension
specifying the prompt for the dimension as Thread Diameter.
Select VAR DIMS and click Define . Select the .45 diameter
dimension, click Done Return > Done Return and type [Thread
Diameter] as the prompt.
13. Click OK to finish UDF definition. Save the model and quit the
windows. Click Window > THREADED_BOLT.DRW , then click
Window > Close .
14. Activate the part window, click Window > Activate . Save the part
and close the window.
Task 2. Retrieve SCREW.PRT and place the cosmetic thread UDF on it.
Retrieve the screw drawing and create a note for the thread.
1. Place the cosmetic thread UDF on the screw part. Click Feature >
Create > User Defined. Select COSM_THREAD.GPH and click
Open . Select YES to retrieve reference part.

NOTES
2. Click Independent > Done to define the new thread as completely

independent of the UDF file.
3. The system displays the SCALE menu with options for retaining
the dimensions or using a scale. Click Same Dims > Done . Type
[.80] as the new thread diameter.
4. Define the invariable dimensions on the UDF so that they display

as normal dimensions. Click Normal > Done .
5. Specify the placement references that you used in the UDF, as

shown in the following figure. Select the cylindrical surface of the
screw as the thread surface and the flat end of the screw as the start
surface.
Up To surface
Thread surface
Start surface
Figure 16: Placement References
6. Change the depth of the thread so that it goes up to the surface, as

shown in the following figure. Select DEPTH and click Define .
7. Click Up To Surface > Done . Select the surface as shown in the

following figure. Click Preview > OK , then click Done to finish
the thread.
8. Retrieve SCREW.DRW.
9. Create a note for the cosmetic thread parameters. Click Insert >
Note. Click Leader > File > Horizontal > Standard > Default >
Make Note .
10. Attach the note with an arrowhead to the edge of the cosmetic
feature in the left side view. Click On Entity > Arrow Head >
NOTES
Query Sel , then select the right side edge of the thread as shown in
11. Click Next until the edge of the thread highlights, then click
Accept . Click Done Sel > Done . Locate the note by selecting to
the right of the view.
Select the hidden

edge of the thread
Figure 17: Note Attachment
12. Retrieve the note COSM_THREAD_NOTE.TXT and click

Done/Return .
13. Change the values for the thread diameter and the threads per inch
on the note. Click Advance > Parameters > Feature . Select the
cosmetic thread.
14. Click Modify > MAJOR_DIAMETER . Enter [13/16]. Click

Modify > THREADS_PER_INCH . Type [12]. Repaint to update the
note with the new parameter values as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 18: New Thread Note

NOTES
NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Cosmetic Threads Using Standard

Holes
Task 1. Create a 5”h x 5”w x 3”t protrusion.
1. Create a new part using the default template.
2. Create a rectangular protrusion. Sketch a 5 x 5 rectangle and

extrude to a depth of 3.
Task 2. Create a Standard Hole.
1. Click Insert > Hole and observe the dialog box as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 19: Standard Hole Options

NOTES
2. In the HOLE TYPE section, click the Standard Hole radio button
and make sure the following checkboxes are selected:
! Add Thread Surface
! Add Counterbore
! Add Countersink
3. Set the hole size to 7/8-9 using the SCREW SIZE drop-down list.
4. Select the top surface as the placement plane, the front and right
side surfaces as the reference planes.
5. Type [2.50 ] in the DISTANCE boxes for each reference.
Note:
At the bottom of the HOLE dialog box, Pro/ENGINEER
previews the 3D note that will be created along with this
feature. All diameter, depth, and shape callouts are
represented in the note.
6. Complete the feature. Notice the cosmetic thread feature is created

along with the hole – this is one feature.
Task 3. Create a drawing of the part to display the Standard Hole note.
1. Create a drawing using c-drawing template. 3 views are

automatically created.
2. Click View > Show and Erase > Show > and select the
hole. The note appears. Close the dialog box.
Task 4. Modify the hole diameter in the note in drawing mode.
1. Click [Select] and select the note. Press and hold the right
mouse button, choose Properties . Notice that it is non-parametric.
2. The texts in the hole note are plain texts. To make sure the note
accurately reflects the size of the hole. You need to redefine the
hole in part mode. Click OK to close the dialog box.
NOTES
Task 5. Modify the hole diameter by redefining the hole in part mode.
1. Activate the part window and press and hold the right mouse
button over the hole in Model tree. Click Redefine .
2. Change to hole size to 14-20 and complete the feature.
3. Activate the Drawing. The note may have disappeared. Click

Show > to display the note of the modified hole. The note
should display the true size of the hole.
4. Save the part and close the window.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create sketched cosmetic features.

• There is a difference between sketched and projected sections for
cosmetic features.
• You can create cosmetic threads and show the parameters on a
drawing.
• You can modify the note of a cosmetic callout to match your
company’s standards for callouts.
• You can automatically create cosmetic threads, countersinks,
counterbores, and tapping using the Standard Hole functionality.
Module
11
2-D Drafting
In this module, you learn how to use the 2-D Drafting tools.
Objectives
• Create draft geometry in a drawing.

• Manipulate and modify draft geometry.
Page 11-1
NOTES
2-D DRAFTING CAPABILITIES

If you have a license for Pro/DETAIL, you can access two-dimensional
drafting tools.
2-D drafting tools in drawing mode are similar to the Pro/ENGINEER 3-D
Sketcher. 2-D draft entities can be parametric and associative to model
geometry.
Different from 3-D sketcher, draft entities are created without dimensions.
Both associative and non-associative draft dimensions can be created in
drawing mode as discussed in the early chapter CREATE DIMENSIONS.
2-D Drafting Applications

You can use Pro/ENGINEER’s drafting functionality to perform the
following:
• Add 2-D entities to a Pro/ENGINEER model drawing.

• Update and maintain legacy data of existing drawings imported from
other systems.
• Create drawing symbols.
• Create a sketch of a design in Layout mode.
• Create formats.
Note:
The configuration file option
draw_points_in_model_units defines the current
draft entities’ coordinate values as model units, rather than
drawing units.
Types Draft Geometry

You can create various types of draft geometry such as lines, arcs, fillet,
circles, ellipses, splines, points, and chamfers. Construction line, crossed
paired and circles can also be created to assist in creating other draft
geometry.
NOTES
Locating Draft Geometry

You can create free-hand sketch with rough size and location. The draft
entities can be easily resized and relocated. However, most of the time, the
draft geometry need be created with exact size and location.
Locate Draft Geometry Approximately

Cross hairs are useful tools for lining up new geometry with existing
geometry. When creating draft geometry, cross hairs appear at the end of
the cursor. When one of the cross hair lines is in line with existing
geometry, the cross hair changes to cyan.
The cyan color of a cross hair does not indicate that the new geometry
lines up perfectly with the existing geometry. Instead, it simply indicates
that the new and existing geometry are relatively close.
Locate Draft Geometry Accurately

To locate draft geometry accurately, you can use any of the following:
• Snapping References
• Draft grid
• Construction geometry
• SKETCH MENU
Snapping References
When you start to create draft geometry, the SNAPPING REFERENCES
dialog box is displayed. You can select draft geometry, as well as model
geometry as references to locate and create draft geometry.
When sketching, the specified references attract the mouse cursor. As a

result, the draft geometry snaps to the references. In addition, constraints
such as parallel, perpendicular midpoint, and tangent, can be applied while
sketching referencing the Snapping References.
Parametric Sketch
When using Snapping Reference, the draft geometry is attached to the
references at the time of the creation. To attach the draft geometry to the
2-D D raf ting Pag e 1 1- 3

NOTES
references permanently, you need to select the Parametric Sketch option

in the sketch menu.
Draft Grid
By turning on the grid snap in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box, you can
use the draft grids to locate the draft entities. Grid snap causes the mouse
picks to snap to the grid points, making it much easier to line up and locate
draft entities to specific locations. You can alter the grid type from
Cartesian to Polar, and vice versa, as well as change the grid size.
Note:
You can still use the grid snap if the grid display is off.
Construction Geometry
Construction geometry entities are lines and circles that can be used as
snap references to locate and create 2-D draft geometry. They are similar
to the guidelines that drafters use on drawing sheets to locate other
geometry; Pro/ENGINEER displays them on the screen in gray phantom
font.
Using the options similar to those for creating regular draft entities, you
can create construction geometry such as, lines, crossed pairs and circles.
Using the default layers the display of the construction geometry can be
easily controlled.
Using the Sketch Menu

There are additional options in the Sketch menu that can help to locate
points for draft geometry in the following ways:
• Relative to the last point you selected using specified x- and y-

coordinate values
• Relative to the drawing origin (located in the lower-left corner) using
absolute coordinate values.
• Specify angle when creating lines
• Specify offset value when creating construction lines
NOTES
• Specify radius when creating circles

• Specify start and end tangency when creating splines
Chaining Geometry
By default, when you create draft geometry, Pro/ENGINEER allows you
to create only one entity at a time. To create more than one draft entity, it
may be easier to start a chain. Chaining geometry enables you to create a
series of entities with the end point of the current entity as the starting
point of the next entity. The system continues to create the next entity until
you end the chain by clicking the middle mouse button.
Manipulating Draft Geometry

In some cases, you may find it easier and faster to manipulate or reproduce
existing draft geometry rather than draft new geometry. Using the 2-D
drafting tools available with Pro/ENGINEER, you can either alter existing
geometry or copy existing geometry.
Altering Existing Geometry

In Pro/ENGINEER, you can change 2-D geometry in the following ways:
• Translate or rotate the geometry to a new location.

• Trim or extend the geometry to square off corners.
• Break up the geometry into smaller segments.
• Change the size of entities.
• Modify the line style of entities.
Copying Existing Geometry

You can quickly and easily create new geometry by copying existing
geometry in the following ways:
• Create multiple copies of entities.

• Mirror entities about a construction line.
• Offset an entity to create a new one.
• Copy model geometry.

NOTES
Grouping Draft Geometry

When manipulating draft geometry, you can group entities together and
manipulate the entire group using some of the same options that you use
with individual entities. However, when working with draft geometry
groups, you should keep in mind the following:
• You can control the display of a group by suppressing and resuming

the group.
• You can delete all of the entities in a group or ungroup the group and
retain the entities.
• You can include notes, symbols, and geometric tolerances in draft
groups.
• A group of draft cross-sections contains the cross-hatching and the
bounding entities.
Modifying Draft Geometry

You can fill or hatch draft entities that form a closed loop. You can use the
same method that you would use to modify cross-sections in parts and
assemblies to modify the hatching.
You can also change the font, width, and color of draft geometry lines by
using the MODIFY LINE STYLE dialog box, or copy a line style from an
existing entity. To save time, Pro/ENGINEER also allows you to create
your own user-defined fonts and store them in a font library for future use.
NOTES

pertain exclusively to two-dimensional drafting:
Table 1: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting 2-D Drafting

associative_dimensioning yes Automatically updates a
no dimension if the associated
draft geometry changes.
aux_line_font # line font name Sets auxiliary line fonts to
(# = 1 through 10,000) a specified font. Uses the
integer number to
associate a line font to
draft geometry. In this
way, you can make a
blanket change by
changing the font name
associated with a number.
draft_scale 1.0 Sets the drawing scale for
value the draft entities.
line_style_length font_name default Sets the length of elements
font_name value composing a font. You
must enter this value
whenever you want to
modify the length. Enter
the font name and the
desired value for the font
length in system units.

NOTES
Goal
To use the 2-D drafting tools to create draft geometry.
Method
In the first exercise, you update a drawing after importing it from another
system. You also use the 2-D drafting functionality to accommodate a
change in the design intent of the model.
EXERCISE 1: Updating a 2-D Drawing

Task 1. Import an IGES file into Pro/ENGINEER to create a new
drawing called FIXTURE, as shown in the following figure.
1. Create an empty C size drawing.
2. Enter [fixture] as the name.
3. Click OK > Empty.
4. Choose C from the STANDARD SIZE drop down list, followed by

OK .
5. Click Insert > Data from File .
6. Select MASTER.IGS and click Open . The drawing should look like
NOTES
Figure 1: Imported Drawing
7. Zoom in on the view labeled Top View.
Task 2. Create the geometry to represent a cut on Top View.
1. Click Tools > Offset > Ent Chain .
2. Select the horizontal line above the 2.375 dimension and click
Done Sel .
3. Enter [-0.4] as the offset value. Select the outside left edge, click
Done Sel , and type [-0.8] as the offset value.
4. Select the outside right edge, click Done Sel , and type [-0.8] as
the offset value.
Task 3. Extend the new vertical entities so that they meet the bottom
edge of the view and trim the corners together.
1. Click Trim > Bound , then select the bottom edge of the view as
the bounding entity. Select the two new vertical lines to trim to this
boundary.
2. Click Corner and select the portion of the new line that you want
to retain.

NOTES
3. Repeat this procedure until you have created the view geometry, as
Figure 2: New Top View
4. Click Insert > Dimension > New Reference to create the 1.40
dimension. Select the new horizontal entity and place the
dimension using the middle mouse button.
Task 4. Using the geometry of the top view, create the new geometry
for the front view on the drawing.
1. Refit the screen to display the entire drawing, then zoom in to view
the front view and the top view.
2. Click Tools > Offset > Ent Chain .
3. Select the line in the front view, as shown in the following figure.
Click Done Sel and type [0.25] as the offset value.
NOTES
Offset this line
Figure 3: Front View Geometry
4. Click Trim > Bound .
5. Select the horizontal line you just created as the boundary to

extend the two vertical lines in the top view.
Task 5. Break the long vertical entities into pieces and then delete the
portions that you do not want.
1. Click Intersect . Select the left vertical line and the bottom edge in
the top view.
2. Repeat this procedure for the right vertical line. Intersect both
vertical lines again using the edge that you offset in the front view.
3. Click the [Select]. Select the unwanted portions of the vertical

lines.
2-D D raf ting Pag e 1 1-11

NOTES
4. Press <DEL> to delete.
5. [Optional] Create the geometry for the cut in the isometric view
using the same techniques that you used earlier, as shown in the
following figure.
Offset these
edges by –0.55
Offset this edge

by –0.2
Figure 4: Isometric View
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can use the 2-D drafting tools to create draft geometry.
• You can use draft geometry to modify an imported drawing.
2-D D raf ting Pag e 1 1-13

Module
12
Symbols
In this module, you learn how to create drawing symbols.
Objectives
• Use variable text in drawing symbols.

• Create families of symbols.
• Set up symbol libraries and place previously defined symbols on a
drawing.
Page 12-1
NOTES
CREATING DRAWING SYMBOLS

A drawing symbol is a collection of draft geometry and text. When you
use a symbol in a drawing, it becomes a single entity or instance. To place
it in a drawing, you can either retrieve it from a symbol library or create
your own user-defined symbol. If the symbols that you need are
commonly used throughout industry, you may be able to purchase a
symbol library such as a welding symbol library.
Creating Symbol Geometry

To place a symbol on a drawing, you must first create it and save it as a
Pro/ENGINEER symbol with a .SYM extension in a specified directory.
Creating a Symbol Shape by Drafting

Pro/ENGINEER allows you to define an original drawing symbol by
drafting the geometry. With this technique, you can define the shape of the
symbol and also add notes or cross-sections to it.
Copying 2-D Draft Geometry from an Existing Drawing

Pro/ENGINEER allows you to copy draft entities from drawing to create
symbol geometry.
Copying an Existing Symbol

You can copy the existing symbol and change it to create a new symbol.
Importing a Symbol
You can use an IGES, DXF, SET, TIFF, and CGM symbol that was
created in another CAD package by importing it into Pro/ENGINEER.
Once you have imported it into the system, you can change it by adding or
removing geometry or notes.
Adding Text to a Symbol

You can place text on a symbol as a free note. The system places
invariable text on a symbol by default, which means that you cannot
NOTES
change the text and it remains the same every time you use the symbol. To
create text that varies depending on the placement of the symbol, you can
add variable text to the symbol.
Using Variable Text
Figure 1: Creating Variable Text
If the text in your symbol must differ depending upon where you use the
symbol in your drawing, you can create the text as variable. To create
variable text, enclose the text within two back slashes, for example, \note\.
This allows you to change the value of the text when you place the symbol
on a drawing. You can specify the type of text to show in the note as text,
integer, or floating point.
You can also show parameter values in the variable symbol text so that the
symbol text updates when the parameter changes. To display the
dimension value in the symbol, enter [&dim] as the only preset value for
the variable text. When you place the symbol on a drawing and select a
dimension, the system shows its value in the symbol. You can use this
technique with any user-defined parameters, as well as Pro/REPORT
parameters.
Grouping Symbol Geometry

When you need to create several symbols that have similar geometry, you
can create a family of symbols, referred to as a group. A single generic
symbol contains all entities pertaining to a particular symbol family. You
can arrange geometry and text from the generic symbol into groups and
subgroups.
Sym b o ls Pag e 1 2- 3
NOTES
Figure 2: Symbol Groups
Exclusive
For this example, you would create a generic symbol containing a
horizontal line and two triangles. From that generic symbol, you would
then create two groups—Group A and Group B—defining them as
exclusive. By doing so, you cannot combine Group A and Group B to
create an instance; you can only use them separately. With these groups,
you can create two instances of the symbol: Instance 1 contains Group A
and the horizontal line, whereas Instance 2 contains Group B and the
horizontal line. The horizontal line appears in both instances because you
did not include it in a group. Any entity not in a group appears in all
instances.
Independent
For the second portion of the example, you would create the same groups,
but define them as independent. By doing so, you can use them separately
or together to create an instance. This creates three instances in this
family.
Controlling Symbols
You can control the display of symbols in your drawings by defining their
placement and setting their height.
NOTES
Symbol Placement
When you originally create a symbol, you must define the allowed
placement types to limit the ways in which other users can place the
symbol. If you assign the placement type as free, for example, other users
could only place the symbol on the drawing as free without using a leader.
You should set the placement type according to the standard for the
symbol you are creating. You should allow other users some flexibility,
but prevent them from placing it incorrectly.
Symbol Height
You can control the size of a symbol when you create it by setting the
height to a fixed size or as variable. If the symbol height is fixed, the size
of the symbol always remains the same. To specify the height as variable,
you can use three different methods:
• Base it on the units of the drawing – To use this method, you must
change the drawing setup file.
• Base it on the units of the model – The system automatically
adjusts the symbol’s size to stay proportional to the model if you
change the view scale.
• Relate it to the height of specific text in the symbol – The system
changes the size of the symbol if you change the height of the
specified text.
Storing Symbols
To specify the directory in which Pro/ENGINEER should store each
symbol, set the configuration file option pro_symbol_dir. If you do
not specify a path in the configuration file, the system stores symbols in
the working directory.
You can enter an offset path that branches off of pro_symbol_dir. For
example, for a UNIX-based system, if you have specified
pro_symbol_dir as /usr/proe/symbols, then:
• If you press <ENTER>, the system places the symbol in

/usr/proe/symbols.
• If you enter [down_one_dir], it stores the symbol in
/usr/proe/symbols/down_one_dir. This “down_one_dir” should
be an existing subdirectory.
• You cannot go up the directory tree by entering [..].
NOTES
• If you want to store the symbol in a directory that you cannot access as
an offset of the current pro_symbol_dir, change
pro_symbol_dir before you begin.
• You do not have to store the symbol to use it in a drawing. However, if
you do not write it to disk, the system only stores it locally in the
drawing and does not make it available for use in other drawings or by
other users.
Figure 3: Symbol Attributes
PLACING SYMBOLS ON A DRAWING

When placing symbols on a drawing, Pro/ENGINEER allows you to
retrieve a system symbol or a user symbol. You can obtain system
symbols by purchasing a library of welding symbols, electronic symbols,
etc. Once you retrieve the appropriate symbol, you must specify the
following using the SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box:
• Placement information.
• Relationship between the symbol being placed and the original
symbol.
• Values for the variable text in the symbol.
• Groups that the system should include in this instance.
Create a Symbol Palette

To speed up symbol creation and placement, you can access a
Pro/ENGINEER a drawing containing custom symbol definitions as a
NOTES
palette during symbol instance creation. You can access the palette from
the SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box. Configuration file option
“symbol_instance_palette_file” is used to specify the path
and name of the palette file.
Defining the Relationship between the Symbol

Instance and Original Symbol
When you place a symbol on a drawing, you should specify if you want
the system to change the symbol instance when the original symbol
changes. Using this method, you can avoid having to manually update
existing drawings every time the symbol definition changes (for example,
because of a new standard).
If you do not need to reflect those changes in the symbol instance, you can
simply place it independently of the original symbol. Pro/ENGINEER
then creates a copy of the instance locally in the drawing.
Figure 4: Symbol Placement
Changing Variable Text Values in a Symbol

Instance
When you place a symbol with variable text on a drawing, you can change
the content of the note included in the symbol instance. To modify the
text, you can select any values that you specified when you defined the
symbol, but the system limits you to one value for each instance of
variable text.
NOTES
Figure 5: Variable Text
Selecting Groups to Include in the Instance

After you create a family of symbols by defining a group, you can use the
SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box to place one of the instances of this
family on a drawing.
Figure 6: Symbols Group
If the groups are independent, you can select any number of groups to
build the instance; if the groups are exclusive, you can only select one
group to include in the instance. As you select these groups to include, you
can preview the symbol. When the symbol is correct, you can then place it
on the drawing.
NOTES
REDEFINING EXISTING SYMBOLS

Once you have placed a symbol on a drawing, you can redefine it at any
time using the same method that you used to create it originally. You can
change variable text values, grouping information, allowed placement
types, and text or lines styles, as well as add or remove geometry or notes.
Note:
Redefining a symbol affects the display of all subsequent
instances and all symbol instances that you have added to the
drawing using the Use Definition option.
Updating a Redefined Symbol in a Drawing

When you redefine a symbol definition and write it to the disk, it will be
save with a different version number. the system tracks changes depending
on whether the drawing containing the symbol instance currently active.
• If the drawing containing the symbol instance is currently active, when

you redefine the symbol definition, the system will update the existing
symbol instances (placed with Use Definition option) automatically in
the active drawing.
• If the drawing containing the symbol instance is not in session at the
time of symbol re-definition, when you later place the redefined
symbol, the system will prompt you whether you want to update the
existing symbol instances. If you choose to update, the system update
all instances in the drawing using the latest version. Otherwise all
instances will use a old previous version.
USING WELDING SYMBOLS

With a Pro/DETAIL license, you can access the Welding Symbols
Library, which contains a collection of generic system symbols according
to ANSI and ISO standards. Using this library, you can create a variety of
welding, brazing, and examination symbols in a drawing.
Welding symbols are located in the System Symbols of the OPEN dialog
box.
NOTES
USING SURFACE FINISH SYMBOLS

If you have a Pro/DETAIL license, you can access a set of standard
surface finish symbols in the directory
LOADDIRECTORY/SYMBOLS/SURFFINS. The system does not place
surface finish symbols as it would place other symbols in a drawing.
Before you can place a surface finish, you must specify it as a generic,
machined, or unmachined symbol, and provide a roughness height value,
if needed.
Surface finish symbols are located in the System Symbols of the OPEN
dialog box.
control drawing symbols.
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Drawing Symbols

pro_surface_finish_dir directory path Sets the default directory
to which the system saves
surface finish symbols and
later retrieves them.
pro_symbol_dir directory path Sets the default directory
from which the system
saves symbols and later
retrieves them.
sym_leader_orient_move_ no Automatically regroups a
text yes symbol after moving text.
NOTES

Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Drawing Symbols
node_radius default Controls the display of
value nodes in symbols.
sym_flip_rotated_text no Flips any text in a Rotate
yes Text symbol that is upside
down. If set to “yes,” and
the symbol orientation is
+/-90°, the system flips the
text, rotating along with
the symbol.
Sym b o ls Pag e 1 2-11

NOTES
Goal
To create and place symbols on a drawing.
Method
In the first exercise, you create a symbol using variable text and then
place it on a drawing.
In the second exercise, you create a group of symbols and place the
different variations of the symbol on a drawing.
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Symbol with Variable Text

Task 1. Draft the geometry of a symbol.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_SYMBOLS.DRW. If you have finished

the plunger body drawing earlier, you can work on
PLUNGER_BODY.DRW.
2. Create the symbol shown in the following figure. Click Format >
Symbol Gallery > Define and type [delta] as the name of the
symbol.
3. Increase the size of the sub-window by dragging the corner of the

window to a new location.
Figure 7: Delta Symbol
NOTES
4. Set up the draft grid by turning it on, changing the grid size. From
the pull-down menu in the sub-window, click View Draft Grid >
Show Grid . Click Grid Params > X&Y Spacing , then type [0.4].
Click Done/Return .
5. Turn on the grid snap. Click Utility > Environment . Select the
Snap to Grid check box in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. Click
OK to close the ENVIRONMENT dialog box.
6. Zoom in to approximately 4 grid squares.
7. Using the 2-D drafting functionality, sketch a triangle.
8. Click Sketch > Line . Sketch the three sides of the triangle using
two grid squares for the horizontal length and the height of the
triangle. If you are not using a chain, select a starting and ending
point for each line.
9. Round off the corners of the triangle with three fillet arcs.
10. Click Sketch > Fillet , then select the two lines that compose the
corner of the triangle.
11. Type [0.1] as the radius of the arc. Repeat this procedure for each
corner.
12. Turn off the grid and grid snap. Clear the Snap to Grid check box
in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box.
Task 2. Add a note to the symbol with variable text.
1. Create a note in the center of the triangle. From the pull-down

menu in the sub-window, click insert > Note. Click No Leader >
Enter > Horizontal > Standard > Center > Make Note . Locate
the note in the center of the triangle.
2. Create the note so that so that you can easily change the text when
you place it. Type [\num\] as the note text and press <ENTER>
twice to finish.
3. Click Done/Return . Reposition the note if necessary.
Task 3. Define the attributes of the symbol. Allow any user to place the
symbol using free placement, a left leader, or a right leader.
1. Click Attributes to define the attributes of the symbol.

NOTES
2. Using the SYMBOL DEFINITION ATTRIBUTES dialog box, define

the attributes so that the person that places the symbol can use a
free placement, a leader attached to the left side, or a leader
attached to the right side.
3. Select FREE and specify the symbol origin by selecting the arc at
the top of the triangle.
4. Select LEFT LEADER and select the arc on the left side of the
triangle.
5. Select RIGHT LEADER and select the arc on the right side of the
triangle.
Task 4. Define the height of the symbol based on the text height.
Specify the preset values of the variable text as the numbers one through
five.
1. Select Variable–Text Related and select the variable note as the

reference text.
2. Specify the preset values of the variable text as one through five.
3. Click the Var Text tab.
4. Select NUM on the left side of the dialog box and enter 1 through 5
in five lines in the Preset Values for: area.
5. Select Integer so that the system only uses integers in this symbol.
Click OK to finish defining the symbol attributes.
6. Save the symbol for use in future drawings. Click Done from the
SYMBOL EDIT menu. Click Write and press <ENTER> to accept
the default directory. Click Done .
Task 5. Place the delta symbol on the plunger drawing with a leader.
1. Click Insert > Symbol Instance . Select DELTA from the

SYMBOL DEFINITION drop-down list.
2. Attach the symbol to the lower left view with a leader, as shown in
the following figure. Select With Leaders from the TYPE drop-
down list.
3. Accept the defaults On Entity > Arrow Head and select the right
side edge of the lower left view.
NOTES
4. Click Done Sel > Done to place the symbol with one leader.
Locate the symbol to the right of the view.
Figure 8: Symbol Location
5. Change the variable text to display the number 3 on the symbol.

Click the Var Text tab, then select 3 from the NUM drop-down list.
6. Click OK to finish placing the symbol.
Note:
After you place the symbol, you can use select the
symbol to move it. In addition, you can use pop-up menu,
to access Mod Attach to change its position, and Redefine
Inst to reopen the SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box.
Task 6. Place a surface finish symbol on the plunger body drawing.

Machine the symbol with a roughness height of 32.
1. Click Insert > Surf Finish > Retrieve > Machined >Open>
Standard1.sym > Open to create a surface finish symbol on the
plunger body drawing.
2. Attach the symbol to a surface with a leader, as shown in the

following figure. Click Leader and select the surface.
3. Click Done Sel > Done . Select a position for the symbol and type
[32] as the roughness height. Click Done > Done/Return .
4. Select the symbol and use the appropriate drag handle to reposition
the symbol as shown in the following figure.

NOTES
Figure 9: Surface Finish Symbol
Task 7. Create a new symbol to use as a BOM balloon. Copy the

symbol created earlier and add two notes to use for the item number and
the quantity. Create the values as variable text notes so that they will
change when you use them in a drawing.
1. Create a new drawing symbol called DELTA_BOM. Click Format

> Symbol Gallery > Define and enter [DELTA_BOM] as the name
of the symbol.
2. Copy the delta symbol that you created earlier in the exercise.
Click Copy Symbol , select DELTA.SYM and click Open .
3. Locate the symbol in the middle of the new window and click
Done from the ADJUST INST menu. Press <CTRL> and the
mouse buttons to zoom in on the symbol.
4. Change the variable text in the symbol to use the item number in a
BOM. Select the note; right click and choose Properties .
5. In the text tab, change \num\ to \item_num\. Enter [x

\comp_qty\] in another text field. Click OK to close the dialog
box.
NOTES
Task 8. Define the attributes of the symbol to use whenever you place
this custom balloon on a drawing.
1. Define the attributes of the symbol so that it can be placed without

a leader, or with a left leader or with a right leader. Click
Attributes .
2. Select FREE and select the arc at the top of the triangle.
3. Select LEFT LEADER and select the arc on the left side of the
triangle.
4. Select RIGHT LEADER and select the arc on the right side of the
triangle.
5. Define the height of the symbol based on the height of the variable
text in the symbol. Select VARIABLE –TEXT RELATED and select
the variable note as the reference text.
6. Define the default values for the variable text as the index number
and quantity for the BOM. Click the Var Text tab.
7. Select ITEM_NUM on the left side of the dialog box and type
[index] in lower case in the Preset Values for: area.
8. Select COMP_QTY on the left side of the dialog box and type
[qty] in lower case in the Preset Values for: area.
9. Select the Text check box and click OK and Done .
10. Save the symbol for use in future drawings.

NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Symbol Groups

Task 1. Create a new drawing and draft the geometry of the symbol by
copying the draft geometry from the drawing. The geometry should
consist of a circle, a square, and some arrows.
1. Create a new A-size, landscape drawing named GROUPS. Clear the

Use default template check box and set Default Model to none .
2. Turn on the display of the draft grid and change the to the grid
size. Click View > Draft Grid > Show Grid > Grid Parameter >
X&Y Spacing . Spacing , then enter [0.4]. Click Done/Return .
3. Zoom in so that you can see approximately 20 grid squares across

the screen.
4. Turn on the grid snap. Click Utility > Environment . Select the
Snap to Grid check box in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box. Click
OK to close the ENVIRONMENT dialog box.
Task 2. Create the sketch as shown in the following figure, using the 2-
D drafting functionality.
1. Click Sketch > Line . Sketch the geometry of the square that is 10
grid squares by 10 grid squares.
Figure 10: Generic Symbol
2. Create a circle centered inside the square. Click Sketch > Circle .
Make sure the circumference of the circle is tangent to the square.
3. Create the arrows to the left and the right of the square. Click
Sketch > Line, then sketch the geometry of each arrow.
NOTES
4. Close the SNAPPING REFERENCE dialog box.
5. Create a note with variable text centered in the circle. Click Insert
> Note .
6. Click No Leader > Enter > Horizontal> Standard > Center>

Make Note . Locate the note in the center of the circle.
7. Enter [\no\] as the note text and press <ENTER> twice to finish.
Click Done/Return from the NOTES TYPE menu.
8. Change the text height to 0.25. Select the note and access Mod
Text Style option from the pop-up menu. Clear the Default
checkbox for the height and enter [0.25]. Click OK to close the
dialog box.
9. Create a symbol called GEN_SYM. Click Format > Symbol

Gallery > Define and type [GEN_SYM] as the name.
10. Copy the geometry from the drawing to create the symbol. Click
Copy Drawing > Pick Many , select all the entities on the drawing
and click Done Sel . Pro/ENGINEER copies the entities into the
sub-window.
Task 3. Create two symbol groups: one with the square and one with the
circle. Each group will have the option for the right or left arrows.
1. Create a group called square and select all of the entities except for
the circle.
2. Click Groups > Create and type [SQUARE] as the name.
3. Click Pick Many and drag a select box surrounding the entire
symbol. Click Unsel Item and select the circle. Click Done Sel to
finish.
4. Create a group called circle and select all of the entities except for
the square.
5. Click Create and type [CIRCLE] as the name.
6. Click Pick Many and draw a pick box surrounding the entire
symbol.
7. Click Unsel Item and select one of the lines that compose the
square. Click Unsel Item again and select another line of the
square.

NOTES
8. Continue with this process until you have unselected the entire
square. Click Done Sel to finish.
9. Define the group attributes to be exclusive at this level so that

when you use the symbol, you can only place one of the instances
(square or circle) at one time. Click Group Attr > Exclusive .
Task 4. Create sub-groups.
1. Click Change Level > Square > This Level to change to the
square level so you can create some variations of the square
symbol.
2. Create two variations within the square group: one with the left
arrow and the other with the right arrow. Click Create and type
[LEFT_ARROW] as the name.
3. Select the square box, the note, and the arrow on the left side of the
symbol, then click Done Sel .
4. Click Create and type [RIGHT_ARROW] as the name. Select the

square box, the note, and the arrow on the right side of the symbol,
then click Done Sel .
5. Define the attributes at the square level as exclusive so that you

can display the square on the screen as a symbol with a left arrow
or a right arrow, but not both. Click Group Attr > Exclusive .
6. Click Change Level > Up > Circle > This Level to change to the
circle level so that you can create some variations of the circle
symbol.
7. Create two variations within the circle group: one with the left
arrow and the other with the right arrow. Click Create and type
[LEFT_ARROW] as the name.
8. Select the circle, the note, and the arrow on the left side of the
symbol, then click Done Sel .
9. Click Create and type [RIGHT_ARROW] as the name. Select the

circle, the note, and the arrow on the right side of the symbol, then
click Done Sel .
10. Define the attributes at the circle level as independent so that you
can display the circle on the screen as a symbol with a left arrow, a
right arrow, or both. Click Group Attr > Independent .
NOTES
11. Click Done/Return from the SYM GROUPS menu.
Task 5. Define the attributes for this symbol using a free placement.
1. Click Attributes and select Free . Select the center of the circle as
the origin.
2. Click the Var Text tab and enter [1] as the value for the variable
text. Select Integer and click OK to finish defining the attributes.
Click Done .
3. Save the symbol to disk. Click Write and press <ENTER> to accept
the default directory. Click Done .
4. Close the current window.
Task 6. Create a new drawing and place the different variations of the
symbol on the drawing.
1. Create a new A-size drawing called SYMBOLS in a landscape

orientation. Do not use a drawing template and set Default Model
to none .
2. Place the square variations of the symbol on the drawing. Click

Insert > Symbol Instance .
3. Click Retrieve…, select GEN_SYM and click Open .
4. Select Free Note from the TYPE drop-down list, click Place Inst
if necessary and select a position on the drawing for the symbol.
5. Click the Grouping tab and select the plus sign beside square.
6. Select SQUARE > LEFT_ARROW.
7. Click New Inst to finish placing the instance and start a new one.
8. Click the Placement tab and select Free Note from the TYPE
drop-down list, click Place Inst if necessary.
9. Select below the first symbol. Click the Grouping tab and select
SQUARE > RIGHT_ARROW.

NOTES
Note:
When you select RIGHT_ARROW, the system automatically
unselects LEFT_ARROW because the attributes for the square
level are set to exclusive.
11. Place the circle variations of the symbol on the drawing. Click the
Placement tab and select Free Note from the TYPE drop-down
list, click Place Inst if necessary, then select to the right of the
first symbol.
12. Click the Grouping tab and click the plus sign next to circle.
Select CIRCLE > LEFT_ARROW. When you select CIRCLE, the
system automatically unselects SQUARE because the attributes for
the top level are set to exclusive.
14. Click the Placement tab and select FREE NOTE from the TYPE
drop-down list, click Place Inst if necessary, then select a position
similar to the one shown in the following figure.
15. Click the Grouping tab and select Circle > RIGHT_ARROW.
Note:
When you select RIGHT_ARROW, the system does not
automatically unselect LEFT_ARROW because the attributes
for the circle level are set to independent.
17. Click the Placement tab and select Free Note from the TYPE
drop-down list, click Place Inst if necessary, then select a position
similar to the one shown in the following figure.
18. Click the Grouping tab and select CIRCLE > RIGHT_ARROW
>LEFT_ARROW. Click OK to finish.
NOTES
Figure 11: Symbol Instances
Task 7. Use the saved SYMBOLS.DRW to create a custom symbol

definition palette.
1. Click Utilities > Options to access the configuration file. Add an

option “symbol_instance_palette_file”, enter the full path and the
file name of the drawing saved in the last task.
2. Apply and close the OPTIONS dialog box.
3. Create a new A-size drawing called SYMBOLS_PALETTE in a

landscape orientation. Do not use a drawing template and set
Default Model to none.
4. Place the symbol using the symbol palette. Click Insert > Symbol
Instance .
5. Click Pick in Palette . The symbol instance palette file is displayed

in a sub-window.
6. Select a symbol from the palette sub-window and place it in the

main window.
7. Try moving the symbols in the palette sub-window. Close the sub-
window, the symbol instance window. Erase the drawing.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create a symbol with variable text.

• You can create a group of symbol instances.
Module
13
Using Layers to Control Drawing Display
In this module, you learn how to create and use layers in the
drawing mode.
Objectives
• Set up default layers in drawing mode.

• Control the display of the layer in the drawing.
Page 13-1
NOTES
LAYERS IN DRAWING MODE

A layer is a placeholder of Pro/ENGINEER items, such as features,
components and draft entities. You can use layers to group items together
so that you can perform collective operations to them.
In Drawing mode, layers are typically used to blank model construction

geometry, such as surfaces, curves, planes, points or axis. It is a very
effective way to clean up drawing and speed up display. They are also
useful for manipulating draft geometry when working with legacy data, as
well as printing.
Setting up Default Layers in Drawing

When you create a drawing, you may find there are layers that already
exist in the drawing. They could come from the following sources:
• Default layers specified in the configuration files.

• Layers from the 3-D model.
• Layers in the drawing template.
The administrator should use these methods to set the commonly used
layers as default layers.
3-D Model Default Layers and Drawing Default Layers

Using default layers, you can automate the drawing layer creation process.
Specifically, it can automate the following steps:
• Create a layer.
• Associate items to a layer.
For the second step to work, you need to setup the appropriate default
layer in the appropriate mode. In other words, create default layers for 3-D
model items in the 3-D mode and create default layers for drawing items
in the drawing mode.
For example, using one of the preceding three methods, you can setup two
default layers in a drawing. One layer is called “DTM_PLANE” with the
default layer type as “DATUM_PLANE”. The other layer is called
“DRAFT_DTM” with the default layer type as “DRAFT_DTM”. After the
NOTES
default layers are created, you created a datum plane in the referenced 3-D
model, and a draft datum plane in the drawing. The draft datum plane will
be associated to the DRAFT_DTM default layer automatically. The datum
plane created in the 3-D model will not automatically be associated to the
drawing default layer DTM_PLANE. However, it will be associated to the
default layer in the 3-D model automatically. So, it is a good practice to
create the datum plane default layer in 3-D model and create the draft
datum default layer in the drawing mode, using the templates.
The good practice is to create the default layers that contain 3D model
entities in the part and assembly templates and create the default layers
that contain drawing entities in the drawing templates.
Layers From the 3-D Model

Layers, which reside in the 3-D models, are automatically available in the
drawing. You do not need to recreate these layers in the drawing mode.
The layer display status in drawing and the 3-D model can be associative
and non-associative. Using the LAYERS dialog box or detail setup file, the
associativity can be easily turned on and off.
Layers from the Drawing Template

Layers, which reside in the drawing template, are automatically available
in the drawing. The drawing template is another effective way to
standardize the default layers.
Set Up Default Layers Using Configuration File Options

You can use the configuration file option def_layer to create default
layers. The value of this option should be layer_type layer_name,
where layer_type is the type of item that you want the system to
associate to the layer, and layer_name is the name of the layer.
Once this option is applied, the system will automatically add default
layers to the newly created models and associate entities corresponds to
the layer_type to the default layers.
The following table lists the available layer_type options.
Usi n g L a y e rs t o Co n t ro l D ra w i n g Di s p l a y Pag e 1 3- 3
NOTES
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Default Layer

Value Description Value Description
layer_detail_ item draft items layer_driven_dim driven dimensions
layer_assem_ assembly members layer_draft_dim draft dimensions
member
layer_feature all features layer_refdim all reference
dimensions
layer_geom_feat features with layer_part_refdim part reference
geometry dimensions
layer_nogeom_feat features without layer_draft_refdim draft reference
geometry dimensions
layer_cosm_sketch cosmetic sketches layer_note drawing notes
layer_axis features with axes layer_gtol geometric
tolerances
layer_quilts quilts layer_symbol symbols
layer_surface surface features layer_sfin surface finish
symbols
layer_datum datum planes layer_draft_entity all draft entities
layer_point datum points layer_draft_constr draft construction
entities
layer_curve datum curves layer_draft_geom draft geometry
entities
layer_csys datum coordinate layer_draft_hidden draft hidden entities
systems
layer_curve_ent curve entities layer_draft_grp draft groups
layer_dim all dimensions layer_draft_datum draft datums
layer_parameter_ parameter layer_dwg_table drawing tables
dim dimension
11 default layers of where “featuretype” layer_snap_line snap lines
the form: is any of the
layer_featuretype_ following: hole,
round, chamfer,
feat slot, cut, protrusion,
rib, draft, shell,
corn_chamf,
assy_cut
NOTES
Creating a Layer Manually in a Drawing

If the desired layers have not been setup as default layers, you can create
them manually.
Figure 1: LAYERS Dialog Box
Although layers can contain different entities, you always create them by
following these three steps:
• Create the layer.

• Specify the default layer type.
• Associate items to the layer.
The procedure of creating layers, specifying layer properties, and
associating items to layers in drawing is the same as in part mode.
NOTES
Creating the Layer
Using the [Create new layer ] in the layers dialog box, you can create
a new layer. When layers are created you must enter a layer name. It is
recommended that you refer to your company layering standards to ensure
the name you choose follows these guidelines. Also, you should verify
that the layer you are intending to create does not already exist in the
model.
Specify the Default Layer Type

It is a good practice to specify the default layer type when you create a
layer. Again, if you are creating a layer in the drawing mode, you should
specify drawing items as default layer type. From this point on, the
drawing items of the default type will be associated to the layer
automatically.
Associating Items to Layers

Default layers are not retroactive. For existing items, you need to
manually associate them to the layer. When you associate items to a layer,
you can
• You select features by selecting on the model or in the MODEL TREE.

• You can quickly copy the items associated with one layer and
associate the same items to a new layer using the copy/paste options.
• Likewise, items can be moved from one layer to another using the
cut/paste options.
Specifying the Display of a Layer

You can control the display of the model layer in your drawing without
having to change the part or assembly in which that item was created
• Showing a layer displays all items on that layer on the screen.

• Blanking a layer removes from the screen any item on that layer that
does not affect mass properties.
• Isolatinga layer displays all items on that layer, but removes all non-
mass items on any other layer from the screen.
NOTES
Saving the Layer Display Status

By default, Pro/ENGINEER does not change the display status of a layer
when you save the object. The next time that you retrieve the object, the
display status reverts back to Show for all layers. To save the display
status with the object, you must select Save Status from the LAYERS
dialog box, then save the file.
Controlling Layer Display in the Drawing

You can control the layer display in a drawing in the following ways:
• Separating drawing and model layers – Forcing a drawing to ignore

the layer status in its model completely when determining if it should
display an item on a layer.
• Controlling drawing and model layers simultaneously – Setting
the display of model layers to follow the display of drawing layers
with the same name.
• Manipulating layer display status in individual views – Displaying
drawing layers independently for individual drawing views or making
the layer display dependent on the drawing.
Separating Drawing and Model Layers

You can set several drawing setup file options to allow you to control the
drawing layer display status independent of the model. This is useful when
working with GTOL Set Datums. These datums must be displayed on the
drawing, but may not need to be visible in the model. Likewise, the
construction datum planes need to be visible when manipulating the model
features, but do not need to be shown on the drawing.
Controlling Drawing and Model Layers Simultaneously

You can set the display of model layers to follow the display of drawing
layers with the same name. For example, if you blank the drawing layer
datums, the system also blanks all items on the datums layer of the model.
If the model is an assembly and you add another component with a layer
of the same name, it automatically sets the display of any items on the
model layer named datums to be the same as the drawing layer.
NOTES
Manipulating Layer Display Status in Individual Views

There may be cases where the layer display in one view must be different
from the other views. Drawing views do not have individual layers for
each view—they use the layers in the drawing. However, you can control
the display status of drawing layers separately for each view using the
LAYERS dialog box.
Independent View Display

The display of a detailed view is dependent on the parent view. You can
use the display mode settings to allow you to control these views
independent of the parent. This will also allow you to set the layer display
of a detailed view different from the parent.

control layer creation in Drawing mode.
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Layers

draw_layer_overrides_ yes Directs the drawing layer display setting
model no to determine the setting of the drawing
model layers with the same name. If set
to “yes,” the system implicitly includes
drawing model layers in drawing layers
with the same name for the purposes of
setting display. If set to “no,” it ignores
nondrawing layers when you set the
display status of layers in the drawing
model.
ignore_model_layer_ yes If set to “yes,” the system ignores
status no changes to all layer statuses in the model
of the drawing made in another mode.
NOTES
Goal
To use layers to control drawing display.
Method
In this exercise, you learn how to use layers to control your drawing
display and override the environment settings for datum planes, axes,
coordinate systems, and points.
EXERCISE 1: Using Layers to Control Drawing

Display
Task 1. Retrieve the plunger body part. Create a layer for the coordinate
system on the model.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_LAYERS.PRT. If you have finished the

plunger body drawing earlier, you can work on
PLUNGER_BODY.PRT.
2. Turn on the display of coordinate systems and turn off the display
of planes and axes; repaint the screen.
3. Create a new layer manually.
4. Click View > Layers .
5. Click [Create new layer ].
6. Enter [CSYS_PART_DEF] as the layer name.
7. Click CSYS to specify the Default Layer Types.
8. Click OK to finish.
9. With the layer CSYS_PART_DEF is selected, click

[Add item].
NOTES
10. Click Feature , and select the coordinate system

CSYS_PART_DEF from the model.
11. Click Done Sel > Done/Return> Done/Return .
12. Select CSYS_PART_DEF layer and click [Blank] and repaint

the screen. The coordinate system should no longer appear on the
screen.
Task 2. Although you have turned off the datum plane display, datum
plane A remains on the screen because the environment does not affect
datums set for GTOLs. Remove Datum A from display using a layer.
1. Creating a layer using the procedures in the previous task enter

[SET_DATUMS] as the name.
2. Associating datum A to that layer. Make sure the layer

SET_DATUMS is selected and add feature Datum A to this layer.
3. Blank the layer SET_DATUMS that you just created so that the
datum no longer appears on the screen.
4. Save the part and close the window
Task 3. Layers created in part mode are available in the drawing. Set up
a layer for datum planes and blank the layer.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_LAYERS.DRW. If you worked on

PLUNGER_BODY.PRT earlier, retrieve PLUNGER_BODY.DRW.
2. Use the toolbar icons to turn on the display of datum planes,

coordinate systems, and datum axes; then repaint the screen.
3. Turn off the datum axes using the icon. Notice that the axis
nametags are turned off but the axes are still displayed.
Note:
To remove the axis from a drawing, you need to use the
SHOW AND ERASE dialog box.
4. Click View > Layer to open the LAYERS dialog box. As you can
see the layers that you created in part mode are available in the
drawing. Show and blank those layers to see the changes.
NOTES
5. Create a layer for datum planes and associate the default datum
planes to this layer. Enter [DTMS_PART_DEF] as the layer name.
6. Make sure the layer name DTMS_PART_DEF is selected, and add

features DTM1, DTM2, and DTM3 from the model using the
MODEL TREE.
Tips & Techniques:

You can easily select datum planes using the MODEL TREE
tool; otherwise, you should always use the Query Sel option
to ensure that you select the appropriate datums.
7. Blank the layer DTMS_PART_DEF so that the datums no longer

display on the screen.
Note:
The system automatically repaints the screen after changing
the layer status in the drawing mode.
8. Determine which items are associated to the XSEC_DATUMS

layer. In the LAYERS dialog box, click Tree > Highlight . Select
XSEC_DATUMS. Another datum plane highlights on the screen.
9. Click Show > Layer Items . Click the plus sign to expand the
XSEC_DATUMS layer and plunger body part. The feature
associated to this layer is listed.
10. Blank the XSEC_DATUMS layer. The datum plane should no

longer appear on the screen.
Note:
This system created this layer by using the default layers
functionality. When you create datums to use in cross-sections,
the system automatically adds them to this layer.
Task 4. Create a layer for the datum axes on the drawing so that you can
control the nametags of the set axis and other datum axis seperately.
1. Create a new layer and enter [DATUM_AXES] as the layer name.
Usin g La ye rs to Cont ro l D raw ing Di spla y Pag e 1 3-11

NOTES
2. Associate all the datum axes, except the set datum D, to the layer
DATUM_AXES. When adding items, click Text > Sel By Menu >
Axis . Select all axes, then remove axis D from the list.
3. Click Select > Done Sel > Done/Return to finish.
4. Blank the layer DATUM_AXES so that the axis names no longer

appear on the screen.
5. Blank the datum coordinate system from all the views on the
drawing.
Task 5. Create a layer for the set axis D and blank that layer from some
of the views on the drawing, but not all views.
1. Create a layer for the set datum axis D. Enter [SET_AXES] as the
name.
2. Associate the datum axis D to the layer that you just created. Make
sure the layer SET AXES is selected and use add text to select axis
D.
3. Make the view in the lower right corner independent of the rest of
the drawing. Select DRAWING VIEW from the ACTIVE OBJECT
drop-down list; then select the lower right view.
4. Blank the SET_AXES layer. Notice that the nametag of the set
datum axis disappeared in the lower right view, but it is still
displayed in other views.
5. Repeat this procedure for the upper left view.
6. Turn off the snap lines in the ENVIRONMENT dialog box.
7. The drawing should look like the following picture. Save it. The
system displays a message to warn you that it is not going to save
the layer display status. You must explicitly save the layer display.
8. Click View >Layers > Save Status > Close .
9. Save and erase the file.
NOTES
Usin g La ye rs to Cont ro l D raw ing Di spla y Pag e 1 3-13

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create a layer in a drawing.

• You can specify the display of a layer.
Module
14
Resolving Regeneration Problems
In this module, you learn how to resolve regeneration failures in
drawings.
Objectives
• Identify failed model features.

• Determine why the model features failed.
• Resolve the regeneration failure.
Page 14-1
NOTES
RESOLVING FEATURE FAILURES

Features fail regeneration for a variety of reasons. In Drawing mode, this
usually occurs after you modify a dimension and regenerate the model.
Regeneration failures are actually beneficial for several reasons:
• Pro/ENGINEER automatically places you in an environment in which

you can diagnose and resolve the problem.
• After you resolve the problem, the resulting model is more flexible and
robust than it was originally.
• Since the model is more flexible, you can make future changes easily.
If Pro/ENGINEER detects a conflict between two features and is unable to
successfully regenerate, it retrieves the model into a sub-window and
places you in the RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT dialog box. Once you enter
this environment, you should identify the failed feature and determine the
cause of the failure before trying to resolve the problem.
Identifying the Failed Feature

When a feature fails regeneration, a diagnostics window appears on the
screen, which provides information about the failed feature such as the
feature type and number. Although this information is helpful, sometimes
it is not sufficient for determining which feature failed. In those cases, you
can investigate further.
Investigating
When a feature fails regeneration, the system displays on the screen only
the features that successfully regenerated. Therefore, it does not allow you
to view the failed feature or any feature that comes after it in the
regeneration cycle. After reviewing the information in the diagnostics
window, you can examine the failed feature or subsequent features by
working on a backup model.
The backup model shows all of the features in their pre-regenerated state.
You can use it to view the failed feature on the screen and modify or
restore dimensions of features that are not displayed on the current model.
If you have selected MAKE REGEN BACKUP in the DEFAULT ACTIONS
area of the ENVIRONMENT dialog box, Pro/ENGINEER saves a backup
copy of the model to the hard drive upon each regeneration. If the model
regenerates successfully, the system automatically removes the backup
NOTES
from the hard drive; but if you have a regeneration failure, the backup
model is available for you to use.
Note:
Using the regeneration backup results in longer regeneration
times because the system must save the model to the hard
drive in addition to regenerating it.
Using the Last Saved Version of the Model

If you have not selected MAKE REGEN BACKUP in the ENVIRONMENT
dialog box, you can still use a backup model. Pro/ENGINEER uses the
last saved version of the model as the backup. However, if you have not
saved recently, the features that you need may not exist in the last saved
version of your model. To avoid this problem, after the model fails
regeneration, undo the changes and save the model. After saving, perform
the task that caused the failure again. This technique provides you with a
useful backup model.
Determining the Cause of the Failure

Often, the most challenging task that you must perform in order to solve
regeneration problems is determining why the feature failed regeneration.
If the information that the system provides in the diagnostics window is
not sufficient, you can use the Investigate menu options to access other
tools that can assist you in determining the cause:
• Backup Model – With the backup model, you can view the part prior
to the regeneration failure. The current model does not display the
failed feature, so you cannot see the problem on the screen. The
backup model is probably the most useful tool available when
investigating the problem.
• List Changes – Lists the changes that have been made to the model to
direct you to the problem (for example, modified dimensions).
• Geom Check – Provides you with information or recommendations
that may be useful and highlights problematic geometry on the screen.
• Show Refs – Shows each missing or invalid references on the screen
that you used for a feature. You can use the backup model to highlight
their original location.
• Failed Geom – Displays the failed geometry on the screen to help you
visualize the problem.
Re s o l v i n g Reg e n e rat i o n P ro b l e m s Pag e 1 4- 3

NOTES
• Roll To– Simplifies the model by removing some of the features,

making it easier to concentrate on the failed geometry.
Fixing the Failure

The method that you should use to resolve the regeneration failure
depends upon the information that you obtained through your
investigation of the problem. If you determine that you should not have
made the original modification, you can use the Fix Model or Quick Fix
option to undo any changes and return your model to its original state.
Working on the Failed Feature Only

The Quick Fix option allows you to use a shortcut method to work on the
failed feature only. Using the QUICK FIX menu, you can redefine,
reroute, delete, or suppress the feature.
Working on Any Feature

The Fix Model option allows you to work on any feature on the current
model or the backup model. Using the FIX MODEL menu, you can
resolve the failed feature by doing any of the following:
• Change the references of a feature – If a feature failed regeneration

because of an invalid or missing reference, you can redefine or reroute
the feature to use a different reference.
• Redefine a feature – You can redefine a feature to change the type of
depth, the shape of the sketch, the attributes, and the direction of the
feature. When redefining the sketch, the system displays it the way it
appeared at the time of the feature failure to help you determine the
cause.
• Modify the dimensions of a feature – You can change dimensions to
resolve the problem. For example, changing the radius of a round may
result in a successful regeneration.
• Insert new features – You can reroute a feature by inserting a datum
plane before the failed feature and rerouting to the new plane.
• Change the part accuracy – If the system indicates that you should
increase the part accuracy (due to having very small features on a very
large model), you can change the part accuracy to resolve this
problem. The default accuracy of 0.0012 is acceptable for the majority
of cases. If you change the accuracy, you should make very minor
changes until you isolate the problem.
NOTES
Note:
Increasing the part accuracy results in longer regeneration
times and larger file sizes. You should only use this method if
you are unable to resolve the problem using any other method.
Tips on Resolving Regeneration Failures

When you encounter a regeneration failure, keep in mind that only one
feature can fail in Pro/ENGINEER at a time—not the entire part—and the
failing feature might not be the actual cause of your problem. You should,
do more to investigate the problem beyond simply examining the failed
feature.
To minimize regeneration failures, you should make changes to the model

as you design it. That is, as you add a feature to the design, make some
changes to observe how the feature behaves. In this way, you can detect
any problems before moving on with the remainder of the design work.
Prior to resolving the conflict, gather as much information as possible to
ensure that you fully understand the problem before changing your design.

NOTES
Goal
To understand why features fail and to resolve the failure.
Method
In this exercise, you change dimensions on the plunger body drawing to
cause features to fail, then investigate and resolve the problems.
EXERCISE 1: Resolving Failed Features

Task 1. Retrieve the plunger body drawing and change the value of the
radius on the tabs. After the model fails, investigate to determine which
feature caused the failure.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_RESOLVE.DRW. If you have finished

PLUNGER_BODY. DRW.
2. Make regeneration backup model. Click Environment , check

Make Regen Backup check box. Show the MODEL TREE if
necessary by clicking View > Model Tree .
3. Click Sheets > Next > Done/Return to switch to Sheet 2 of the

drawing and zoom in on DETAIL 1.
4. Modify the radius of the round on the tab to 0.15.
5. Click the [Select ] icon and select the 0.05 radius dimension.
6. Right-click and select PROPERTIES.
7. Enter [0.15] as the Nominal value.
9. Click Regenerate > Model to update the model to the new

dimension. Pro/ENGINEER will place you in resolve mode.
NOTES
10. Click Feature Info from the FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window.

An INFORMATION WINDOW appears, indicating that the round
with feature number 32 with ID number 961 failed. Read through
this information and close the INFORMATION WINDOW.
11. Add the Feature number as a new column in the MODEL TREE
window so that you can highlight the failed feature on the screen to
determine which feature actually failed.
12. Click View > Model Tree Setup > Column Display.
13. Select Feat #, click [Add column] and click OK .
14. Set the backup model as the active model and highlight the failed
feature on the screen, as shown in the following figure.
15. Click Investigate > Backup Modl > Confirm , then select the
round feature (feature number 32) from the MODEL TREE
window. The failed round feature is highlighted in red.
Figure 1: Failed Round Feature
Task 2. Once you have determined why the round failed regeneration,
change the model so that the feature regenerates successfully.
1. Choose Resolve Hints from the FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window

and read through the hints provided by Pro/ENGINEER.
2. In the RESOLVE HINTS window, the system advises you to use the
Investigate option to obtain information.
3. Click List Changes . An INFORMATION window indicates that

when you changed the dimension d75 from 0.05 to 0.15, it caused
the feature to fail.

NOTES
4. Click Current Model > Failed Geom . Some surfaces on the model
appear in cyan as shown in the following picture. The SHOW
ERRORS menu appears.
5. Click Item Info to display some information about the failed

geometry. Click Close to exit the INFORMATION window.
6. Click Backup Modl from the INVESTIGATE menu.
These surfaces
are highlighted.
Figure 2: Neighboring surfaces
7. Click Analysis > Measure .
8. Select Distance from the TYPE drop-down list and select the two
surfaces indicated in the preceding figure. The measured distance
should be 0.125. The new radius of the round (0.15) is too large to
fit in the space provided.
9. Move the tab to allow more room or change the radius to a value
that is less than 0.125. Close the MEASURE dialog box.
10. Click Fix Model > Backup Modl > Modify, then select the round
feature to modify the radius of the round.
11. Select the .15 radius dimension and enter [.10]. Click Current
Modl > Regenerate to update the model to the new dimensions.
Click Yes to close the RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT dialog box.
NOTES
Task 3. Modify the height of the flanges in DETAIL 2. After the feature
fails, use the tools available in the RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT dialog box
to determine which feature fails regeneration.
1. Change the 0.125 dimension for the flange in DETAIL 2. Enter

[0.09] as the new value. Regenerate the model.
2. Click Feature Info . An information window indicates that the

round with feature ID 772 failed. Read through this information
and close the window.
3. Set the backup model as the active model and highlight the failed
feature on the screen by selecting it from the MODEL TREE, as
4. Click Investigate > Backup Modl > Confirm .
5. Click the cut feature from the MODEL TREE window to highlight
it.
Figure 3: Failed Cut Feature
Task 4. Once you have determined why the cut failed regeneration,
change the model so that the feature regenerates successfully.
1. Click List Changes . An INFORMATION Window indicates that

the feature failure occurred because dimension d26 was modified
from 0.125 to 0.09.
2. Click Current Modl > Failed Geom to view the failed geometry.
The surface of the cut displays along with two points where the
geometry becomes invalid. Click Item Info to obtain some
information about the failed geometry.

NOTES
3. Close the information window.
4. Redefine the section of the feature. Click Quick Fix > Redefine .
Click Section > Define > Sketch .
5. Sketch a vertical line on the right side of the section. Click Sketch
> Done . Click Preview > OK to finish the feature.
6. Click Yes to close the RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT dialog box.
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can determine why a feature is failing regeneration.

• You can resolve the regeneration failure.
Re s o l v i n g Reg e n e rat i o n P ro b l e m s Pag e 1 4- 1 1

Module
15
Drawing Formats
In this module, you learn how to create and use drawing formats.
Objectives
• Create drawing formats by importing geometry.

• Create drawing formats with 2-D drafting tools.
• Use tables and parameters in formats.
Page 15-1
NOTES
CREATING A DRAWING FORMAT

Creating a drawing format is usually a one-time operation. When you
initially begin creating drawings in Pro/ENGINEER, you can create a
format for them using one of the following techniques:
• Import it from another system.

• Use 2-D drafting functionality.
• Use Sketcher mode.
Note:
To specify a particular format setup file to use for all new
formats, set the configuration file option
format_setup_file.
Using a Format in Conjunction with a Drawing Template

If you want to automate adding drawing format in conjunction with a
drawing template, you need to create a start drawing mapkey that will
create a drawing using a template and then initiate adding the drawing
format.
Importing a Format from Another System

If you have created a format in another CAD system, you can export the
format using an industry standard file format such as IGES or DXF, which
we refer to as an external format. You can then import this external format
into Pro/ENGINEER.
There are two ways of importing a format: create a format then insert the
data or import the data directly.
Creating a New Format in Pro/ENGINEER then Insert the

Data
You can create an empty Pro/ENGINEER format, specify a sheet size and
orientation that is appropriate for the format that you want to import. You
can then insert the external format.
NOTES
If the new format cannot accommodate the imported format, the system
asks you if you want to scale the imported format so that it fits it properly.
Importing the Format into Pro/ENGINEER Directly

You can import the external format directly by opening the external
format and specify the IMPORT NEW MODEL TYPE to be format.
Changing the Format

After you import the file into Pro/ENGINEER, it appears on the screen.
You can then make any changes that are necessary, such as deleting
entities, drafting new entities, adding a table, or adding text or parameters.
Bear in mind that you must use a Pro/ENGINEER table in order to

reference Pro/ENGINEER model and drawing parameters. Given this, you
may need to delete the existing title block from the imported data and re-
create it as a native Pro/ENGINEER table.
Creating a Format with 2-D Drafting

You can also create an original format in Pro/ENGINEER using the 2-D
drafting tools that are available in Format mode.
When drafting format geometry, the sheet outline is the border of the
drawing format, as shown in the following figure. Because it is the actual
border, it may not appear on pen plots unless you use a paper size that is
larger than the drawing size. The system plots everything within the sheet
outline border.
D ra w i n g F o rm a t s Pag e 1 5- 3
NOTES
Format sketch
Sheet outline
Figure 1: Format Location
Creating a Format in Sketcher Mode

You can also create a drawing format by creating the format geometry in
Sketcher mode, taking advantage of the parametric capabilities of
Sketcher. After you create the format using the saved section, format
become independent of the section file. You can then manipulate it using
various tools available in Format mode.
ADDING INFORMATION TO A FORMAT

After you create a format, you can add tables and notes to it, as well as
parametric information.
Including Parametric Information in a Format

Drawing Labels
By using drawing labels, you can incorporate parametric information into
your format. When you include parameters in a drawing format, the
system evaluates them when you add the format to the drawing. If you
include the date label, the system displays the date that you actually added
the format.
NOTES
To use the following drawing labels in a format, you should include an

ampersand (&) before the name of the parameter:
• &todays_date – Adds the date of the note’s creation. You can control
the form of the date using the configuration file option
TODAYS_DATE_NOTE_FORMAT.
• &model_name – Adds the name of the model used in the drawing.
• &dwg_name – Adds the name of the drawing.
• &scale – Adds the scale of the drawing.
• &type – Adds the model type (part or assembly).
• &format – Adds the format size.
• &linear_tol_0_0 through &linear_tol_0_000000 – Adds linear
dimension tolerance values for 1 to 6 decimal places.
• &angular_tol_0_0 through &angular_tol_0_000000 – Adds angular
dimension tolerance values for 1 to 6 decimal places.
• &current_sheet – Adds the current sheet number.
• &total_sheets – Adds the total number of sheets in the drawing.
• &dtm_name – Adds the name of a datum plane.
Including User Defined Parameters

In addition to the drawing labels listed above, you can also include your
own parameters. If you include parameters in a table on the format, the
system prompts you for their values when it adds the format to the
drawing. For example, you could add a table that includes parameters
specifying the person who created the drawing or checked it. If you do not
include these parameters in a table, the system does not prompt you for the
values.
Note:
You can store these parameters on the format as drawing
parameters if you set the configuration file option
make_parameters_from_fmt_tables to yes . If
you set the value of this option to no , the system prompts you
for the values whenever you add a second sheet or replace the
format.
NOTES

The following table lists the available configuration file options
controlling format creation.
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Formats

format_setup_file filename and path Determines the format
setup file to use for new
formats.
make_parameters_from_ yes When including
fmt_tables no parameters in a table on a
format, saves them as
drawing parameters.
NOTES
Goal
To create and use a drawing format that includes parametric
information.
Method
In this exercise, you create a multi-sheet drawing format that includes
parametric information. You also set up the format so that the system
requires you to provide specific information when you place it on a
drawing.
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Multi-Sheet Drawing

Format
Task 1. Create a new drawing format and import the geometry of an
existing format.
1. Click File > New > Format , type [C_MULTI_FORMAT] for the
name and click OK .
2. Define the format in a Landscape orientation with a C size and

click OK .
3. Click Insert > Data from File .
4. Select C_DET.IGS and click OK .
Task 2. Create a table to replace the right side portion of the title block.
Locate the lower right corner of the table above the existing title block.
1. Create a table. Click Ascending > Leftward > By Num Chars.
2. Define the column and row sizes so that they are approximately the
same as the existing blocks. The column and row sizes are listed in
NOTES
4 7 6 13 13
2
3
1
Figure 2: First Table Initial Rows and Columns
3. Create a second ascending, leftward table to the left of the first one
to replace the left side of the title block.
4. Locate the lower right corner of the table above the existing title
block and to the left of the first table. The column and row sizes
are listed in the following figure.
7 7 9
2
2
2
Figure 3: Second Table Initial Rows and Columns
Task 3. Change the two new tables so that they look similar to the title
block. Change the size of the columns and rows.
1. Before specifying the column to change, measure the existing title

block size. Click Analysis > Measure Draft Entities .
2. Accept the default Distance from the TYPE drop-down list in the
DRAFT MEASURE dialog box, then select the right and left borders
of the SHEET cell in the title block. The measured distance should
be 1.625. Close the dialog box.
3. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Change Size >Column > By Length .
4. Select the right column of the first table, use the middle button to
finish. Enter [1.625] as the width of the column.
NOTES
0.625 1 0.75 1.625 1.625
0.546875
1.01563
0.781250
0.312533
Figure 4: Measured Column and Row Size of the First Table
5. Repeat this procedure to measure the draft entities and resize the
column and row size of the first table. The measured results are
shown in the preceding figure for reference.
Task 4. Merge some of the cells in the table into one cell, as shown in
1. Click Modify Table > Merge > Rows & Cols , then select the
upper left and upper right cells in the table.
2. Select the left and right cells in the second column.
3. Continue merging the cells together until the table looks like the
title block.
Figure 5: First Table Merged Cells
Task 5. Change the row and column sizes for the second table.
1. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Change Size > Column > By Length .
2. Measure the right and left borders of one of the DATE cells in the
title block. The measured distance should be 1.12483.
NOTES
3. Select the right column of the table and type [1.12483] as the
width of the column.
4. Measure the right and left borders of the Drawn cell in the title
block. The measured distance should be 1.875.
5. Select the left column, the middle column, click the middle mouse
button and type [1.875/2] as the column width.
6. Change the size of the rows in the second table: row 1, 2 & 3 =
0.546875; row 4 = 1.01563.
7. Blank the column borders from the top row of the table. Click
Modify Table > Line Display > Blank , then select the two column
borders of the top row.
8. Combine the left and middle cells of the bottom three rows
together, as shown in the following figure. Click Merge >
Columns , then select the left and middle cells of the second row.
9. Select the left and middle cells of the third row then select the left
and middle cells of the bottom row.
10. Click Done/Return.
Figure 6: Second Table Merged Cells
Task 6. Delete the entities that compose the borders of the original title
block.
1. Click [Select] icon, press and hold the <Shift> key then select
all of the lines that compose the original title block.
2. Click Edit > Delete .
NOTES
Note:
You can also press <DEL> to delete entities once they are
selected.
3. Move the new table into the correct position for the title block.
Click [Select] icon and select the table.
4. Reposition the table in the new location and press the left mouse
button to place it. Repeat the procedure to locate the second table,
Note:
To precisely position the table in the new location, use the
Abs Coords option in the GET POINT menu.
Figure 7: Format with New Tables
D ra w i n g F o rm a t s Pag e 1 5-11
NOTES
Task 7. Add text to the tables that you just created. The text that you
include should be parametric so that it changes automatically based on the
drawing to which you add it.
1. Set the column justification by clicking Mod Rows/Cols > Justify

> Column > Center > Middle . Select each of the columns in the
table on the right.
2. Click Center > Bottom , then select each of the columns in the
table on the left.
3. Click Enter Text , then select the Part cell so that the part name
fills in automatically.
4. Type [&model_name] as the name. Press <ENTER> to finish.
5. Enter the following text in the cooresponding cells:

! Fscm No. = &fscm_num
! Drawing No. = &drw_num
! Scale = &scale
! Sheet = &current_sheet/&total_sheets
! .XXX Tolerances = &linear_tol_0_000
! .XX Tolerances = &linear_tol_0_00
! Angle Tolerances = &angular_tol_0_0
! Drawn = &drawn_by
! Drawn Date = &drawn_by_date
! Checked = &checked_by
! Ckecked Date = &checked_by_date
! Approved = &approved_by
! Approved Date = &approved_by_date
NOTES
Task 8. Change the text height of some of the parametric information.
1. Click [Select] icon, select &MODEL_NAME. Press and hold the

right mouse button to bring up the pop-up menu and select Mod
Text Style .
2. Type [0.3] as the height and close the dialog box.
3. Repeat the procedures to change the height of the &FSCM_NUM

and &DRW_NUM to 0.25.
Task 9. Copy the table on the right of the sheet so that you can use it on
Sheet 2.
1. Click Edit > Copy and select the right table.
2. Click Pick Many and drag the selection box around the first table
and the underlying text, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 8: Copying the Table
3. Click Done Sel . The table and text is copied to the clipboard.
4. Add a second sheet by clicking Sheets > Add .
5. Click Edit > Paste . The clipboard window appears.
6. Zoom in on the copied items in the clipboard window.
7. In the clipboard window, click the lower right corner of the table
as the first translation vector and select the lower right corner of
the format on sheet two as the second translation vector point.
Note:
The copied entities will remain in the clipboard until you select
something else to copy. You can always delete the table and
text and paste it in again, if needed.
NOTES
Task 10. Remove the top two rows from the copied table.
1. Click Table > Mod Row/Cols > Remove > Row and select the top
row. Type [yes] to confirm.
2. Select the new top row and type [yes] again.
3. Delete the remaining text above the table using [Select] icon
and <DEL>.
4. Save and close the format window.
Task 11. Add the format that you just created to the plunger body
drawing. The system prompts you to specify the unknown parameter
values, but provides the known ones automatically.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_FORMATS.DRW. If you have

PLUNGER_BODY.DRW.
2. Edit the config.pro and add the option

make_parameters_from_fmt_table set to yes . Apply the
changes.
3. Add the multi-sheet format that you created earlier to the drawing.
Click Sheets > Format > Add/Replace . Select
C_MULTI_FORMAT.FRM and click Open .
4. Type [1] as the sheet number.
5. Specify the values of the unknown parameters in the format. Enter

the values as shown in the following table (if the system prompts
you to specify the type of parameter, click String ).
NOTES
Table 2: Unknown Parameters

Parameter Value
Drw_num 11473
Fscm_num 2172
Approved_by_date TBD
Approved_by TBD
Checked_by_date 5/14/98
Checked_by JOE CHECKER
Drawn_by_date 5/7/98
6. Clean up the display of the sheet by moving tables, views, or notes

to more appropriate positions, if necessary.
7. Switch to Sheet 2 and add the second sheet of the format. Click
Sheets > Next followed by Format > Add/Replace .
8. Select C_MULTI_FORMAT.FRM and click Open .
9. Type [2] as the sheet number. The system should now fill out the
parameters automatically without displaying any additional
prompts, as shown in the following figure.
10. Save and close the format window.
NOTES
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create a format by importing an IGES file.

• You can add parametric information to a format.
Module
16
Creating a Bill of Materials
In this module, you learn how to use Pro/REPORT to create a Bill of
Materials on a drawing.
Objectives
• Create an automatic BOM.

• Manipulate a BOM.
• Show BOM balloons in the drawing.
Page 16-1
NOTES
CREATING A BOM USING PRO/REPORT

A Bill of Materials (BOM) is a listing of parts and part parameters that are
contained within the current assembly. When creating an assembly
drawing, it is often necessary to include a table showing the BOM. You
can use repeat regions to automate creation and maintenance of the BOM.
Generating a BOM Report

To create an automatic BOM in Pro/ENGINEER, follow these steps:
• Create a table.
• Define a simple repeat region.
• Enter the report symbols.
• Update the table.
Creating a Table
When creating a table to display an assembly drawing’s BOM, you should
specify the placement and origin carefully to accommodate its growth as
the system adds rows to the table.
Defining a Simple Repeat Region

After creating a table, you can create a simple repeat region. A repeat
region is an area of the table. The system will extract information from the
models and fill in the cells in this area automatically based on the
requirements you specified.
When you create a repeat region, you need to specify some seed cells, then
enter the name of the parameter that you want the system to fill in. There
are two types of repeat regions: simple and Two-D. A simple region grows
in one direction, repeating a row over and over. To create a simple repeat
region, you must define the extent of the region, that is, the area of
information that you want the system to duplicate. For a BOM report, this
area constitutes the outside cells of the row, as shown in the following
figure. A Two-D repeat region will populate in two directions. It will be
discussed in a later chapter.
NOTES
INDEX NAME QTY

Select this cell Select this cell
Figure 1: Simple Repeat Region
Specifying the Information to Include

After setting up the repeat region, you should use report parameters to
define the information that you want the system to include in the table.
You can define parameters by typing them manually, or by making
selections from a menu. The following table lists some of the
Pro/REPORT system parameters that you can use to create a BOM.
• To enter using the keyboard, you need to enter the report symbol in the
format of parameters, in other words, you need to include the “&”. For
example, to display cost in two decimal places, you need to enter
[&asm.mbr.cost[.2]].
• The cell you enter the report symbol becomes the seed cell.
• You can use Switch Sym to check the symbolic name of the report
symbols after the system has populated the repeat region.
• When you need to perform operations related to the report symbol,
such as calculation summations, you need to select the seed cell where
the report symbol is entered.
Table 1: Pro/REPORT System Parameters
Parameter Name Definition
&asm.mbr.name Displays the name of an assembly member.
&asm.mbr.type Displays the type (part or assembly) of an assembly
member.
&asm.mbr.parametername Displays the value of “parametername” (a user-defined
parameter) for an assembly member. Ex: cost or vendor
&rpt.index Displays the index number assigned to each record in a
repeat region.
&rpt.level Displays the recursive depth of an item.
&rpt.qty Displays the quantity of an item.
To create a simple repeat region, you would specify the parameters, as

INDEX NAME QTY

rpt.index asm.mbr.name rpt.qty
Figure 2: Entering Parameters for a Simple Repeat Region
C reat ing a Bil l of Mate ria ls Pag e 1 6-3

NOTES
Updating the Table

When you finish entering the report symbols, you need to update the table.
The system will extract information from the models and populate the
cells of the repeat region.
Manipulating a BOM Report

When you create a BOM using Pro/REPORT, Pro/ENGINEER uses
default values for many of the attributes to create the initial table, but you
can change them later to manipulate the format of the table. After creating
the table, you can make the following modifications to the listing to suit
your needs:
Controlling Duplicated Components

If a component is used multiple times in an assembly, you can use the
repeat region attributes to control the display of duplicated components:
• Duplicates – The system creates a row for every instance of a

component. This is the system default.
• No Duplicates – Lists duplicate occurrences of a component only
once. Therefore, even if the assembly has eight bolts, that component
only appears once in the table.
• No Duplicates/Level – Lists duplicate occurrences of a component
once for each subassembly in which you use it. Therefore, if you use a
bolt in two different subassemblies, that component appears twice in
the table.
NOTES
Figure 3: Bill of Materials for Example Assembly
Controlling the Levels Searched for Components

When there are more than one level in the assembly, you can use the
repeat region attributes to control the search level.
• – When you initially create the table, only the top-level

Flat
components appear because the default attribute of a repeat region

NOTES
prevents Pro/ENGINEER from searching through lower levels as

• Recursive – It allow the system to search all levels of the assembly.
You can also specify the Flat and Recursive attributes for individual
subassemblies.
Figure 4: Region Attributes
Changing the Order of the List

Once the system has filled the table, you can change the order in which it
displays the components by sorting. You can sort the table by one or more
parameters, moving forward or backward in order.
For example, you could display components by type, and then sort
alphabetically by part name when the two components are of the same
type.
Removing Components from the List

If you want to omit components or certain types of component from the
BOM, you can set up a filter so that the system automatically removes
those items from the listing.
NOTES
• By Item – To remove a component from the BOM, you can simply

select that record to remove.
• By Rule – Setup a rule to remove multiple entries from the BOM. For
example, remove all components composed of the material steel, you
could set up a rule to check for the material.
Using Operators to Set Up a Rule

To set up a rule, you use the comparison operators <, >, <=, >=, = =, and
!= to compare the parameters of the filter. If a record in the table does not
satisfy the filter equation, the system removes it from the table. For
example, if you added the filter “&asm.mbr.type = = part”, the system
would only show parts in the table. If you added the filter
“&asm.mbr.material != steel,” the system would remove steel components
from the table.
You can also use multiple values in filters. For example, if you added the
filter “&ASM.MBR.NAME = = PART_A, PART_B, PART_J”, only those
three parts would appear in the table.
Using Repeat Region Relations

Using the repeat region relations, you can show correct quantity for the
bulk items, calculate total cost etc.
Showing the Correct Quantity

When you include the quantity of a component in a repeat region,
Pro/ENGINEER counts how many times a certain file is used in an
assembly. For example, if BOLT.PRT is used in an assembly four times,
the system would assign it a quantity of 4.
This would be acceptable if none of the components in the assembly are

bulk items. Bulk items are components that are created within an assembly
to “fill out” the BOM (such as glue, paint, and sealant). It is the
placeholder, and doesn’t have any geometry.
The system saves a bulk item to a file with a .PRT extension and
assembles it once, assigning it a quantity of 1 in the BOM. However,
many bulk items should have a quantity such as AS REQUIRED. You can
create a relation to display the correct quantity. The procedures are as
follow:

NOTES
• Enter report symbol &rpt.rel.qty. When entering using the menu, click
rpt > rel > User Defined and enter [qty] as the parameter name.
• Create the repeat region relation, shown in the following figure.
if asm_mbr_type = = ”BULK ITEM”

Qty = ”AS REQUIRED”
Else
Qty = rpt_qty
Endif
Figure 5: Quantity Relation for a Bulk Item
By incorporating this relation into the drawing, the system assigns all bulk
items a quantity of AS REQUIRED, and assigns the appropriate quantity
to each component.
Calculating a Total Cost

A BOM report may contain a cost and quantity for each component. You
can write a relation to calculate the total cost for each component. The
procedures are as follow:
• In the table, use &ASM.REL.TCOST as the report parameter in the

column for total cost of each component.
• Create the repeat region relation, as shown in the following figure.
if asm_mbr_type = = ”bulk item”

tcost = 0.0
Else
Tcost = asm_mbr_cost * rpt_qty
Endif
Figure 6: Cost Calculations
The system will calculate the total cost and fill in the cells in the following
figure.
NOTES
Figure 7: Relation Added to Define Cost
Creating a Summation
To calculate the total cost of the entire assembly, you could create a
summation of the total costs of each component by specifying the
particular column to sum and a name for the summation parameter.
Figure 8: Summing the Cost
Pagination
If a table becomes too long to fit on one page, you can paginate it by
breaking it at a particular row and continuing it on the next page, or you
can create a new segment on the same page. As you add more information
to the table, the system flows it into the next segment and adds more
sheets as necessary. You can also repeat the header information from the
original table on the next page.

NOTES
Showing BOM Balloons

Once you have completed the table, you can show BOM balloons on the
drawing, as shown in the following figure. The balloons update if you
change the assembly, add components, or remove them.
Figure 9: Examples of Simple and With Quantity Balloons
Creating Custom Balloons

The default shape for a BOM balloon is a circle. To specify a different
shape, you can create a custom balloon, which is simply a drawing symbol
that contains variable text. To show the quantity or index number of a
component in a custom balloon, set the default value of the variable text to
RPT_INDEX or RPT_QTY, respectively. Any report symbol displayed in
the repeat region can be included parametrically in the custom balloons.
NOTES

control repeat regions and BOMs in reports.
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting Repeat Regions and BOMs
def_bom_balloon_leader_s arrowhead Sets the default arrow style
ym dot for BOM balloons in new
reports.
filled_dot
no_arrow
slash
integral
box
filled_box
max_balloon_radius 0 Sets the maximum
non-zero value allowable balloon radius.
If set to “0,” balloon radius
depends only on text size.
min_balloon_radius 0 Sets the minimum
non-zero value allowable balloon radius.
If set to “0,” balloon radius
depends only on text size.

NOTES
Goal
To use Pro/REPORT to create a Bill of Materials in a drawing.
Method
In this exercise, you create a simple repeat region to automate a Bill of
Materials (BOM) so that the system automatically reflects changes to the
assembly information. You also change the appearance of the BOM by
modifying the repeat region attributes.
EXERCISE 1: Creating an Automatic BOM

Task 1. Retrieve the drawing and add the
C_MULTI_FORMAT_COMPLETED.FRM format.
1. Retrieve BARREL_ASM.DRW.
2. Click Sheets> Format > Add/Replace .
3. Use the LOOK IN drop down list, browse to the current working
directory.(Fund_draw_320 directory)
4. Select C_MULTI_FORMAT_COMPLETED.FRM and click Open .

Type [1] as the sheet number.
5. Enter the parameter values as shown in the following table. (These

values have effect on the following tasks, so you don’t have to be
exact.)
Table 3: Parameter values for the format
Parameter Value
Drw_num 11473
Fscm_num 2172
Approved_by_date TBD
Approved_by TBD
Checked_by_date 5/14/01
Checked_by JOE CHECKER
Drawn_by_date 5/7/01
NOTES
Task 2. Create a table to display the Bill of Materials for the drawing.
Include columns for the part name, type, quantity, cost, and total cost.
1. Create a table for the BOM on the drawing. Click Table > Create
> Ascending > Leftward > By Num Chars . Select the lower right
corner of the table as shown in the following figure.
Locate lower right corner

of the table here
Figure 10: Table Location
2. Create six columns in this table.

! Using the mouse, select immediately after the 6 for the first
column,
! Immediately after the 5 for the second column,
! Immediately after the 4 for the third column,
! Immediately after the second 2 (12) for the fourth column,
! Immediately after the third 5 (25) for the fifth column,
! Immediately after the first 5 for the final column.
3. Create three rows in this table. Select immediately after the 2 for
the first row, and immediately after the 1 for the second and third
rows. Press middle mouse button to finish.
4. Define the justification of the columns. Click Mod Rows/Cols >

Justify > Center > Middle . Select all six columns in the table.
5. Add text into the header of the table. Click Enter Text , select the
lower left cell, and type [ITEM]. Select the next cell and type

NOTES
[NAME]. Continue entering the text [TYPE] [QTY] [COST] as shown

Figure 11: Table Header
6. Enter [TOTAL COST] in one line, then use Wrap Text to fit the cell.
7. Select the row.
8. Right click and select WRAP ROW. The table should appear as in
the preceding figure.
9. Justify the NAME column. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Justify >
Column > Left > Middle , then select the NAME column. The
system maintains the center justification of the existing header, but
left-justifies any new text.
Task 3. Create a simple repeat region for the information in the BOM
and define the parameters to display.
1. Click Repeat Region > Add > Simple, then select the cell above
ITEM and the cell above TOTAL COST.
2. Click Enter Text > Report Sym .
3. Select the cell above ITEM and click rpt… > index.
4. Select the cell above NAME and click asm…> mbr… > name .
5. Select the cell above TYPE and click asm… > mbr… > type .
6. Select the cell above QTY and click rpt… > qty.
7. Select the cell above COST and click asm… > mbr… > User
Defined , then enter [cost].
8. Select the cell above TOTAL COST and click rpt… > rel… >
User Defined , then enter [total_cost].
9. Click Repeat Region > Update Tables . The table should appear
NOTES
Figure 12: Initial BOM
Task 4. Change the attributes of the repeat region to modify the BOM
display. Components should appear only once in the table and all parts
should be included in the BOM, regardless of the level at which they
reside.
1. Notice the piston assembly displays in the table five times.
2. Click Attributes and select the repeat region in the table. Click No
Duplicates > Done/Return The following figure shows the new
table configuration.
Figure 13: No Duplicates
3. Change the attributes of the repeat region to include all levels of

the assembly. Click Attributes and select the repeat region in the
table. Click Recursive > Done/Return .

NOTES
Figure 14: Recursive
Task 5. Change the information for the total cost column. Create a
relation to calculate cost and total cost values. The total cost is based on
the quantity and cost values.
1. Click Relations from the Tbl regions menu and select the repeat
region. Click Add and type [total_cost = asm_mbr_cost *
rpt_qty].
2. Click Repeat Region > Update Tables . The table should display
Figure 15: Total Cost
3. Click Enter Text > Keyboard , then select the cell above COST.
4. Type [&asm.mbr.cost[.2]] to cause the number to display two

significant digits.
NOTES
5. Select the cell above TOTAL COST and type

[&rpt.rel.total_cost[.2]]. Click Done/Return .
6. Define a cost value for the barrel part. Click Edit > Value and
select the cell in the COST column for the barrel part. Enter
[8.75] as the value.
7. Click Table > Repeat Region > Update Tables . The table should
display as shown in the following figure.
Figure 16: Number of Digits for Cost
Task 6. Create a summation for the number of components in the

assembly.
1. Click Summation and select the repeat region.
2. Click Add and select the QTY seed cell in the region.
3. Type [assy_qty] as the parameter name.
4. Select the empty cell at the top of the QTY column to place the
summation value.
5. Click Repeat Region > Update Tables .
Task 7. Remove the names of assembly components from the table, as

1. Click Filters and select the repeat region.
2. Click By Rule > Add , then type [&asm.mbr.type !=

assembly].

NOTES
3. Click Done > Done/Return .
Figure 17: Assemblies Filtered Out
Task 8. Create a summation for the total cost of the assembly and set
the decimal precision to two.
1. Click Summation and select the repeat region.
2. Click Add and select the seed cell for the barrel in the TOTAL
COST column of the region.
3. Type [assy_cost] as the parameter name.
4. Select the cell at the top of the TOTAL_COST column to place the
summation value. Update the table.
5. Change the format for the cost. Click Format > Decimal Places .
Enter [2] as the number of digits.
6. Select the assembly total cost value and click Done Sel .
Task 9. Combine the upper left cells and add a header for TOTALS.
1. Click Table > Modify Table > Merge > Rows & Cols .
2. Select the upper left cell in the table and the cell directly to the left
of the total quantity.
3. Click Enter Text and select the new cell.
4. Type [TOTALS] as the cell text. The table should appear as shown
NOTES
Figure 18: Total Cost
Task 10. Explore the associativity of the BOM by suppressing the pump
head part. Use Fix Index to fix the ITEM numbers when you add or
suppress components.
1. Retrieve BARREL.ASM.
2. Click Component > Suppress , then select the pump head. Click
Done Sel >Done .
3. Click Window > BARREL_ASM.DRW . Notice that the pump head

is no longer in the BOM and the numbers in the ITEM column
have changed. If you delete a component from the assembly, you
may not want the item numbers of components later in the table to
change.
4. Click Window > BARREL.ASM .
5. Resume the pump head part. Click Component > Resume > All >
Done .
6. Set the drawing BARREL_ASM.DRW as the active window.
7. Change the table so that the deletion or suppression of a

component does not affect the existing item numbers. Click Table
> Repeat Region > Fix Index , then select the repeat region. Click
Fix > Region > Confirm > Done .
8. Set the BARREL.ASM as the active window and suppress the

pump head again.
9. Set the BARREL_ASM.DRW as the active window. Notice that the

item numbers did not change this time.

NOTES
10. Unfix the region. Click Table > Repeat Region > Fix Index , then
select the repeat region. Click Unfix > Region > Confirm > Done .
11. Set the BARREL>ASM active and resume the pump head.
12. Close the assembly window and set BARREL_ASM>DRW active.
Task 11. Add BOM balloons to the drawing that include the quantity.
1. Click Table > BOM Balloon > Set Region > With Qty, then select
the region.
2. Click Show > By View , then select the 3-D view of the assembly.
3. Reposition the balloons appropriately and change the attachment

locations. Click [Select] and select a balloon to move.
4. Modify the attachment point of a balloon. Right-click to bring up

the pop menu.
5. Click Same Ref to move the arrow to a new position on the same
reference.
6. Click Change Ref to change the reference to which the balloon is

attached. Notice that you can not change the reference to a
different component.
7. Merge the balloons for the inner and outer races and the bearing
spacer, as shown in the following figure. Click Table > BOM
Balloon > Merge .
8. Select the balloon for the inner race and then select the balloon for
the bearing spacer. Use the MODEL TREE to identify the
component as necessary. Repeat this step to merge the balloon for
the outer race with the bearing spacer balloon.
NOTES
Figure 19: Balloon Locations
9. Split the balloon for the pistons to create two balloons. Click Split
and select the balloon for the pistons. Type [2] as the amount and
attach the balloon to one of the other pistons. Locate the balloon
toward the right side of the view.
10. Change the amounts in the balloons for the pistons. Click
Redistribute and select the original balloon for the piston. Enter
[1] as the amount to redistribute and select the new balloon.
Task 12. Change the type of balloon for the barrel part and the head
plate.
1. Click Alt Symbol and select the balloons for the barrel part and the
head plate.
2. Click Done Sel > Retrieve > DELTA_BOM.SYM .

NOTES
Figure 20: Custom Symbol
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create a table with repeat regions to create an automatic

BOM.
• You can change the attributes of the repeat region.
• You can add BOM balloons to the drawing.

Module
17
Family Tables
In this module, you learn how to create a family table of parts and
manipulate it in a drawing.
Objectives
• Create a family table of parts.

• Place a parts catalog table on a drawing.
• Replace one instance on drawing with another.
Page 17-1
NOTES
ADVANTAGES OF USING FAMILY TABLES

Using family tables is the most effective way to create a parts library in
Pro/ENGINEER.
Saving Space with Instances

A family table has only one part file with a table of information about
variations of the generic part, referred to as instances. The information in
the table pertains to dimension values, parameter values, and features
included on the instances.
Reducing Development Time

By using a family table, you can build just one part and then edit a table of
information to create multiple variations of the part. By inputting values
for different sizes and configurations, you can build parts quickly.
CREATING A FAMILY TABLE

To create a family table successfully, you should follow four basic steps
• Create the generic part.

• Specify items for the table to drive.
• Create new instances.
• Verify the instances.
Creating the Generic Part

The first step is to create a generic part that includes every feature that
exists on any instance, as shown in the following figure. Because some
variations may not have the same features as the other variations, all
features must exist on the generic model.
NOTES
Figure 1: Generic Bolt Part
Specifying Items for the Table to Drive

After creating the generic model, you should identify the items which will
vary from one instance to another, such as dimensions, parameters,
features, and components (for an assembly family table).
Creating New Instances

You can add new instances to the table by adding more rows to the table,
or by patterning one of the existing instances, as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 2: Adding Instances
F a m i l y T a b le s Pag e 1 7- 3
NOTES
Adding Entries to the Table

Each row of the table represents a new instance. When adding entries to
the bottom of the table, keep in mind the following:
• You must assign every instance a unique name .
• You can use an “*” to use the default value . If the generic model
changes, the value for the instance updates as well.
• You can lock an instance . You can lock an instance of a family table
to prevent other uses from modifying table-driven characteristics of
the instance.
Patterning an Instance
By patterning an existing instance, you can automatically create instances
with parameters that grow incrementally. The system considers the
instance you select for patterning as a seed that it can use to generate new
family table members. You can pattern an instance in several directions to
vary multiple parameters.
Figure 3: Generating Instances using Patternize
NOTES
Verifying the Validity of the Model Instances

You should verify that each model instance is valid automatically. The
system regenerates each instance behind the scenes, and reports whether
each instance regenerated successfully or failed.
Retrieving an Instance
When you select a generic model to retrieve into Pro/ENGINEER, you can
select the generic model itself to open or one of the instances. You can
choose an instance by name or based off of the values of the parameters in
the table.
USING FAMILY TABLES IN DRAWING MODE

• You can create a drawing of the generic model or one of its instances.
Specifically, you can create the following types of drawings:
• One drawing of the generic model that shows a part catalog
• A separate drawing for each instance
Creating a Parts Catalog

For library parts, you may want to create a drawing of the generic models
and show a table of the different instances in the family table. You can
accomplish this by creating a drawing of the generic model, and using
Pro/REPORT to automatically create a table using the information in the
family table.
To create a parts catalog in Pro/ENGINEER, you should follow these

three steps:
• Create a table.
• Define a 2-D repeat region.
• Define the information to include.
Naming the Features and Dimensions

By default, all dimensions have a symbolic name similar to d2, d10, d105,
and so on. Also, features have default names such F55, F1032, etc. These
default feature names will be the column headers in your table unless you
specifically change them to more meaningful values.
NOTES
Creating a Table
Create the table as described in Tables chapters. You typically need a table
with two rows and two columns.
Defining a 2-D Repeat Region

For a parts catalog, you create a 2-D repeat region—one that grows in two
directions, horizontally and vertically.
To create a 2-D region, you must define the extent of the region, that is,
the area of information that you want the system to duplicate. For a parts
catalog, you should make three selections, as shown in the following
figure.
Select this cell second

Select this cell first Select this cell third
Figure 4: 2-D Repeat Region
Defining the Information to Include

After setting up the repeat region, you should use report parameters to
define the information that you want the system to include in the table.
The following table lists some of the Pro/REPORT system parameters that
you can use to create a parts catalog.
Table 1: Pro/REPORT Parameters for a Parts Catalog

Parameter Name Definition
&fam.inst.name Displays the name of a family table
instance.
&fam.inst.parametername Displays the name of a family table
parameter.
&fam.inst.param.value Displays the value of a family table
parameter for an instance.
&fam.inst.param.id Displays the ID of a family table
parameter if it is a dimension.
To complete the 2-D repeat region shown in the following figure, you
would enter three parameters, as shown in the following figure.
NOTES
fam.inst.param.name
fam.inst.name fam.inst.param.value
Figure 5: Adding Report Symbols
After you update the table, the system automatically fills in the cells with
the family table information, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6: Initial Table
Preventing Information from Displaying

To prevent certain information from displaying in the parts catalog, you
can set up a filter to remove particular columns from the listing.
The following figure shows the initial with the bolt_dia column filtered
using the filter &fam.inst.param.name != bolt_dia.
NOTES
Figure 7: Bolt Diameter Filtered from Table
You can also use multiple values in filters. For example, if you add the
filter &fam.inst.param.name!=bolt_length,bolt_dia, the system would
remove the columns for bolt_length and bolt_dia from the table.
Manipulating the Format

When you create a parts catalog using Pro/REPORT, the table may not
appear in the exact format that you would like.
• You can sort the table to change the order of the rows or continue the
table on the next page, if necessary.
• If a table becomes too long to fit on one page, you can paginate it by
breaking it at a particular row and continuing it on the next page. You
can also create a new segment on the same page.
Note:
Pagination only works for rows If the columns grow off the
page, you cannot paginate it to add segment or continue to the
next page.
Creating a Separate Drawing for Each Instance

You may need a separate drawing for every instance in the family table. If
your company requires individual tables, the quickest way to create them
NOTES
is to complete a drawing and use it to create other drawings. To do this,

you can follow the following three steps:
• Create the seed drawing.

• Replace the original model with another instance from the family
table.
• Save a copy of the existing drawing to another name.
Creating the Original Seed Drawing

You can create the original seed drawing from the generic model or any of
the instances, but you should fully detail it with any necessary dimensions,
notes, and special views, such as detailed views as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 8: Drawing of Generic Bolt
Replacing the Original Model

Once you have completed the seed drawing, you can replace the model
with another instance because the models all belong to the same family
table. When you replace a model on a drawing, any dimensions or
parameters on the drawing update to the new values based on the family
table. The following figure shows the generic bolt drawing after replacing
the model with another instance.
NOTES
Figure 9: Example of Replacing a Model on a Drawing with Details Preserved
You may have to modify the drawing of the new model by adding sheets,
creating new views, and creating new notes. In addition, you may also
have to make the following changes:
• Reposition views . If the models differed in size significantly, you

may have to move the views or change the scale of the drawing.
• Remove views . Some views may now be unnecessary.
• Show new dimensions . If some of the dimensions of the new model
do not appear on the drawing because the feature to which the
dimensions belong does not exist on the original model, you may have
to show these new dimensions.
Save a Copy of the Existing Drawing to Another Name

After making any necessary modifications to clean up the appearance of
the drawing, you must save it as a new drawing. When Pro/ENGINEER
asks you to specify a new name for the drawing, type in a name that is
unique throughout the database. The system then creates a new drawing
file on the hard drive with the new instance as its model.
If you follow this process for each instance in the family table, you can
create a separate drawing file for each of the instances.
NOTES

The following table lists the available drawing setup file options that you
can use to control the display of 2-D repeat regions.
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Affecting 2-D Repeat Regions

dash_supp_dims_in_ no Controls the display of
region yes dimension values in
Pro/REPORT table repeat
regions. If set to “no,''
displays the values in
Pro/REPORT table repeat
regions. If set to ”yes,''
suppresses the dimension
and displays a dash
instead.
model_digits_in_region yes Controls the display of the
no number of digits 2-D
repeat regions. If set to
“yes,'' 2-D repeat regions
reflect the number of digits
of part and assembly
model dimensions.
F a m i l y T a b le s Pag e 1 7-11
NOTES
Goal
To create a family table of parts and use them in drawings.
Method
In the first exercise, you learn how to create a family table that includes
dimensions, parameters, and features. You create instances by manually
typing in the information and by patterning an existing instance.
In the second exercise, you retrieve a drawing of a generic model and

create a table that reflects the family table information automatically. You
also manipulate the table display.
In the third exercise, you retrieve a drawing of a family table instance.

You then replace the current instance with a different instance and create a
copy of the drawing.
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Family Table

Task 1. Retrieve the barrel family table part and create a new chamfer
on the model.
1. Retrieve BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.PRT.
2. Click Insert > Chamfer > Edge Chamfer > 45 x d and type [.1]
as the “d” dimension.
3. Select the both of the split circular edges of the center hole on the
side towards you in the default view.
4. Click Done Sel > Done Refs . Click Preview > OK to finish the
feature.
5. Change the name of the chamfer feature by clicking Set Up >

Name and select the chamfer.
6. Enter [HOLE_CHAMFER] as the name. Click Done .
NOTES
Figure 10: Chamfer Created
Task 2. Create a family table for the barrel part that includes the
diameter of the barrel, the diameter of the patterned holes, and the bolt
circle diameter.
1. Click Family Tab . The Family Table editor appears.
2. Click [Add/delete table columns]. Accept the default ADD ITEM

type, Dimensions .
3. Click Query Sel , select the outer surface of the barrel. Click
Accept.
4. Select BARREL_DIA.
5. Select one of the holes and select the CYLINDER_DIA and

CENTERLINE_DIA dimensions. Click Done Sel .
6. In the FAMILY ITEMS dialog box, select Feature as the ADD

ITEM type, select the chamfer, and click OK .
NOTES
Figure 11: Identifying the Items to Vary
Task 3. Add some new instances to the family table by editing the table
and by patterning an instance of the table. After adding the instances,
make sure that they regenerate successfully.
1. Add instances to the family table by clicking [Insert a new

instance] twice.
2. Edit the data as shown in the following figure.
Figure 12: Add Instances to the Table
Task 4. Create new instances of the barrel by patterning B_400_80_25.
1. Select B_400_80_25 and click [Patternize].
2. Type [3] as the QUANTITY for the first direction.
NOTES
3. In the ITEMS area, select BARREL_DIA, click [Add] and type

[.25] as the increment followed by <ENTER>.
4. In the ITEMS area, select CYLINDER_DIA, click [Add] and

type [.10] as the increment followed by <ENTER>.
5. Click [Add direction] to specify a dimension for the second

direction.
6. Type [2] as the QUANTITY for the second direction.
7. Select CENTERLINE_DIA, click [Add] and type [.2] as the

increment followed by <ENTER>.
8. Click OK to finish the pattern.
Task 5. Remove the duplicate instance from the table and change the
names of the other instances in the family table.
1. Select the B_400_80_250, right-click and select Delete Rows .
2. Modify the family table so that it appears as shown in the

following figure. Change the names of the instances and the values
for the chamfer column. Change other cells if necessary.
Figure 13: Patterned Family Table
3. Click [Verify instances] > Verify to determine if the instances

can be regenerated.
NOTES
4. The system verifies the validity of each instance and displays the
status in the dialog box. Review the status, and then select the
CLOSE button in the dialog box.
5. Click OK to exit the table.
Task 6. Create a parameter for the cost and add it to the table. Assign
the proper values to all of the instances.
1. Click Setup > Parameters > Part > Create > Real Number .
2. Type [cost] as the name of the parameter and [10.95] as the

value of the parameter, then click Done .
3. Click Family Tab > [Insert a new instance].
4. In the ADD ITEMS area, select Parameter , check Cost and click
Done Sel . Click OK.
5. Change the values in the cost column to those shown in the

following figure.
Figure 14: Cost Parameter
6. Click OK .
NOTES
Task 7. Retrieve some instances into the family table. Retrieve one
instance by selecting its name and retrieve another by selecting its value.
1. Open BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.PRT. Select instance

B_425_90_27 and click Open .
3. Open BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.PRT.
4. Retrieve the instance that does not have the chamfer and has a
barrel diameter of 4.25.
5. Click the By Parameter tab.
6. Select d2, BARREL_DIA, and 4.25. The number of instances in

the bottom of the window decreases.
7. Select F740,HOLE_CHAMFER > N. The number of instances that

satisfy these values should decrease to one, B_425_90_25. Click
Open .
8. Close the current window.
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Showing Family Tables on a Drawing

Task 1. Retrieve the barrel family table drawing and create a table in
which to display the family table information.
1. Retrieve BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.DRW.
2. Click Table > Create .
3. Click Descending > Rightward > By Num Chars . Locate the

upper left corner of the table to the right of the detailed view.
4. Specify the width of the first column as 13 units, and the second
column as 15 units.
5. Make the height of the first row 2 units, and the height of the
second row 1 unit. The table should appear as shown in the
following figure.
Figure 15: Initial Table
Task 2. Set up the columns of the table with left and middle
justification. Create a 2-D repeat region and define the information to
include in the table.
1. Click Mod Rows/Cols > Justify > Column .
2. Click Center > Middle . Select both columns of the table to set the
justification.
3. Click Repeat Region > Add > Two-D . Select the cells as shown in
Select this cell second

Select this cell first Select this cell third
Figure 16: Repeat Region Creation
NOTES
4. Click Enter Text > Reprt Sym and select the upper right cell of
the table.
5. Click fam... > inst...> param… > name .
6. Select the lower left table cell and click fam... > inst... > name .
7. Select the lower right table cell and click fam...> inst...> param…
> value .
8. Click Repeat Region > Update Tables . The table should look
like the one shown in the following figure.
Figure 17: Family Table
Task 3. Change the order of the columns in the table to reflect the
column order of the original family table, as shown in the following
figure.
1. Click Sort Regions , then select the region of the table.
2. Click the No Default check box and click Done . The columns are
ordered as they are in the Family Table editor.
Figure 18: Sorting the Region
NOTES
Task 4. Retrieve the barrel family table part and add a new instance to
the table. Return to the drawing and notice that the table automatically
includes the new information.
1. Retrieve the generic BARREL_FAMILY_TABLE.PRT.
2. Click Family Tab > [Insert a new instance].
3. Set the values shown in the following table.
Table 3: Values for New Instance

Column Value
Name B_475_110_25
BARREL_DIA 4.75
CYLINDER_DIA 1.10
CENTERLINE_DIA 2.5
HOLE_CHAMFER N
COST 15.00
4. Exit from the table.
5. Close the part window and activate the drawing window.
6. The system may have already updated the table to include the new
instance. If it does not display the new instance, click Regenerate
> Draft .
7. Save and quit the drawing.
NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Creating Separate Drawings for Each

Instance
Task 1. Retrieve the bolt drawing and replace the current family table
instance with a new instance. Clean up the display of the drawing and
create a copy of it for this new instance.
1. Retrieve BOLT_REPLACE.DRW.
2. Click Views > Dwg Models > Replace .
3. Select B_5_20 as the instance to retrieve and click Open .
4. Delete DETAIL 1 from the drawing since there is no chamfer in

this instance. Click Views > Delete View and select DETAIL 1
followed by Confirm .
5. Copy the drawing to a new name. Click File > Save a Copy. Enter
[B_5_20] as the name of the new drawing and click OK .
Task 2. Replace the model of this drawing with another instance.
1. Repeat this process and create new drawings for the instances
B_5_20_C.
2. Do not delete the detailed view of the chamfer.
3. Save the drawing as B_5_20_C.DRW.
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create a family table of parts.

• You can create a parts catalog.
• You can create a drawing table with a 2-D repeat region.
Module
18
Working with Large Drawings
In this module, you learn how to work with large drawings
Objectives
• Reduce the amount of information displayed on a drawing.

• Control when a view is regenerated.
• Limit the number of files that must be retrieved to display a
drawing.
Page 18-1
NOTES
MANAGING LARGE DRAWINGS

You can define a large drawing in several ways. The term large can be
relative, since hardware platforms perform at different levels; however,
you can generally classify any of the following as large drawings:
• A drawing of a part model that is highly complex.

• A drawing of an assembly that has multiple components.
• A drawing that consists of a large number of views and sheets.
Working with large assemblies places a greater burden on your system
than working with a small assembly or part. Likewise, working with a
drawing of a large assembly can place an even greater load on your
system. This is due to the fact that most drawings have multiple views
that the system must update for hidden line removal, component
placement, and so on. Even assemblies, which are not large by your
definition may become unacceptably slow once a certain number of sheets
and views is reached.
Drawing Retrieval and Regeneration Process

There are many techniques one can implement to improve the
performance of large drawings. Prior to choosing a technique, it is
important to understand the steps the system performs when a drawing is
retrieved and regenerated.
Drawing Retrieval
When you open a drawing, the system will first, load the associated
models into memory (RAM), then regenerate all the views on the drawing,
at last, display the image on the screen.
Drawing Model Regeneration

When the model of the drawing is changed and regenerate, the system will
perform similar operations. For example, when dimensions are modified
and regenerated in drawing, the system will first regenerate the model,
then regenerate the views on the drawing and display the image on the
screen.
The following can potentially slow down the system:
NOTES
• Drawing model retrieval

• Drawing model regeneration
• Drawing view regeneration
• Drawing image display time(repaint time)
Each of the available techniques may target one of the aspects listed
above, and it is recommended to estimate which step is impacting
performance the most and implement solutions to improve that area.
APPROACHES TO PERFORMANCE IMPROVEMENT

In general, you can use the following methods to improve your drawing
performance:
• Use the system configuration settings to optimize the modeling

environment for use with large drawings.
• Using various techniques to remove detail from regeneration and
display that is not necessary at that specific time.
• Using drawing reps to reduce retrieval, regeneration and display time.
• Develop each sheet of the drawing as a separate drawing file, and
merge them together when all of the sheets are completed.
• Create a simplified representation of the model and base the drawing
off of this configuration.
The remaining sections of this summary document will discuss each of
these approaches in greater detail.
Reducing the Repaint Time

When retrieving a drawing of a large assembly, the time it takes to display
the datum, such as datum planes and coordinate system, in a large drawing
can result in deteriorating performance.
Turning off the Datum Display

By globally turning off datum, you can greatly reduce the repaint time. If
you turn off the display before retrieve the drawing, you can reduce the
initial display time when retrieving the drawing. The following
configuration file options control the datum plane display.
Wo rk i n g w i t h L a rg e D ra w i n g s Pag e 1 8- 3
NOTES

display_plane yes* Controls datum plane display.
no
display_plane_tags yes* Controls datum plane nametag display.
no
Similar configuration file options for other types of datum are also
available.
Using Layers to Selectively Display Information
If some datum is needed in drawing manipulation, you should use layers

to selectively display the necessary datum instead of displaying them all
together. You can use the following configuration file option to control the
layer display before the drawing retrieval.

display_layer Layer id This causes the specified layer to display
when you begin a Pro/Engineer session.
Reducing Drawing View Regeneration Time

In Drawing mode, the amount of time it takes to generate the graphic
information for display depends on the complexity of the model, the
complexity of each view and the number of views.
Control the Number of View to Regenerate

You can specify the desired view to regenerate, or erase the views you are
not currently working on.
Specify Which View to Regenerate
By default, the system automatically regenerates all the views on all the
sheets on your drawing when you perform certain operations such as
regenerating the model, switching sheets, and changing the active window.
You can change the configuration file option listed in the following table
to prevent the system from automatically regenerating your entire
drawing.
NOTES

auto_regen_view yes* Control whether the system automatically
no regenerates the display of your drawing
when switching window.
If you set the value to no, you can then selectively update specified views,
current sheet or the entire drawing. Using this method, you can update the
views that are relevant to your current task without having to take the time
to regenerate every other view as well.
Erasing Views
You can temporarily remove the views that you do not need by erasing
them from the drawing. This not only allows you to focus on the current
task, but also reduces the repaint time and view regeneration time. You
can resume the erased views at any time to perform general review.
By saving the drawing with erased views, retrieval time will also decrease.
Reduce the Regeneration Time of a Specific View

There are numerous techniques to reduce the view regeneration time. You
can perform Z-Clipping to remove redundant background geometry, use
Area Cross Section, and use configuration file options to further reduce
view regeneration time.
Z-Clipping
As mentioned in an earlier chapter, Z-Clipping will allow you to display

only the geometry in front of a plane and will ignore all geometry behind
it. Essentially, this will:
• Terminate hidden line removal computations at the Z-Clip location.

• Terminate the displaying of any geometry from the Z-Clip location.
NOTES
Figure 1: Front and Side Views
For example, when looking at the front view of the vehicle as shown on
the left in the preceding figure, it is not necessary for the system to
regenerate any geometry beyond the vehicle center.
Using Area Cross-Section
Cross sectional views require additional system resources in order to:
• Determine which components are intersected by the cutting plane.

• Determine which geometry is in front of the cutting plane in the
desired view and eliminate it.
• Determine which geometry is behind the cutting plane and how it is
impacted by display settings such as Hidden Line or No Hidden.
• Determine cross hatch setting for each model intersected by the cutting
plane.
In some cases, an area cross section can be used instead of the default total
cross section to improve performance and clarity. With an Area Cross
Section, only the geometry intersected by the cutting plane is displayed,
preventing the system from calculating the geometry in front of and back
of the cutting plane. This type of section may not be appropriate where
display of components behind the cutting plane is desired, but can
certainly be employed as a temporary, in-process solution.
Configuration File Settings
Using the configuration file options listed in the following table, you can
further reduce the view regeneration time.
NOTES

display_in_adding_view default* Controls the display of a view
wireframe when you first place it on the
drawing when
minimal_wireframe “auto_regen_views” is set to “no.”
display_trimetric_dwg_ yes* Determines if a model is
mode_view no displayed in default orientation
when placing a general view on a
drawing. When set to “no,” the
system does not display a model
until you select default.
force_wireframe_in_ no Displays all views in wireframe
drawings yes regardless of the set display.
tangent_edge_display solid* Set to “no” prevents system from

no calculating and displaying
tangencies
display_silhouette_edges yes* Set to “no” prevents system from
no calculating and displaying
silhouette edges
edge_display_quality normal* Decreases tessellation of edges
low which will speed up display
retain_display_memory yes* Controls whether the system
no retains the display of an object
that is still in RAM. When set to
“yes,” results in faster display of a
sheet when switching sheets of a
drawing.
NOTES
Reducing Drawing Retrieval Time

Using the configuration file options listed in the following table, you can
save time when retrieving the drawing as well as when saving and printing
the drawing.

save_display no* Controls whether the system saves
yes the display of an object on the
screen when it saves the object.
save_modified_draw_ yes* When set to “yes”, stores the
models_only no drawing without storing its model
if the model has not changed.
interface_quality 0* Determines the amount of work
performed when checking for
overlapping lines for pen plotters
compress_output_files no* Stores files in a compressed
yes format. Compressed files are
slower to read and write.
View Only Retrieval

One of the most effective ways to reduce the drawing retrieval time is to
retrieve the drawing as view only.
You can significantly reduce retrieval time by retrieving a drawing in

view-only mode because the system does not retrieve any of its associated
models. This method is most useful for browsing or plotting out a
drawing. If you decide to modify the drawing after viewing it, you can
retrieve the models at any time.
In order to use the view-only retrieve method, you need to save the display
from the Pro/ENGINEER interface or using the configuration file options
listed in the previous table.
Implementing the Large Drawing Configuration File

Settings
Use the configuration file settings in the previous tables is one of the
easiest and the most effective way to handle the large amount of data in an
efficient manner.
NOTES
These settings do not need to be in effect at all time. In fact, the users
might want to toggle these setting on and off many times during the day.
It is recommended that you implement the configuration files in the
following steps:
• Create two configuration files:

! Large_draw_on.pro – Sets the modeling environment for working
with large drawings.
! Large_draw_off.pro – Disables the large drawing settings and

returns each of them to your company's standard setting.
• Create mapkeys or custom menu selections that will read each of these
files in.
Drawing Rep Tool

A drawing representation is a series of commands that specify a display
configuration for the current drawing. Using drawing representations, you
can improve drawing retrieval performance and minimize display
calculations such as view regeneration and repaint time.
There are two default reps that display all views and display no views.
You can create customized reps using the following commands:
View Display
Using VIEW DISPLAY commands, you can control following:
• Which views of a drawing the system retrieves and displays.

• Which sheets of a drawing the system retrieves and displays.
• Which models the retrieves and displays.
For example, in a multi-model drawing, you can temporarily remove all
models and views that are not necessary for current work.
Drawing Display
Using DRAWING DISPLAY commands, you can control following:
• Display a particular drawing sheet.

• Display a particular zoom state.
NOTES
• Fit the screen with a particular view.

• Control whether to update the drawing tables.
Figure 2: The Two Tabs of the Drawing Rep Tools
Open a Drawing Rep

You can open the default reps or any customized reps of a drawing. You
can also create a new drawing rep at the time of retrieval.
Merging Drawings
Using the Merge command, you can combine two drawings together.
Merging allows for:
• Increased Performance – The individual drawing files will retrieve

faster than the multi-sheet drawing would have.
• Parallel Development Efforts – Several users can develop portions of
a multi-sheet and/or multi-model drawing as separate drawings in
parallel and then merge their separate drawings into a single drawing
file.
NOTES
When merging two drawings, a source file is appended to the target file as
additional sheets. Models that are used by the source drawing are added
automatically to the target drawing during the merge. In this case, the
resulting drawing will be a multi-model drawing.
Model Simplification
Using simplified representations, you can limit the components that the
system retrieves and displays on the screen. This method allows you to
retrieve and display only those components that you need for the current
operation, thereby reducing the amount of time the system requires to
retrieve, regenerate, and repaint your drawings.
Note:
This technique is targeted at the first stage of drawing
retrieval: reducing the number of models retrieved into
memory.
Figure 3: Master and Simplified Versions of a Transmission Assembly
Tip!
Create a simplified rep with only a few models in it and use
this to place all of your views.
Geometry Representations
A geometry representation requires less time to retrieve than the actual
part because the system does not retrieve any of the parametric
Wo rk ing with L a rg e D ra w ings Pag e 1 8-11

NOTES
information, only the geometry. Although these versions of the part are
non-modifiable, you can still extract valuable information such as Mass
Properties and show dimensions on drawings.
Note:
It is recommended to base your large drawing on a Simplified
Representation where most of the models are displayed as the
Geometry Rep.
User Defined Representations

You will typically create your own simplified representation for use in
drawing mode. With this rep you can:
• Exclude components that do not need to be seen.

• Set models to Geometry Rep that need to be displayed, but will not
require modification from the drawing.
• Substitute detailed parts and sub-assemblies with placeholder parts to
represent the volume of that component or subsystem and reduce the
detail represented.
Figure 4: Assembly Substituted with a Placeholder Part
• Set models to Master Rep that require all of the feature data in
memory
View States
As the drawing is built up and the need to show more detail approaches,
the rep can be altered or new ones created where more components are
NOTES
displayed. Pro/ENGINEER allows you to set each view of your drawing

to be displayed as a different Simplified Representation using the View
States option.

NOTES
Goal
To reduce regeneration and repaint time for large drawings.
Method
In the first exercise, you reduce the regeneration and repaint time for a
large assembly by reducing the amount of clutter on the screen and using
view-only retrieve mode.
In the second exercise, you create a few simplified representations for the
pump assembly using rules, and then use a representation in the drawing.
In the third exercise you merge two drawings into one file.
EXERCISE 1: Reducing Regeneration and Repaint

Time
Task 1. Reduce the amount of information that the system must display
on the drawing by erasing views that you do not currently need.
1. Retrieve PUMP.DRW.
NOTES
Figure 5: Sheet One of the Pump Drawing
2. Change to Sheet 2.
Figure 6: Sheet Two of the Pump Drawing
3. Click Views > Erase View , and select the detailed view. Accept
[no] when the system prompts you to remove all arrows and
circles associated with this view.

NOTES
4. Repeat this procedure to erase the two views in the lower left
portion of the sheet.
Task 2. Alter the configuration file to improve performance while

working with large drawings.
1. Edit the config.pro file and add the option

disp_trimetric_dwg_mode_view to no , and
force_wireframe_in_drawings to yes .
2. Repaint the display. Pro/ENGINEER now does not have to take

the time to calculate the removal of hidden lines.
Task 3. Add a 3-D view in the upper right corner of Sheet 2.
1. Click View > Add View > General > Done .
2. Locate the view in the upper right corner of Sheet 2.
Note:
The view does not display on the screen but the Orientation
dialog box appears because you changed the setting for
disp_trimetric_dwg_mode_view to no .
3. Click Saved Views, select ISO and click Set . Click OK to finish.
4. Remove hidden lines and tangent lines from the new 3-D view.
Click Disp Mode > View Disp , then select the 3-D view. Click
Done Sel . Click No Hidden > No Disp Tan > Done .
5. Edit config.pro and change the value of the configuration file

option force_wireframe_in_drawings to no .
6. Repaint so that the drawing views no longer display in wireframe.
7. Resume the views that you erased earlier by clicking Resume

View > Select All > Done Sel .
8. Return to Sheet 1.
NOTES
Task 4. Change the configuration file so that it only regenerates the

display when you choose to regenerate it.
1. Modify a dimension. Select one of the .750 dimension, then right-

c lick and select Properties . Enter [1.25] as the value.
2. Click Regenerate > Model > Automatic . Notice how much time
it takes to regenerate the views.
5. Return to Sheet 2. The views on the second sheet begin to

regenerate. The system has to regenerate all the views on sheet 2
because the geometry has changed.
6. Set the configuration file option auto_regen_views to no .
7. Return to Sheet 1.
8. Modify the 1.25 dimension back to 0.75.
9. Click Regenerate > Model > Automatic . Pro/ENGINEER

regenerates the model and the dimension value updates, but the
view geometry remains the same.
Note:
Setting auto_regen_views to no allows you to control when the
views regenerate so that you can make many changes to the
model or drawing without waiting for the views to update.
10. Click View > Update > Drawing View . Select the bottom view,
then click Done Sel . Pro/ENGINEER only updates this view.
Task 5. When the system retrieves a drawing, it retrieves all of the

models used in the drawing. As a result, the system may require a
significant amount of time to simply open the drawing for you to view or
plot it. Configure this drawing for View Only Retrieval.
1. Save the drawing and erase it from memory.
2. Retrieve the drawing without retrieving any of the part or assembly

files used in the drawing. Click File >Open . Click [Commands
and Settings ] and select RETRIEVE DRAWING AS VIEW ONLY.
Select PUMP.DRW and click Open .

NOTES
3. The system retrieves the drawing very quickly, but it only displays
the view borders because you did not save the display with the
drawing.
4. Click Retr Models > Confirm . The system retrieves the models
used in the drawing and displays the views correctly.
5. Change to Sheet 2. The system regenerates all the views on sheet

2.
Note:
Saving the display will only save all the regenerated view.
Without switching to sheet 2, the display of the views on sheet
2 will not be regenerated, therefore not saved.
6. Save the display.
7. Click Utilities > Environment and select the Saved Display

check box.
8. Save the drawing
9. Erase the drawing again.
Task 6. Retrieve the drawing without retrieving any of the part or

assembly files used in the drawing.
1. Retrieve the drawing again as view only.
2. The system retrieves the drawing very quickly and displays it

correctly on the screen. Pro/ENGINEER displays the graphics the
way that they appeared when you last saved the drawing. You can
now change sheets, plot, or retrieve the models.
Note:
If one of the models changed since you last saved the drawing,
the graphics that the system displays may be out of date.
Regenerate the views on the drawing to update the graphics.
3. Change to the next sheet, then close the window.
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Simplified Representations

Task 1. The pump drawing only shows the exterior of the model, and
the interior components are not visible in the views. Retrieve the pump
assembly and create a simplified representation that eliminates the internal
components.
1. Retrieve PUMP.ASM.
Figure 7: Master Rep of the Pump
2. Click Simpfd Rep > Create , then type [exterior]. Click

Exclude Comp as the default rule.
3. Rather than manually select the external components, use the Simp
Rep rule to evaluate this condition for you. Accept the defaults
Master Rep then click By Rule .
4. In the BY RULE dialog box, select the Exterior Comps check

box and click Evaluate .
5. Scroll down the MODEL TREE to see the components that satisfy
this rule.
6. Click Update Screen > Done .
7. Save the assembly.

NOTES
Figure 8: External Components of the Pump
Task 2. Retrieve the pump drawing and swap the current master rep
model with the external simplified rep.
1. Retrieve PUMP.DRW and view Sheet 1.
2. Click Views > Modify View > View State .
3. Select the lower view on Sheet 1. Click Confirm , select

EXTERNAL, and click OK .
4. Switch to Sheet 2.
5. Repeat this procedure for the 3D view and the four planar views.
Any dimensions that can no longer be displayed with the current
models in the rep are displayed in magenta. These dimensions
could be recreated.
NOTES
EXERCISE 3: Merging Two Drawings into One

Task 1. Open a drawing that will be merged to another drawing and
review its drawing setup file.
1. Retrieve the BARREL_MERGE.DRW.
2. Notice some of the inappropriate details. The drawing text is large

in size. As a result, some dimensions interfere with other text and
view. In the upper-left view the axis display for the pattern of holes
are horizontal and vertical, not radially displayed.
3. Open the drawing set up file. Click Advanced > Draw Setup .
Check the following two options and their values:
drawing_text_height=0.4, radial_pattern_axis_circle=no.
4. Erase the BARREL_MERGE.DRW.
Task 2. Merge the barrel drawing with the pump drawing.
Note:
The drawing that is being merged is the source drawing. The
drawing into which it is being merged is the target drawing.
1. Active the pump drawing. Edit the drawing setup file and set the
option “radial_pattern_axis_circle” to yes. Notice that the option
“drawing_text_height” has the value 0.2.
2. Click Advanced > Merge .
3. Select the BARREL_MERGE.DRW and click Open .
4. Investigate the added sheet.
5. Notice that the text height and type has automatically taken the
values of the target drawing. Also, notice that the axis pattern is
now radial with an axis circle being displayed.

NOTES
Note:
After the drawings are merged, the drawing setup file options
from the target drawing override the options used by the
source drawing.
6. Click Views > Dwg Models > Set Model . Notice that both the
pump and the barrel are associated to the drawing.
NOTES
EXERCISE 4: Create a Drawings Rep

Task 1. Consider this scenario: you need to show the vendor that the
patterned hole of the barrel part in the pump assembly needs to be
redesigned. To show them what they need to work on, you can set up a
Drawing Rep that takes them right to the area of the drawing where they
can best see it, instead of retrieving all the models and searching through
the entire drawing.
1. Switch to Sheet 3.
2. Click Advanced > Drawing Rep > Create .
3. Enter [barrel_hole] as the name.
Task 2. Erase all views then show detail 1 of the barrel.
1. Accept the default Erase > All followed by Add .
2. Click Display > Individual , select the detailed view Detailed 1,

followed by Done Sel > Add . Notice all view disappeared except
the detailed view.
Task 3. Set up the view location
1. Click the DRAWING DISPLAY tab.
2. Check the Go to Sheet check box and select 3 from the drop down
list .
3. Check the Go to Center of View check box and click the detailed
view .
4. Click the Frozen check box under the Table Preferences .
5. Click Execute > OK . Click Done/Return from the ADV DWG

OPTS menu.
6. Save and Erase the drawing.

NOTES
Task 4. Imagine you are the vendor and are told to redesign the hole of
the barrel part in the pump drawing. There is a drawing rep already created
for you. Retrieve the drawing rep.
1. Click File > Open , select PUMP.DRW, followed by Open Rep .
2. Select the drawing rep BARREL_HOLE you just created.
3. The system brings you right to the location of your interest. Notice
that it takes less time than it would if All Views default drawing
rep is retrieved.
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can reduce display of items in the drawing using layers,

environment options, and the configuration option.
• You can control when a view is regenerated.
• You can use View Only and Simplified Representations to limit the
file that needs to be retrieved.

Module
19
Drawing Standards and Templates
In this module, you learn how to implement drawing standards using
configurations files, drawing setup files as well as creating drawing
templates.
Objectives
• Use configuration and drawing setup options to control the display

of items associated with drafting standards.
• Create drawings according to your company standards.
• Create the drawing templates.
Page 19-1
NOTES
SETTING UP YOUR DRAWING STANDARDS

Before you use Pro/ENGINEER for the first time, you should select a
configuration file and drawing setup file to work with, and then make the
necessary changes to meet your established company standards.
Setting up Your Configuration File

As an initial step in establishing your company standards for
Pro/ENGINEER, you should gather a group of users to review every
option available in the loadpoint configuration file. If the default setting of
an option meets your standards, you do not have to add it to your
configuration file. Likewise, if the default setting is not acceptable, you
should add it to your configuration file.
The loadpoint of Pro/ENGINEER has a text directory containing two

configuration files, config.pro and config.sup. You can override the
config.pro file with options in other configuration files, but you cannot
override the config.sup file with other options. Therefore, you must decide
if you want to allow users to override these settings when they start
Pro/ENGINEER. To override a setting, you can place an option that is in
the loadpoint config.pro in a config.pro file in the user’s home directory.
Setting up Your Drawing Setup File

As an additional step in establishing your company standards for
Pro/ENGINEER, you should gather a group of users to decide which
drawing setup file is the most appropriate for your needs. In the text
directory of the loadpoint, Pro/ENGINEER provides a variety of drawing
setup files that are set to certain standards. You should copy each file to a
new name and then make any necessary changes.
Note:
You should not accept the settings in the standard drawing
setup files as final standards. Instead, you should review each
option to determine if the setting is appropriate for your
company.
NOTES
After you change your drawing setup file, you should set it up so that all
new drawings use this setup file by default. To do this, specify the name
of your drawing setup file (FILENAME.DTL) as the value for the
configuration file option drawing_setup_file. Several drawing
setup file options control the appearance of items associated with drawing
standards. You can change the settings of these options at any time. If you
accept the default value, any changes are retroactive; it is, therefore,
important to make changes to the drawing setup file rather than the
individual items. Retaining the default settings makes is easier to update
the drawing later if the standards change.
Note:
You should not accept the values std_ansi, std_din, and
std_iso, etc., as final. Changes to the standards, and different
interpretations, can produce different results. Select the option
that produces the correct appearance in your drawing,
regardless of the name of the setting.
D ra w i n g St a n d a rd s Pag e 1 9- 3
NOTES

The following table lists the available configuration file options that you
can use to set drawing standards in Drawing mode.
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Drawing Standards

allow_rfs_default_gtols_ yes If set to yes, the system creates

always no RFS/Default gtols even if the
ANSI standard does not allow
it.
chamfer_45deg_dim_text ASME/ANSI Controls the appearance of
ISO/DIN dimension text of newly
created dimensions.
JIS
NOTES

The following table lists the drawing setup file options that you can use to
set the standard for gtols, dimension and linear tolerance display, and view
geometry in a drawing.
Table 2: Drawing Setup File Options Controlling Drawing Standards

Options Controlling Geometric Tolerances
gtol_datums STD_ANSI Sets the drafting standard
STD_ANSI_MM for displaying reference
datums in drawings. The
STD_ISO display affects both axes
STD_JIS and datum planes.
STD_DIN
STD_ISO_JIS
STD_ASME
STD_ANSI_DASHED
new_iso_set_datums no If set to “yes,” set draft
yes datums conform to the ISO
standard.
Options Controlling Dimensions and Linear Tolerances
angdim_text_orientation horizontal Controls the placement of
horizontal_outside angular dimensions to
meet the ISO standard.
parallel_above
parallel_outside
parallel_fully_outside Horizontal
Horizontal Outside
Paralle Parallel
l Fully
Parallel Above
NOTES
chamfer_45deg_leadestyle STD_ASME_ANSI Affects the display of the

STD_ISO leader in the drawing and
all 45-degree chamfer
STD_DIN dimensions.
STD_JIS
iso_ordinate_delta no Improves the display of the
yes offset between an ISO
ordinate dimension line
and the witness line. If set
to “yes,” the system uses
the “witness_line_delta”
value. If set to “no,” the
offset differs by about 2
mm.
ord_dim_standard STD_ANSI Sets the display standard
STD_ISO for ordinate dimensions.
When set to “STD_ANSI,”
STD_DIN shows dimensions without
STD_JIS a connecting line (figure
A). Otherwise, places
related ordinate
dimensions along the
connecting line (figure B).
tol_text_height_factor standard Sets the default ratio

number > 0 between the tolerance text
height and dimension text
height, when tolerance is
shown in “plus-minus”
format. For “standard,” the
system uses 1 for ANSI
and 0.6 for ISO standard.
NOTES
tol_text_width_factor standard Sets the default ratio

number > 0 between the tolerance text
width and dimension text
width, when tolerance is
shown in “plus-minus”
format. For “standard,”
the system uses 1 for
ANSI and 0.6 for ISO
standard.
Options Controlling View Geometry

axis_interior_clipping no When set to “no,” axes in
yes the drawing conform to
requirements of the ANSI
Y14.2M standard. If set to
“yes,” you can adjust each
axis individually by
clipping and moving, as
illustrated below.
cutting_line STD_ANSI When set to “std_ansi,”

STD_ANSI_DASHED uses the ANSI standard for
cutting lines. When set to
STD_DIN “std_ansi_dashed,” uses
STD_ISO dashed lines. Otherwise,
STD_JIS uses the DIN standard
cutting line. Displays its
STD_JIS_ALTERNATE thickened portion in white,
and its thin portion in gray.
NOTES
cutting_line_segment 0 Specifies the length in

value drawing units of the
thickened portion of a non-
ANSI cutting line. When
set to “0,” does not show
the thickened portion.
hlr_for_threads no Controls the display of
yes threads in drawings
depending upon whether a
drawing complies with
ISO or ANSI standard (set
by the “thread_standard”
option). When set to “yes,”
thread edges meet ANSI or
ISO standard for Hidden
Line display.
line_style_standard STD_ANSI Controls the text color in
STD_DIN drawings. Unless set to
STD_ANSI, all text is blue
STD_ISO and detailed view
STD_JIS boundaries are yellow.
thread_standard STD_ANSI_IMP Determines whether a
STD_ANSI threaded hole with its axis
perpendicular to the screen
STD_ANSI_IMP_ASSY is displayed as an arc
STD_ISO (ISO) or a circle (ANSI). If
STD_ISO_IMP set to “improved,” does
not display hidden thread
STD_ISO_IMP_ASSY lines if the environment is
set to No Hidden.
Displays them as leader
lines if the environment is
Hidden Line.
view_note STD_ANSI When set to std_din, does
STD_DIN not use the words
SECTION, DETAIL, and
STD_ISO SEE DETAIL in view-
STD_JIS related notes.
NOTES
CREATING DRAWING TEMPLATES

Using the drawing templates, you can greatly improve the efficiency of the
drawing creation process. Once setup, these templates will automate the
process of laying out the views, setting view display, placing standard
notes, placing standard tables, creating snap lines and show dimensions.
Figure 1: A Template and the Resulting Drawing
NOTES
Model Requirements
The drawing templates use standard view names in the models to locate
the views. For instance, you may specify that the first view placed in a
General view oriented to the FRONT view. The model using the template
must contain a view with this exact name, or the view can not be created
with the template.
Template View Definition

These drawing templates are developed using the dialog box shown in the
following figure.
Figure 2: Template View Instructions Dialog Box
To define the first view for the template you will need to specify the
following information:
• Name of the template view

• Type of view to be placed
• The name of the Saved View that should be used to orient the model
• The location for the view
NOTES
Optional information you can specify for the view:
• If a cross-section should be displayed for the view, and the cross-

sectional view name.
• Scale for the view.
• Name of the Explode State for the view.
• Name of the Simplified Rep to base the geometry on.
• The display setting for the view, such as No Hidden or Hidden Line.
• The display setting for tangent edges, such as Tan Phantom.
• If dimensions should be shown in the view. If dimensions are shown,
you can choose to specify:
! If snap lines should be created
! The number of snap lines created
! The initial and incremental spacing of the snap lines
Dimension and Balloon Priority

When you are automatically showing balloons or dimensions, you have
control over the view order the system uses for attempting to show the
dimensions.
View Symbol
By default, all views are represented by the same symbol on the template.
If desired, you can create additional symbols that can be used to represent
the different types of views.
D ra w i n g St a n d a rd s Pag e 1 9-11
NOTES
Goal
To use the drawing file setup options to create standard drawings.
Method
In this exercise, you learn how to use drawing setup file options to set
standards for your drawings by manipulating the display of detail items
such as dimensions, axes, and set datums.
In the second exercise, you create a drawing template.
EXERCISE 1: Setting Drawing Standards through

the Drawing Setup File
Task 1. Retrieve the drawing standards drawing and change some of the
settings that will affect dimensions.
1. Retrieve DRW_STANDARDS.DRW.

appear on the screen, turn them off.
Task 2. Change the display of ordinate dimensions.
1. Click Advanced > Draw Setup .
2. Select the ord_dim_standard option and select std_iso from the

VALUE drop-down list.
3. Apply the changes and close the OPTIONS dialog box. Click
Add/Change > Apply > Close . Repaint the screen. The ordinate
dimensions now appear as shown in the following figure.
NOTES
Figure 3: Ordinate Dimension Standard
Task 3. Change the display of the chamfer dimensions in the drawing

by modifying the drawing configuration file.
1. Using the procedures found in the previous task to change the

chamfer display. In the drawing setup file, set the
chamfer_45deg_leader_style option to std_iso . Apply changes
and close the OPTIONS dialog box.
2. Repaint the screen. The system displays the chamfer dimensions in

their new style. Repeat this step and change the setting to std_din
and std_jis as shown in the following figure.
JIS standard DIN standard ISO standard ANSI-ASME standard
Figure 4: Chamfer Dimensions
Task 4. Modify the drawing setup file to change angular dimensions

display.
1. Set the angdim_text_orientation option to horizontal_outside .

Apply changes and close the OPTIONS dialog box.
2. Repaint the screen. The system displays the angle dimensions in

their new style.
3. Repeat this step and change the setting to parallel_above and

parallel_outside .
NOTES
Task 5. Change the display of cross-sectional cutting lines, datum

planes, and axes.
1. Change the display of cross-sectional cutting lines. Set the

cutting_line to std_din.
2. Set the cutting_line_segment to [1.5]. Apply changes and close

the OPTIONS dialog box.
3. Repaint the screen. The system displays the new cutting line style.
Change cutting_line_segment to [1.0] and note the difference.
In the following figure, the left view shows the ANSI standard and
the right view shows the DIN standard.
Figure 5: Cutting Lines.
4. Change the display of set datum planes. Set gtol_datums to

std_iso_jis. Apply the changes and close the OPTIONS dialog
box.
5. Repaint the screen. The system displays the new datum style. In
the following figure, the left view shows the ANSI standard and
the right view shows the ISO-JIS standard.
Figure 6: Gtol Datums
NOTES
6. Change the display of datum axes. Set axis_interior_clipping to

Yes . Apply changes and close the OPTIONS dialog box.
7. Repaint the screen. The system displays the new axis style. Click
the [Select] icon. Click the axis to highlight it.
8. Use the various drag handles on the axes to move the outside ends
and inside ends of the axes.
9. Place it to an appropriate position, as shown in the following

figure.
Figure 7: Axis Interior Clipping
10. Change the settings of the drawing setup file options that control
arrow style, default font, text height, and text width.
Note:
Changing the drawing units affects many other settings in the
drawing setup file. The options that control text height and text
width, for example, are based on this setting.
NOTES
EXERCISE 2: Creating Drawing Templates
Figure 8 Finished drawing created using drawing templates.
NOTES
Task 1. Create an empty C size drawing used for the template.
2. Enter [assembly_C_template] for the name.
3. Clear the Use Default Template check box and click OK .
4. Accept none as DEFAULT MODEL.
5. Select Empty in the SPECIFY TEMPLATE area.
6. Accept the default Landscape and C size.
7. Click OK to create the drawing.
Task 2. Initialize the template.
1. Click Applications > Template . This activates the template menu

options.
Task 3. Create a Bill of Material table.
1. Click Table > Save/Retrieve > Retrieve and open BOM.TBL. The
table contains a repeat region and report symbols.
2. Locate the table at the top right corner of the drawing sheet. The
position of the BOM needs to be adjusted after adding the format.
3. Click Done/Return from the TABLE menu.
Task 4. Create a note by retrieving a text file.
1. Click Insert > Note > File > Make Note . Locate the note at the top
left corner of the drawing sheet.
2. Open STANDARD_NOTE.TXT located in the current directory.

Notice that the user defined parameter &modeled_by is included
in this note. Click Done/Return .
Task 5. Create two text styles.
1. Click Format > Text Style Gallery > New .
NOTES
2. Create a style used for the table titles.

! Enter [table_title] as the STYLE NAME.
! Define the CHARACTER information. Select CG Times from

the FONT drop down list. Uncheck the Default checkbox and enter
[0.15] for the HEIGHT.
! Define the Justification of the NOTE/DIMENSION. Select

Center from the HORIZONTAL drop down list. Select Middle from the
VERTICAL drop down list. Click OK to close the dialog box.
3. Create a style used for notes.

! Click New from the TEXT STYLE LIBRARY dialog box.
! Enter [note_texts] as the STYLE NAME.
! Define the CHARACTER information. Select leroy from the

FONT drop down list. Enter [0.12] for the HEIGHT. Click OK to close
the dialog box.
4. Close the TEXT STYLE LIBRARY dialog box.
Task 6. Create the default drawing layers.
1. Click View > Layers > Layer > New .
2. Enter [DRAFT_DTM] for the name. Select DRAFT_DTM as the

DEFAULT LAYER TYPES.
3. Create the following layers using the same procedures:

! Click Add to add a new layer. Name: DRAFT_ENTITY,
DEFAULT LAYER TYPES: DRAFT_ENTITY.
! Click Add to add a new layer. Name: SNAP_LINE, DEFAULT

LAYER TYPES: SNAP_LINE.
4. Click OK to close the NEW LAYER dialog boxes.
Task 7. Make the layer display of the drawing associative to that of the
model.
1. In the LAYERS dialog box, click Status > Preferences .
NOTES
2. Clear the Ignore display status of layers in the model check

box. Click OK to close the LAYER STATUS CONTROL dialog box.
3. Click Close to close the LAYERS dialog box.
Task 8. Modify the drawing setup file of the drawing template.
1. Click Advanced > Draw Setup from the TMPLT DWG menu.
2. Set the value of “tol_display” to Yes.
3. Apply the changes and close the window. Click Apply > Close ,
followed by Done/Return .
Task 9. Define the first view for the template.
1. From the TMPLT DWG menu, click Views > Add Template . The
TEMPLATE VIEW INSTRUCTIONS window appears.
2. Enter [front] as the view name.
3. In the VIEW ORIENTATION box, accept the default of General .
4. In the SAVED VIEW NAME box, accept the default of Front .
5. Define the view options:

! Check the X-Section check box. Enter [A] as the name.
! Check the Scale check box. Enter [0.75] as the value.
! Check the Exploded State check box. Accept the default

name.
! Check the Simplified Rep check box. Enter [major_comp] as

the name.
! Check the Model Display check box and select No Hidden .
! Check the Tan Edge Display check box and select Tan Solid .
6. Click Place View and locate the view at the lower left corner of
the sheet.
NOTES
Task 10. Create a second view to generate a projection view.
1. Click New in the TEMPLATE VIEW INSTRUCTIONS dialog box.
2. Enter [top_project] as the view name.
3. In the VIEW ORIENTATION box, select Projection .
4. In the PROJECTION PARENT VIEW box, select FRONT .
5. Define the view options:

! Uncheck X-Section and Explode State check box.
! Check the Model Display check box and select No Hidden .
! Check the Tan Edge Display check box and select Tan Solid .
6. Click Place View and locate the view above the FRONT view.
Task 11. Create a second projection view and a 3-D view.
1. Repeat the above procedures to create a projection view with the

following values:
! View Name = right_project
! View Orientation = Projection
! View Parent = FRONT
! Uncheck X-Section and Explode State check box.
! Model Display = No Hidden
! Tan Edge Display = Tan Solid
2. Click Place View and locate the view to the right of the FRONT
view.
3. Repeat the above procedures to create a 3-D view with the

following values:
! View Name = 3D
! View Orientation = General
! Saved View Name = 3D_EXPLODE
NOTES
! Scale = 0.45
! Exploded State = EXP0002
! Snap Lines = 3. Enter [0.5 ] as both the Initial Offset and the
Increment.
! Balloons
4. Click Place View and locate the view above the

RIGHT_PROJECT view. Click OK to close the dialog box.
5. Specify the BOM balloon region. From the TMPLT DWG menu,
click Table > BOM Region > Set Region > With QTY . Select the
repeat region on top of the BOM table header.
Task 12. Create an assembly drawing using the assembly template.
2. Enter [1000pump_upper_housing] as the name.
3. Leave the Use default template check box checked.
4. Select 1000_UPPER_HOUSING.ASM as the DEFAULT MODEL.
5. Browse and open ASSEMBLY_C_TEMPLATE.DRW as the

template.
6. Click OK . The system creates the drawing using the specified

template. Specifically, the system does the following:
! Fills in the BOM.
! Places views according to the view template definitions.
! The layer, drawing setup file settings and text styles are also
carried into the new drawing.
7. Reposition the balloons and blank the snap line layer.
NOTES
Note:
The advantage of using the layers to control the snap line
display as opposed to using the environment display is that you
can control it in individual views. The disadvantage is, once
the snap line layer is blanked it ceases to work.
Task 13. Add the C size format. Apply text style to the table title.
1. Click File > Open . Open the C_ACME.FRM located in the current
directory.
2. Zoom in on the title block and examine it’s content. The following
drawing labels have been entered and saved in the table.
! &todays_date
! &model_name
! &dwg_name
! &type
! &scale
! &format
! &current_sheet
! &total_sheets
! A user defined parameter &modeled_by is also included.
3. Close the format window.
4. Activate the 1000PUMP_UPPER_HOUSING.ASM window.
5. Click Sheets > Format > Add/Replace . Open the

C_ACME.FRM from the session.
6. The system adds the format and fills in the values for the
parameters in the title block.
7. Reposition the note and BOM if necessary.
NOTES
8. Click Text Style from the FORMAT menu. Apply the table_title
text style to the ACME PUMP CO. text in the title block.
Task 14. Create a C size part drawing template.
1. Open the ASSEMBLY_C_TEMPLATE.DRW window.
2. Click File > Save a Copy . Enter [PART_C_TEMPLATE] as the new

name.
3. Retrieve the PART_C_TEMPLATE.DRW from the working

directory.
4. Initialize the template. Click Applications > Template .
5. Delete the BOM table. Click Table > Delete . Select the BOM
table. Confirm when prompted.
Task 15. Redefine the view templates.
1. Click the [Select] icon.
2. Right-click the FRONT view template and choose Properties .
3. Clear the all the check boxes except for the following 3 options.
Fill in the following information.
! Dimension: Create snap lines. Enter [0.5] for both the Initial
Offset and the Increment.
! Click OK to close the dialog box.
4. Redefine the two projection views using the same procedure and
settings.
5. Set the dimension display priorities.

! When redefining the last projection view. Highlight the
Dimension check box and click Set Display Priorities .
! Using the arrow to set the priorities to be: FRONT,

TOP_PROJECT and RIGHT_ PROJECT.
NOTES
! Click OK to finish.
6. Redefine the 3D view.

! Change the Model “Saved View” Name to 3D.
! Clear the all check boxes, except for the Model Display and
the Tan Edge Display . Click OK to finish.
7. Save the template.
Task 16. Create a part drawing.
1. Create a new drawing. Enter [1000_plunger_cap] as the

drawing name.
2. Specify 1000_PLUNGER_CAP.PRT as the DEFAULT MODEL.
3. Specify PART_C_TEMPLATE.DRW as the TEMPLATE. Click OK .
4. The system creates views and shows dimensions.
5. Reposition the dimensions as necessary. Blank the snap lines layer.
6. Add the C_ACME.FRM format. Click Sheets > Format >

Add/Replace . Open the C_ACME.FRM from the session. Click
Done/Return .
Task 17. Merge the part drawing to the assembly drawing.
1. Active the assembly drawing.
2. Click Advanced > Merge .
3. Select the 1000_PLUNGER_CAP.DRW and click Open .
4. Investigate the added sheet.
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can use configuration and drawing setup options to control the
display of items associated with drafting standards.
• You can implement company drawing standards using the drawing
templates.
Module
20
Plotting
In this module, you learn to how to create plot files.
Objectives
• Plot a drawing interactively.

• Configure the plotter.
• Plot using the Batch utilities.
Page 20-1
NOTES
PLOTTING INTERACTIVELY
Using Pro/ENGINEER, you can create plot files of the current object
(part, drawing, assembly, etc.) and send them to the print queue of a
plotter.
Interactive plotting provides flexibility in creating a plot file because you

can scale, clip, or output the plot to the screen to preview it. Once you
have properly set up all of the plotting options, you can send the plot
directly to the plotter from within Pro/ENGINEER.
Using the PRINT dialog box, you can specify the configurations such as
print destination, sheets information and plotter command.
Figure 1: Print Dialog Box
Print Destination
Using the [Command and Setting], you can specify an existing printer
or add new printer types, as shown in the following figure.
NOTES
Figure 2 Add Printer Type.
Configuring the Plotter

After specifying the appropriate printer, you can use the PRINTER
CONFIGURATION dialog box to configure the selected printer as shown in
Figure 3: Printer Configuration
The Page Tab

You can specify the following information concerning the plotted page:
Plo t t i n g Pag e 2 0- 3
NOTES
• Dimensions of the paper – You can specify the size of the sheet to
which you are going to print (for example, you can print a C-size
drawing on an A-size sheet) or create a customized size.
• Offset on the paper – You can specify the offset distance of the plot
from the origin.
• Label to include on the plot – You can include a label on the plot
and control its height. The system prints the label as NAME:<OBJECT
DATE> and shifts the plot to the right, which may clip some geometry
along the right border.
• Units of the paper – You can define the variable plot size in inches or
millimeters.
The Printer Tab

You can specify the following information concerning the printer:
• Pen information – You can select the pen table file to control which
pens the system uses for different types of lines. You can also set the
pen velocity to a printer that has pen speed control.
• Cutter information – You can specify that you want to install a cutter
on a plotter. It is only active when a plotter that supports the hardware
has been selected.
• Handshake information – You can access either the software plotter
handshake mode or the hardware plotter handshake mode.
• Sheet type – You can specify the type of paper as cut-sheet or roll, it
is only active when a roll feed plotter driver has been selected.
• Rotation – You can properly print a landscape orientation drawing on
a portrait type laser printer or a portrait orientation drawing on a
landscape type laser printer.
Model Tab
You can specify the following information concerning the model you are
plotting:
• Type of plot – You can select the following plot types:

! Full Plot – Creates a plot of the entire object.
! Clipped – Creates a clipped plot by defining a box around the
area to plot. This area appears on paper in its normal location
relative to the lower-left corner.
NOTES
! Based on Zoom – Creates a scaled, clipped plot based on the

paper size and the zoom setting in the graphics window. This is
the default setting.
! Plot Area – Creates a plot by shifting the area inside the clip
box to the lower-left corner of the paper and scaling the clipped
area to match the user-specified scale.
! Model Size – Scales the plot to a specified model scale. For
example, if you enter 0.25, the system creates a plot of the
model to ¼ scale. This choice is valid only for 3-D objects.
• Plot scale – You can specify the plot scale in a range from 0.01 to 100
(2-D only). In addition, you can also generate a segmented plot and
control whether or not the system plots it with the drawing. A
segmented plot plots the drawing in real size, breaking it up onto
separate sheets.
• Layers – You can control whether the system plots all visible layers or
only the one specified by ID.
• Plot quality – You can specify the quality of the output file by
controlling the amount of checking that Pro/ENGINEER performs for
overlapping lines.
To File
By checking the To File check box, you can save an output plot file. If
you do not check To File , the system deletes the plot file after it issues the
Plotter command.
When you print to a file, you can create a single file or a separate file for
each sheet of the drawing, as well as append to an existing plot file.
Sheets
You can specify which sheet of the drawing to print. You can print all of
the sheets, the current sheet, or a range of sheets (for example, 11-14).
Number of Copies
When you send the plot directly to a printer, you can enter a positive
number between 1 and 99 to specify the number of copies that you need.
Plotter command
When you plot to a printer, you can use the Plotter command field to
specify the system command that sends a file to the printer. You can enter
NOTES
the command in this field, or use configuration file options

“plotter_command” to specify the command.
Plotting Using the Pro/BATCH Utility

Using the Pro/BATCH utility, you can process a large number of
Pro/ENGINEER files in a batch mode and create output files in a variety
of formats. You can schedule the batch process to run on a delayed start
time utilizing system resources during off-peak hours. The Pro/BATCH
utility outputs files as plot files, IGES, DXF, STL, VDA, and any of the
formats that you can create interactively from within Pro/ENGINEER.
The Pro/BATCH utility retrieves the specified list of objects and creates
the output file without requiring any further interaction with you.
When using the Pro/BATCH utility, you should keep in mind the
following:
• License requirements – You must have an available Pro/ENGINEER

license and access to all modules required for the scheduled
operations.
• Local version numbers – Filenames listed for processing do not
require the local version number. The system retrieves the latest
version of the object as it normally would in Pro/ENGINEER. If you
specify a local version of the file, Pro/BATCH uses that specific
version of the file.
• Configuration files – Pro/BATCH reads the configuration files from
the same locations as a Pro/ENGINEER session, including the current
working directory from which the Pro/BATCH utility is executed.
• Search paths – The Pro/BATCH utility uses the Pro/ENGINEER
search paths to find the files in the list. The system creates output files
in the current directory unless you specify the destination directory in
the Pro/BATCH interface.
• Log files – The system generates log files for each Pro/BATCH
session listing each command line in the file followed by a success or
failure exit code.
Working in the Pro/BATCH Environment

Pro/BATCH allows you to define the actions that you want the system to
perform in the batch session, as well as schedule the job for the
appropriate time. When you execute the pro_batch command, the
system brings you into the Pro/BATCH environment. You can then create
NOTES
batch files and save them, using the same batch process repeatedly, if
necessary.
To create a batch file, you need to start Pro/BATCH, set up general

preferences. You can then create the batch file, specify the files on which
to perform the action, set up the options for each action, and schedule the
batch process.
Starting Pro/BATCH
To start the Pro/BATCH utility, enter the command [pro_batch] in a
system window. The Pro/BATCH interface should then appear on your
screen as shown in the following figure.
Figure 4: Pro/BATCH Dialog Box
Setting up Preferences
You should then set up the general preferences for the batch file to define
the default action that you want the system to perform on the objects.
• The PREFERENCE menu allows the user to set the default Option
Preference for all the available actions in the Pro/BATCH, shown in
the following fugure.
• The General preference tab defines the default action for new objects
added to the batch file.
• If you include objects for plotting in the batch file, you must enter the
PLOTTER COMMAND on the Plot options page.
NOTES
Figure 5: Option Preference Dialog Box
Creating a New Batch File

After defining the preferences, you can create a new batch file. The name
of the batch file should be entered in the Batch File box in the lower left-
hand corner of the PRO/BATCH dialog box, as shown in the following
figure. Batch files can be saved and re-executed, eliminating the need to
continually gather all the required files.
Adding Objects
You should then specify the files on which you want the system to
perform the actions.
• Objects are added to the batch file using the Browse button on the
FILE pull-down menu. The BROWSE dialog box allows the user to
browse the file system selecting and adding objects to the batch file.
• Each object is added as a separate line item with an action (plot, IGES,
etc.) and the configuration options for that action. The default action is
defined on the General preference tab. The options for that action are
defined on the corresponding tab in the OPTION PREFERENCE dialog
box.
NOTES
Defining the Action and Options

The OPTIONS menu allows the user to define the action to be taken for
selected objects. Configuration options for that action can also be
specified. This is useful when the user need to specify actions and
configurations that are different from the default.
Pro/ENGINEER Command
A valid Pro/ENGINEER command must be entered to tell the Pro/BATCH
utility which license of Pro/ENGINEER to execute.
Saving the Batch file

After you finish specifying options for a batch file, you should save it.
Scheduling the Start of the Batch Process

You can set the exact amount of time that should elapse before the batch
process starts.

This option lists the Pro/ENGINEER configuration file options that affect
plotting. You can add them to the loadpoint configuration file and set them
as read-only for other Pro/ENGINEER users. Specific projects may
require unique plotter configuration setups. If you place the appropriate
configuration file in the project directory, the system can read those
configuration settings when you execute it from that directory.
NOTES
Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Plotting

delete_after_plotting yes Determines if the system
no (default) deletes a plot file after
plotting. When set to
“yes,” the system
automatically deletes a plot
file after successfully
plotting it.
edge_display_quality very_high Controls the edge display
normal (default) quality for wireframe and
hidden line removal. It also
high affects screen display.
low
interface_quality value (0-3) Determines the default
quality check the system
uses to check for
overlapping lines in a plot
or 2-D export.
pen#_line_weight (# = 1-8) Sets the weights of the
value (1-16) entities plotted to pens 1
through eight to a value of
1 through 16, where 1 is
the thinnest, 16 being the
thickest in increments of
.0006 in. Default values
are Pen 1 4, Pen 2 1, Pen 3
2, Pen 4 3, Pen 5 2, Pen 6
3, Pen 7 1, Pen 8 4. The
default thickness for Pen 1
is .0024 in.
pen_slew value Sets the pen speed for both
x and y directions for
plotters that are compatible
with this option.
pen_slew_xy value and value Sets the pen speed for x
and y directions separately
for plotters that are
compatible with this
option. The first value is
for the x direction and the
second is for the y
direction.
pen_table_file path and name Specifies a default pen
mapping table (table.pnt)
file.
NOTES
plotter plot driver name Specifies the plotter driver

as shown in the list of
supported devices in the
Plot dialog box.
plotter_command command Specifies a command to
initiate the plot from the
operating system. (for
example, lp, lpr etc.)
plot_file_dir directory name Specifies the directory to
where the system writes
plot files.
plot_names yes When set to yes, system
no (default) gives plot files extensions
to identify plot format.
(.ps, .hp, .hp2, .ver etc.).
use_8_plotter_pens yes Allows full support of 8
no (default) pens (uses 4 pens by
default).
use_software_line_ yes When set to “yes,” plots
fonts no (default) the exact line style used in
Pro/ENGINEER. When
set to “no,” the plotter
plots lines using its own
font.
Plo t t i n g Pag e 2 0-11

NOTES
Goal
To plot a drawing interactively, and by using batch utilities.
Method
In this exercise, you create plot files for drawings. You create plot files
manually and by using the Pro/BATCH tool.
EXERCISE 1: Creating Plot Files for Drawings

Task 1. Create a plot file by manually changing the settings through the
PRINT dialog box. Create a plot file for both sheets of the drawing on A-
size sheets.
1. Retrieve PLUNGER_BODY_MARKUP.DRW. If you have finished

PLUNGER_BODY.DRW.
2. Set up the print configuration to print to an A-size sheet. Click File

> Print .
3. Set Generic Postscript as the destination. Click [Commands

and Settings] from the PRINT dialog box and select Generic
Postscript .
4. Click Configure… . Click the Page tab and select A from the SIZE
drop-down list.
5. Ensure that the system plots the entire drawing, regardless of

whether you zoom in on it. Click Model and select Full Plot from
the PLOT drop-down list.
6. Confirm the With Format check box is selected and click OK to

close the PRINTER CONFIGURATION dialog box.
7. In the PRINT dialog box, select the To file check box, clear the To
printer check box, and select All for the SHEETS. Click OK .
NOTES
8. Create a plot file. Accept the defaults Create Single File and
[PLUNGER_BODY_MARKUP.PLT] (depending on the file you are
working on) as the name of the plot file and click OK .
9. Open a system window to make sure that the plot file is in the
current directory. Click Window > Open System Window from
the pull-down menu.
! For DOS, enter [dir *.plt*] to list all of the postscript files
in the directory.
! For UNIX, enter [ls *.plt*] to list all of the postcript files.
10. Enter [exit] to close the system window.
11. Exit Pro/ENGINEER.
Task 2. Start the Pro/BATCH utility and create a new batch file, then
set up the preferences for plot files.
1. Open up a system window and begin the Pro/BATCH utility. Open

a system window and enter [pro_batch] at the command line.
2. Create a new batch file. In the PRO/BATCH dialog box enter

[DRW_PLOT] as the name in the BATCH FILE box.
3. Specify the command to start Pro/ENGINEER. Type the command

used to start Pro/E in the PRO/ENGINEER COMMAND box. (For
Windows make sure to include the .BAT extension.)
4. Define the default option preferences for this file. Click

Preference > Set Preference .
5. Define the default action for this batch file as plotting. Click the
General tab and select Plot from the DEFAULT ACTION drop-
down list.
6. Define the preferences for plot files. Click the Plot tab. Select
DEFAULT from the PLOTTER drop-down list, select C as the
PAPER SIZE, select 3 as the OUTPUT QUALITY, and type [1.0] as
the USER SCALE. Click OK .
Task 3. Specify the files to plot during this batch process. After
selecting the files, set up the options for each action.
1. Specify the list of drawings to plot. Click File > Browse .

NOTES
2. In the DIRECTORIES area, navigate to the FUND_DRAW_320

directory by double clicking the directory name or drive name. Use
the DRIVE drop-down list to select an appropriate drive as
necessary.
3. Filter for drawings. Select drawing file (*.drw) from the FILTER
drop-down list.
4. Select the BOLT_REPLACE, screw, and threaded bolt drawings.

Holding down the <CTRL> key, select BOLT_REPLACE. DRW,
SCREW.DRW, and THREADED_BOLT.DRW.
5. Click Add Objects . Click Close Browser when you have

finished.
6. Change the plot options for the screw and threaded bolt drawings
to plot to an A-size sheet. Press and hold <SHIFT> key and select
SCREW.DRW and THREADED_BOLT.DRW.
7. Click Options > Set Option from the pull-down menu. Change
only the plotting option for the sheet size.
8. Select A from the PAPER SIZE drop-down list and click OK . The
OPTION column changes from 'default' to 'userdefined.'
Task 4. Save the batch file and schedule it to start immediately.
1. Click File > Save in the PRO/BATCH dialog box.
2. Execute the batch process. Click Schedule > Start the Task .
3. Specify the task to start immediately. In the SCHEDULE dialog

box, type [0] as the number of hours to delay before starting the
batch process.
4. Click OK to start the task. If there is no printer set up in the

training facility, change the action to IGES and proceed.
5. Exit from batch processing. Click File > Exit > OK from the
PRO/BATCH dialog box.
6. In the system window, list the contents of the batch file saved in
the pro/batch start up directory.
! Open up a system window if necessary.
! Navigate to the directory where you entered [pro_batch], if
necessary.
NOTES
! For the DOS window, enter [type pro_batch.log.1].

! For UNIX, enter [more pro_batch.log.1].
7. After viewing the log file, close the system window.

NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can interactively plot drawing, parts, and assemblies.

• You can plot using the Batch utilities.
Module
21
Markup Model
In this module, you learn how to create engineering markups. You
also learn how to superimpose drawings using overlays.
Objectives
• Create markups for different types of objects.

• Save and retrieve markups.
• Superimpose drawings with overlays.
Page 21-1
NOTES
ENGINEERING MARKUPS
A markup is an informal sketch that you can create in Pro/ENGINEER
and superimpose over an object, as shown in the following figure. Each
markup acts like a set of transparent sheets on top of a drawing sheet. It
enables you to superimpose text and sketched entities in a variety of colors
to indicate where changes might be required.
Figure 1: Markup Example
Creating a Markup
You can create a markup for a part, assembly, drawing, report, layout, or
manufacturing model. However, the object that you use for the markup is
read-only, which means that you cannot make any changes to your part or
drawing while in Markup mode. You can only indicate the changes that
NOTES
To create a markup, you must select an object and then specify a name for
the markup. The default name is your login name. The system creates the
file and attaches a .MRK extension to it to signify that it is a markup. You
can then set up the markup by specifying the color, text height, and line
width to use for the markup entities.
After setting up the markup, you can create notes and sketched entities
(sketch, curve, arrow, or line) on the markup, as well as modify, move, or
delete entities. If your drawing contains multiple sheets, you can mark up
all of the sheets at the same time and in the same markup. You do not need
to have a separate markup for each sheet.
Saving and Viewing a Markup

When you save a markup, Pro/ENGINEER saves the specified markup
only; you must save other markups separately. It saves all of the sketched
entities and notes with the markup file, not the object. Because the object
does not change, the system does not save it with the markup.
Retrieving Markups
When you retrieve a drawing that has an associated markup,
Pro/ENGINEER does not inform you that a markup exists for it because it
considers the drawing to be independent of the markup. Therefore, you
may want to implement a notification system for your users using email,
voice mail, memos, or a database manager.
When you retrieve a specific markup, Pro/ENGINEER lists the markup

name with the related model in brackets; then it automatically retrieves the
related model and the markup. You can then toggle between different
markups for that model without having to open each individually.
Naming Conventions
Pro/ENGINEER does not automatically create a new version of a markup
when you create a new version of the associated drawing. Therefore, you
may want to create a new markup with each version of your drawing to
maintain current markups.
M a rku p M o d e l Pag e 2 1- 3
NOTES
OVERLAYS
Using overlays, you can superimpose the image of one drawing on top of
another to view changes among the source drawing, the drawing in which
you created the overlay, and a target drawing. This is a useful tool for
viewing the differences between family table drawings in which you have
replaced the views from one instance with another. An overlaid view
contains all detail items from the source drawing, and it automatically
updates to reflect any changes.
When using overlays, keep in mind the following:
• Overlays are read-only in the target drawing.

• You cannot select an overlay for any drawing operation in the target
drawing.
• If the size of the target drawing sheet is different from that of the
source drawing, they both consume the same graphics area. The
system rescales the model from one size to another.
• You can place overlays from multiple drawings on individual sheets
that contain no detailing that was originally in the target drawing. This
allows you to create a master target drawing with multiple sheets
composed of overlays of the source drawings.
NOTES
Goal
To create markups for a drawing in order to indicate the changes needs
to be made.
Method
In this exercise, you create two markups for the plunger body drawing.
The first markup specifies the removal of the triangular symbol and
modification of the detailed view scales. The second markup specifies the
modification of the scale of the 3-D view.
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Markup on a Drawing

Task 1. Create a new markup for the plunger body drawing. Sketch a
circle and an arrow around the triangular symbol
1. Create a new markup for the plunger body drawing. Click File >
New > Markup . Enter [CHANGE_A] as the name and click OK .
2. Open PLUNGER_BODY_MARKUP.DRW. If you have finished the

plunger body drawing earlier, you can work on
PLUNGER_BODY.DRW.
3. Define the settings for the first markup. Change the color, the text
height, and the line width. Click Setup > Color > Green. Click
Text Height and enter [.3]. Click Line Width and enter [.1].
4. Sketch a freehand circle around the triangular symbol in the lower

left view on Sheet 1. Click Sketch and drag the mouse while
pressing the left mouse button. To finish the sketch, release the left
mouse button.
5. Create an arrow pointing to the freehand sketch that you just

created. Click Arrow and click the left mouse button to specify the
position of the arrowhead. Move the mouse to another position and
click the left mouse button to create the other end of the arrow.
NOTES
Task 2. Create a note specifying the removal of the symbol from the
drawing. In addition, create a note and two arrows specifying a change in
the scale of the detailed views.
1. Click Note and pick near the end of the arrow for the location of
the note.
2. Enter [REMOVE THIS SYMBOL] as the first line of the note and
enter [FROM THE DRAWING] as the second line of the note.
3. Press <ENTER> on a blank line to finish the note, as shown in the

following figure:
Figure 2: Remove Symbol
4. Switch to Sheet 2 to add more geometry to this markup. Click

Setup > Switch Sht > Next until Sheet 2 appears.
5. Create a note between the two detailed views to specify the

adjustment of the scales. Click Done/Return > Note and locate the
note between the detailed views.
6. Enter [CHANGE THE SCALE] as the first line of the note, [FOR
THESE VIEWS] as the second line, and [TO 5.00] as the third
line.
7. Create arrows pointing from the note to DETAIL 1 and DETAIL 2,

as shown in the following figure using techniques discussed
earlier.
NOTES
Figure 3 Change Scales
8. Save this markup.
9. Click Done/Return to finish this markup.
Task 3. Create a new markup that specifies a modification of the scale

for the 3-D view, then change the line width and text style.
1. Click New from the ENTER MARKUP menu. Enter [CHANGE_B]

as the name of the markup.
2. Switch sheets to Sheet 1 of the drawing. Click Setup > Switch Sht
> Previous > Done/Return .
3. Create a curve surrounding the 3-D view on Sheet 1. Click Curve ,

then pick points through which the curve should pass using the left
mouse button, as shown in the following figure. Click the middle
mouse button to finish.
4. Create an arrow pointing to the curve that you just created using
techniques discussed earlier.
5. Create a note at the end of the arrow. Enter [CHANGE THE SCALE]
as the first line of the note and [TO 1.25] as the second line of the
note, as shown in the following figure.
NOTES
Figure 4: Change View Scale
6. Change the line width of the curve and the arrow that you just
created. Click Modify > Line Width , pick the curve and the arrow,
and click Done Sel . Enter [.05] as the new line width.
7. Click Setup > Color > Cyan to change the color of the new
markup to light blue.
8. Change the justification of the note text and increase the text
height. Click Modify > Note > Text Style . Pick both lines of the
note and click Done Sel .
9. Enter [.25] for the HEIGHT and click Center from the JUSTIFY
HORIZ drop-down list.
10. Click Apply > Close .
11. Save this markup and close the window.
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can create a markup of a drawing.

• You can display more than one markup simultaneously.
• You can overlay a drawing on top of another.
Appendix
A
Creating ISO-Standard Drawings
In this module, you learn how to create a drawing that conforms to
ISO standards.
Objectives
• Use the configuration file and drawing setup options to create an

ISO standard drawing.
• Create tolerance tables at the part and drawing levels.
• Create ISO standard surface finish symbols.
Page A-1
NOTES
CONFIGURATION FILES AND DRAWING SETUP

FILES
Configuration file options affect all modes in Pro/ENGINEER globally,
while drawing setup file options set drawing parameters that are unique to
every drawing. You must modify both files to create a correct drawing in
accordance with the ISO/DIN standard.
Using Configuration File Options

By setting configuration file options in Drawing mode, you can display
chamfer dimensions and reference dimensions in accordance with the ISO
standard, as well as show 3-D views in an isometric or dimetric projection.
Displaying Chamfer Dimensions

Using the configuration file option chamfer_45deg_dim_text, you
can control the format of the 45-degree chamfer dimension in any mode. If
you change the default value ASME/ANSI to ISO/DIN, you can display
chamfer dimensions according to the ISO standard, as shown in the
following figure.
ASME/ANSI ISO/DIN
Figure 1: Chamfer_45deg_dim_text
Showing Reference Dimensions in Parentheses

Using the configuration file option parenthesize_ref_dim, you can
show reference dimensions in parentheses in accordance with the ISO
standard to distinguish them from other dimensions. If you set the value to
yes, the system encloses reference dimensions in parentheses.
Pag e A- 2 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g
NOTES
Showing 3-D Views

Using the configuration file options orientation, y_angle, and
x_angle, you can display 3-D views in Drawing mode in an isometric
projection or dimetric projection. To create either view type, set the value
of orientation to user_def to add the option User_Def to the
ENVIRONMENT dialog box, in addition to Trimetric and Isometric . For
the isometric view, set y_angle to -30, and x_angle to 30. For the
dimetric view, set y_angle to -42, and x_angle to 7.
Using Drawing Setup File (.dtl) Options

By setting drawing setup file options, you can create ISO-standard
drawings. The following table lists the available drawing setup file options
according to their function. The first column gives the name of the option,
while the second column specifies the value.
Ap p e n d i x A Pag e A- 3
NOTES
Table 1: Drawing Setup File Options for ISO-Standard Drawings

OPTION NAME OPTION VALUE
Options controlling views and their annotations:
half_view_line symmetry
detail_circle_line_style phantomfont
projection_type first_angle
view_note std_iso
view_scale_format ratio_colon
Options controlling cross-sections and their arrows:
crossec_arrow_style head_online
crossec_arrow_place above_tail
cutting_line std_iso
cutting_line_segment 10
Options controlling solids shown in views:
hlr_for_threads yes
thread_standard std_iso
Options controlling leaders:
draw_arrow_style filled
Options controlling gtol information:
gtol_datums std_iso_jis
new_iso_set_datums yes
Options controlling dimensions:
angdim_text_orientation parallel_fully_outside
chamfer_45deg_leader_style std_iso or std_din
iso_ordinate_delta yes
lead_trail_zero std_metric
ord_dim_standard std_iso
text_orientation parallel
tol_text_height_factor 0.6
tol_text_width_factor 0.6
Miscellaneous options:
decimal_marker comma
line_style_standard std_iso
weld_symbol_standard std_iso
NOTES
TOLERANCE TABLES
You can create dimensional tolerances using a set of tolerance tables that
the system assigns to each model in either the ANSI or ISO standard.
Pro/ENGINEER assigns the ANSI tolerances based on the nominal
dimension’s number of digits. However, tolerance tables drive the ISO-
standard tolerances.
Using Tolerance Tables for ISO Standards

The system loads tolerance tables into the part file when you create an
ISO-standard model if you have set the configuration file option
tolerance_standard to ISO (the default is ANSI). However, you
can also switch the tolerance standard from ANSI to ISO using the Tol
Setup option in Part mode, Assembly mode, or Drawing mode. Since the
tables determine how the model regenerates, the system stores them
permanently with the model and controls only the driving dimensions.
In general, four types of tolerance tables are available. The General

Dimension and Broken Edge tolerance table exist just once for every model.
However, you can have several different holes and shafts tables per model.
When you create a dimension, the system assigns it automatically to the
General table. You can switch the tolerance table reference of the
dimension to any other table using Modify, DimCosmetics, Assign Tol .
You can also display or change the tolerance table as illustrated in the
following table.
Table 2: Tolerance Tables

Parameter Value
TABLE_TYPE GENERAL_DIMS or BROKEN_EDGES
TABLE_NAME DEFAULTS
TABLE_UNIT MILLIMETER
RANGE_UNIT MILLIMETER
DESCRIPTION 0.5 - 3 3-6

FINE 0.05 0.05
MEDIUM 0.1 0.1
COARSE 0.2 0.3
VERY COARSE - 0.5
NOTES
Each ISO-standard model also needs an extra attribute called the model
class, which determines the general coarseness of the model (fine,
medium, coarse, or very coarse), as shown in the following table. The
system uses the tolerance class in conjunction with the dimension value
when retrieving tolerances for General or Broken Edge dimensions. The
configuration file option tolerance_class sets the default tolerance
class for ISO models.
After you load a new table, the system assigns the new dimension
tolerances and you can regenerate the model. If you modify a dimension
tolerance, it deletes the tolerance table reference for that dimension and
the tolerance value remains the same until you modify it again or reassign
the tolerance table. The configuration file option
tolerance_table_dir sets the default directory for a user-defined
tolerance table.
Displaying Dimensions
All holes and shafts tables overwrite existing tables. The following figure
illustrates how Pro/ENGINEER displays dimensions in ISO models,
which are driven by holes or shafts tables.
Figure 2: Display of Dimensions with Tolerances
When changing the tolerance table reference, keep in mind the following:
• If a holes or shafts tolerance table drives a dimension’s tolerances, you

cannot show it in a plus-minus symmetric format. The system assumes
that the General and Broken Edge tables have symmetric values.
• If a dimension value falls outside the ranges specified in the table, the
system uses the closest range to obtain tolerances.
NOTES
• If you place a dimension tolerance in a family table, the system deletes

its tolerance table reference. Also, if you switch a model from ANSI to
ISO, or vice versa, it preserves the tolerances in the family tables and
does not assign a table reference to those dimensions.
ISO SURFACE FINISH SYMBOLS

To create an ISO-standard surface finish symbol, you must place an
instance of a symbol using a generic ISO surface finish symbol consisting
of building blocks, or groups. The following table presents a brief
overview of groups that you can use to create an ISO surface finish
symbol (group names are in bold print).
Table 3: ISO Surface Finish Symbol Groups

GROUPS DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION
UNSPECIFIED Surface can be produced by
any method.
LEADER Used to create a symbol
leader.
MACHINED Material removal by

machining is required.
NO_REMOVAL Material removal prohibited.
LAY Designates the direction of lay:

PARALLEL - Approximately
parallel to the line representing
the surface to which the
symbol is applied.
PERP - Approximately
perpendicular to the line
representing the surface to
which the symbol is applied.
ANGULAR - Angular in both
directions to the line
representing the surface to
which the symbol is applied.
MULTI_DIR - Multi-
directional.
CIRCULAR - Approximately
circular relative to the center
of the surface to which the
symbol is applied.
RADIAL - Approximately
NOTES
GROUPS DESCRIPTION ILLUSTRATION

radial to the center of the
surface to which the symbol is
applied.
NON_DIR - Nondirectional,
or protuberant.
ROUGHNESS Indicates permissible
roughness range (micrometers
or inches):
AVERAGE - Roughness
average.
MAX_MIN - Maximum and
minimum roughness average
values.
REMOVAL Material removal by
ALLOW machining that is required to
produce the surface
(millimeters or inches).
SAMPLE_LEG Roughness sampling length or
cutoff rating (millimeters or
inches).
OTHER_ROUGH Text used for specifying other
roughness.
PROD_METHOD Text used for specifying
production method.
NOTES
Goal
To create a drawing to ISO standards.
Method
In this exercise, you create a drawing that follows the ISO standard by
changing the drawing setup file and defining ISO tolerance tables for hole
or shaft dimensions.
EXERCISE 1: Creating a Drawing in Accordance

with the ISO Standard
Task 1. Retrieve the ISO_DRAWING.PRT in Part mode as shown in
the following figure, and obtain information about how the part was
created.
Figure 3: Part with Tolerances
1. Turn on the tolerance display using the ENVIRONMENT dialog

box. Display the MODEL TREE as necessary.
2. Check the dimensions of the first protrusion. Click Modify and

select PROTRUSION ID 9 from the MODEL TREE.
NOTES
3. Continue to use modify to check the dimensions of hole id 465.

Notice that the diameter dimension is displayed in plus/minus
format.
4. Check the remaining features using the MODEL TREE.
Task 2. Change the tolerance standard from ANSI to ISO. Since the
cover will hold bearings, you will change additional dimensions to display
a tolerance.
1. Click Utilities > Options to change the configuration file.
2. Add the configuration file options.

Table 4
OPTION VALUE
CHAMFER_45DEG_DIM_TEXT ISO/DIN
ORIENTATION USER_DEFAULT
Y_ANGLE -42
X_ANGLE 7
3. Save the file and name it [ISO_CONFIG]. Apply the changes and
close the OPTIONS dialog box.
4. Change the tolerance standard to ISO. Click Set Up > Tol Setup >
> Standard > ISO/DIN . Click <Enter> to regenerate the part.
5. Assign the model to a tolerance class. This part is used in an

engine, and the general coarseness is medium. Click Model Class
> MEDIUM . Press <Enter> to regenerate the part.
6. The dimensions that had their tolerances displayed have been

added to the General tolerance table. To view the values inside the
table, click Tol Tables > Show > General Dims . Click File > Exit
to close the table.
Task 3. Retrieve a hole tolerance table so that it can be used in two

dimensions.
1. Click Retrieve . Select the TOLERANCE TABLE DIRECTORY from

the LOOK IN drop-down list and select HOLE_J.TTL.
2. Click Open . Press <Enter> to regenerate the part.
Pag e A- 1 0 F u n d a m e n t a l s o f D ra wi n g
NOTES
3. Repeat the procedures to apply a shaft tolerance table SHAFT_H to

the model. Click Done/Return > Done to return to PART menu.
4. Assign J6 hole tolerance table the to the ∅50 dimensions of the

bearing. Click Modify > DimCosmetics > AssignTol > Holes and
enter [j6] in the message area.
5. Select HOLE ID465 and HOLE ID 520 from the MODEL TREE to
show the dimensions. Pick the two ∅50 dimensions as shown in
the following figure. Click Done from the MODIFY menu.
Figure 4: Changing the Two Diameter Dimensions
6. Save the changes.
Task 4. Open the ISO_DRAWING, start the conversion to an ISO

standard drawing, and change the drawing setup file in accordance with an
ISO standard.
1. Open the file ISO_DRAWING.DRW.
2. Modify the existing drawing setup file to reflect the values shown
in the following table.
Ap p e n d i x A Pag e A-11
NOTES
Table 5: Changing the Drawing Setup File to the ISO Standard

drawing_text_height 3.5
text_thickness 0.35
detail_circle_line_style PHANTOMFONT
projection_type FIRST_ANGLE
view_note STD_ISO
view_scale_format RATIO_COLON
crossec_arrow_length 6
crossec_arrow_style HEAD_ONLINE
crossec_arrow_width 3.5
crossec_text_place ABOVE_TAIL
cutting_line STD_ISO
cutting_line_segment 10
hlr_for_threads YES
thread_standard STD_ISO
angdim_text_orientation PARALLEL_FULLY_OUTSIDE
chamfer_45deg_leader_style STD_DIN
dim_leader_length 5
dim_text_gap 1.2
iso_ordinate_delta YES
lead_trail_zeros STD_METRIC
ord_dim_standard STD_ISO
text_orientation PARALLEL
tol_display YES
tol_text_height_factor 0.6
tol_text_width_factor 0.6
witness_line_delta 1.0
witness_line_offset 1.5
draw_arrow_length 3.5
draw_arrow_style FILLED
draw_arrow_width 1.5
draw_attach_sym_height DEFAULT
draw_attach_sym_width DEFAULT
draw_dot_diameter 1.0
leader_elbow_length 6
axis_line_offset 4
circle_axis_offset 4
radial_pattern_axis_circle YES
gtol_datums STD_ISO_JIS
decimal_marker COMMA
drawing_units MM
3. Apply the changes then save a copy of the drawing setup file.
Enter [ISO] for the name.
4. Repaint the screen and notice the changes. Close the OPTIONS
dialog box.
NOTES
Task 5. Note that the cross section projected view did not change from
third angle to first angle projected, as specified in the drawing setup file.
To avoid recreating the view and the dimensions. You can change the
view orientation by changing the view type to general first and back to
projection.
1. Click Views> Modify View> View Type to modify the view type.
Pick the cross section projected view.
2. Click General> Done to define the type as general.
3. Click Done from the XSEC TYPE menu to leave the existing cross
section definition.
4. Modify the view type again. Click View Type . Pick the same view.
5. Click Projection> Done to set the view type back to projected.
6. Click Yes to allow the system to reorient the detail view.
7. Click Done from the XSEC TYPE menu to leave the existing cross
section definition.
8. Resolve the conflict in the views’ parent. Select the general view to
the left of the view you are changing.
Task 6. The cut direction for the cross section is defined by the views
initial orientation. Change the orientation for the cross section view so that
it is correct.
1. From the VIEW MODIFY menu, click X-Section> Flip and pick
the projected views cross-hatching to redisplay the cross section by
modifying it.
2. Return to the top level menu. Click Done/Return .
Task 7. Some of the notes on the drawing do not comply with ISO
standards. Change the notes to meet compliance.
1. Modify some of the notes on the drawing. Click the [Select]

icon and select the DETAIL C. Right click and choose Properties .
Remove the text field containing the word detail.
2. Blank the words SECTION A-A using a layer. Click View>

Layers . Click , enter [Note] for layer name and click OK .
NOTES
3. Associate the note to the layer. Click Item and Add . Select 2D
Items . Then pick the note SECTION A-A and click Done Sel and
Done/Return .
4. Change the display of the layer. Select the NOTE layer from the list
then click [Blank]. Click Save Status > Close .
Task 8. Set the dimension offsets to be correct according to ISO

standards.
1. Click Insert > Snap Line > Att View and pick the four cyan view
boarders in the projection view.
2. Click Done Sel to create snap lines in the projected view to control
the position of the dimensions.
3. Enter [10] as the distance of the first snap line, enter [5] as the
number of snap lines, and enter [8] as the distance between snap
lines.
4. Click Done/Return .
5. Move the dimension to snap. Click the [Select] icon and select
the dimensions so that they appear as show in the following figure.
6. Remove the extra snap lines. Click the [Select] icon and select
the extra snap lines, followed by <Del>.
Task 9. Add the number of holes to the 60 degree angular dimension as

parametric information.
1. Add the pattern parameter of six holes to the 60.0 dimension. Click
the [Select] icon and select the 60.0 dimension in the general
view on the left. Right click and choose Properties .
2. Click Dimension Text and enter [&p0 X] in the PREFIX text box.
Click OK .
3. Erase the 6 holes note. Click View > Show and Erase . Click
Erase > and select the 6 HOLES note followed by Done Sel .
Close the dialog box. The drawing should appear as shown in the
following figure.
NOTES
Figure 5: Completely Dimensioned Drawing
Task 10. Change tolerances and the number of decimal places in

Drawing mode.
1. Click Format > Decimal Places , then enter [3]. Click Pick Many
and create a box around the entire drawing.
2. Click Done Sel .
3. Apply the tolerance table to the diameter dimension. Click the

[Select] icon and select the ∅130 dimension. Right click and
choose Properties .
4. Select SHAFT from the Tolerance table list. Select H and 6 from
the TABLE NAME drop down list.
5. Select LIMITS from the TOLERANCE MODE drop down list then
select OK to view the exact values of the dimension.
6. Change the tolerance format of the two ∅50 dimensions. Click the
[Select] icon and select the ∅50 dimension. Right-click and
choose Properties .
NOTES
7. For the Tolerance mode, select Limits to show the exact values in
parentheses. Click OK to close the dialog box.
8. Finish the clean up of the dimensions. Click the [Select] icon

and reposition the snap lines and dimensions so that they do not
intersect, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6: Drawing with Tolerances
Task 11. Place surface finish symbols on the drawing according to the
ISO standard.
1. Click Insert > Symbol Instance to create ISO-standard surface

finish symbols.
2. On the PLACEMENT tab, click Retrieve to retrieve a pre-defined

instance. Click System Syms from the LOOK IN drop down list.
3. Double click isosurftext then click isosurftext.sym > Open . The

symbol definition is now ISOSURFTEXT.
4. In the HEIGHT box, enter [15].
NOTES
5. From the PLACEMENT: TO BE PLACED drop down list, select

With Leaders , then pick the lower attachment locations of the two
surface finish symbols as shown in the following figure. Click
Done Sel .
6. Use Move to move the symbol to reposition, if necessary.
Figure 7: Surface Finish in the Drawing
7. Use the pro-defined groups to change the symbol. Click Grouping

and select MACHINED > ROUGHNESS > AVERAGE >
PROD_METHOD , and LEADER .
8. Define the values for the symbol. Click Var Text . Enter [0,8]
under AVER_ROUGHNESS. Enter [grind] as the
PROD_METHOD.
9. Click New Inst to create another surface finish symbol without

closing the dialog box.
10. Define the attachment for the next symbol. Click PLACEMENT tab
and then select PLACE INST from the PLACEMENT: TO BE
PLACED area of the dialog box.
11. Pick the upper attachment of the two surface finish symbols as
shown in the previous figure, followed by Done Sel .
NOTES
12. Move the symbol to the location shown if necessary.
13. Add a third surface finish as the global finish. Select NEW INST
from the SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box.
14. Enter [30] to change the height of the symbol.
15. Define a free placement. Select FREE NOTE from the

PLACEMENT: TO BE PLACED drop down list. Pick in the lower
right corner, as shown in the previous figure.
16. Move the note if necessary.
17. Remove the production method and leader group options. Click
Grouping and clear the PROD_METHOD and LEADER check
boxes.
18. Click New Inst from the SYMBOL INSTANCE dialog box to add
the last surface finish as the global finish.
19. Click Placement > Place Inst to place as a free note. Pick in the
lower right corner, next to the previous symbol, as shown in the
previous figure.
20. Change the average roughness to 3,2. Click Var Text and change
the aver_roughness value of [3,2].
22. Clean up the symbol leaders. Create a jog on the two surface finish
symbols with leaders, as shown in the previous figure.
Task 12. The configuration file settings affected the display of the
chamfer dimension. Change the dimensional text of the chamfer
dimension to reflect ISO standards.
1. Show the chamfer dimension.

! Click View > Show and Erase> Show . Select dimension as
the show type.
! Click the Preview tab. Check the With Preview check box.
! Click Show All > Yes .
! Keep the two 1 X 45° dimensions and close the dialog box.
NOTES
2. Move the chamfer dimension. Click the [Select] icon and select
the 1 X 45° dimension. Move it to the other side of the projected
view.
3. With the 1 X 45° dimension still highlighted, right click and choose
Properties . Click Dimension Text , then enter [{2:2 REQ'D}] in
the DIMENSION TEXT area as a second line. Click OK .
Task 13. Create a perpendicular gtol placed on the two axes of the
bearing holes, in accordance with the ISO standard.
1. Display the axes tags. Click Utilities, Environment then select

Datum Axis from the ENVIRONMENT dialog box, then click OK .
2. Start changing the display of axis A_19. Click the [Select] icon
and select the axis A_19. Right click and choose Properties .
3. In the AXIS dialog box enter [A] as the name.
4. Set the axis to be used for a geometric tolerance reference. Click

>OK .
5. Change the display of axis A_20. Repeat the above steps and enter
[B ] for the name.
6. Move the set tags to the left of the view so that they snap to the
first snap line. Select the tags using the [Select] icon.
Rearrange the drawing as shown in the following figure.
Note:
You may also need to move the axis so that they extend to the
location of the tag.
NOTES
Figure 8: Drawing with Gtols
7. Start the creation of a perpendicular gtol. Click Insert >

Geometric Tolerance . Click in the GEOMETRIC
TOLERANCE dialog box.
8. Define axis A_1 as the reference. Select AXIS from the TYPE
drop-down list in the REFERENCE: TO BE SELECTED area.
9. Click Select Entity and pick axis A_1 located at the center of the
model.
10. Define the placement using a leader associated to the upper witness
line of the 130 diameter dimension. From the PLACEMENT: TO BE
PLACED area, select NORMAL LDR from the drop-down list.
11. Using Query Sel , pick the upper witness line of the ∅130
dimension. Place the gtol as shown in the previous figure.
NOTES
12. Specify the datum references as the A and B axis. Click Datum
Refs . Specify the datum references on the primary tab. select A
from the BASIC drop-down list. Select B from the COMPOUND
drop-down list.
13. Click Tol Value and enter [0.005] in the OVERALL TOLERANCE
text box to define the tolerance value as .005.
14. Show the diameter symbol in the gtol. Click Symbols and click
the ∅ Diameter Symbol check box.
15. If necessary, use Move to change the position of the gtol. Select
OK to finish the placement.
17. Erase the drawing and all associated object models from memory.
Figure 9: Finished Drawing
NOTES
MODULE SUMMARY
• You can use configuration file and drawing setup options to create an
ISO standard drawing.
• You can create tolerance tables at the part and drawing levels.
• You can create ISO standard surface finish symbols.
Appendix
B
Using PTC Help
You can use PTC Help to quickly search for Pro/ENGINEER
information. PTC Help includes quick references and detailed
information on selected topics.
Objectives
• Start PTC Help.

• Search for specific information about Pro/ENGINEER.
• Obtain context-sensitive help while performing a task.
Page B-1
NOTES
PTC HELP OVERVIEW

PTC Help is a fully functional help system that is integrated into
Pro/ENGINEER.
PTC Help Features

PTC Help offers:
• A new help system with a table of contents, an index, and searching

capability
• Context-sensitive help, allowing access to PTC Help with a click of
the mouse
• Online Tutorials focussed on teaching different aspects of the software
• Expanded help topics available as special dialog boxes
Please visit the PTC Technical Support Online Knowledge Database ,
which features thousands of Suggested Techniques. For more
information, see the Technical Support Appendix.
USING THE Pro/ENGINEER HELP SYSTEM

Launching Help: Four Methods
There are four procedures for launching the help system.
1. From the Main Menu

This is the standard way of accessing the full-blown help system complete
with contents, index, and search capabilities. Depending on your system
speed, it may take a few seconds to launch the entire help system.
Click Help > Contents and Index from the main menu as shown in the
following figure.
Pag e B- 2 Ap p e n d i x A
NOTES
Figure 1 Starting PTC Help
The Pro/ENGINEER Online Help homepage appears in your web browser

window.
Figure 2: Contents and Index in PTC Help
In the left frame of the window, you see a list of topics arranged in a tree
structure. By clicking on each higher level topic, you can access sub-
topics, and by clicking the sub-topics you can access detailed instructions,
explanations, and tips.
Usin g PT C Help Pag e B- 3

NOTES
2. Through Context-Sensitive Help
1. Click on the right end of the main toolbar.
2. Click on any icon or any part of the Pro/ENGINEER main window

about which you want an explanation.
3. A browser window opens that explains the topic.
4. In the following example, clicking on the model tree icon in the

toolbar launched a browser window that explained the icon
functionality.
Figure 3: Context-Sensitive Help
5. In addition, you will also notice at the lower left there is a “See
Also” link which on clicking provides a list of related topics that
may be of immediate interest.
NOTES
6. You may click on any topic you want to read additionally.
Figure 4: The ‘See Also’ List of Topics
3. Through Pro/ENGINEER Menu Manager
1. Click on the right end of the main Pro/ENGINEER toolbar.
2. Click any menu command from the menu manager.
3. A TOPIC ROUTER browser window opens with a list of topic links

that explain the menu command.
4. Click the topic you want to read.
5. In the following example, clicking on X-Section in the menu

manager launched the TOPIC ROUTER browser window with a list
of two useful topics.

NOTES
Figure 5: Launching Help through Menu Manager
4. By Right-Clicking on Vertical Menu Commands
1. Right-click and hold on a menu command until the GETHELP

window appears.
Figure 6: Right-Clicking in Menu Manager
NOTES
PTC HELP MODULE LIST

There are four main branches in the PTC Help table of contents:
Welcome, Pro/ENGINEER Foundation, Using Foundation Modules, and
Using Additional Modules.
Figure 7: Four Main Branches in Help System
Consult the following list to find a particular module in the table of

contents:
Figure 8: Foundation and Additional Modules in Help

Appendix
C
PTC Global Services: Technical Support
PTC Global Services is committed to providing top quality assistance
to our customers. In addition to our Technical Support Hotline, we
also have Web-based offerings that are designed to fit your
individual needs by providing 24 hour / 7 day availability.
PTC Global Services is also committed to continually improving
customer service. Through our Quality Monitoring program, we
have demonstrated our commitment to service by achieving Global
ISO 9000 Certification for our Technical Support offerings.
Objectives
• Open a Technical Support Call.

• Register for on-line Technical Support.
• Navigate the PTC Products Knowledge Base.
• Find telephone numbers for technical support and services.
Page C-1
NOTES
FINDING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT WEB PAGE

Choose Support from the PTC Home Page www.ptc.com or go directly to
www.ptc.com/support/support.htm.
OPENING TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALLS

Opening Technical Support Calls via E-mail
Send email to cs_ptc@ptc.com with copen as the e-mail subject.
Please use the following format (or download the template from
www.ptc.com/cs/doc/copen.htm):
FNAME: First Name

LNAME: Last Name
CALLCENTER: U.S., Germany, France, U.K., Singapore, or
Tokyo
PHONE: NNN NNN-NNNN x-NNNN
CONFIG_ID: NNNNNN
PRODUCT: X
MODULE: XX
PRIORITY: X
DESC_BEGIN:
description starts
description continues
description ends
DESC_END
Pag e C- 2 Ap p e n d i x B
NOTES
Opening Technical Support Calls via Telephone

Call us directly by telephone (refer to the Contact Information page for
your Local Technical Support Center).
The Technical Support Engineer will ask you for the following
information when logging a call:
• Your PTC software Configuration ID

• Your name and telephone number
• The PTC product (module) name
• Priority of the issue
Opening Technical Support Calls via the Web

You can use the PTC Web site www.ptc.com/support to open Technical
Support calls 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, by using the Pro/CALL
LOGGER
Sending Data Files to PTC Technical Support

To send data files to PTC Technical Support, please follow the
instructions at: www.ptc.com/support/cs_guide/additional.htm.
When the call is resolved your data will be deleted by the Technical
Support Engineer. Your data will not be divulged to any third party
vendors under any circumstances. You may also request a Non-Disclosure
Agreement from the Technical Support Engineer.
Cu s t o m e r Su p p o rt I n f o rm a t i o n Pag e C- 3
NOTES
Routing Your Technical Support Calls
Call
Customer question
Telephone Call Web Call
Tech SupportEngineer Call is automatically created

creates a call in the database in the database
Investigation Call Back and Investigation
Support Engineer
solves issue or
reports it
to Development (SPR)
SPR
Software Performance Report
SPR fixed from Development
Software Performance Report (SPR)
SPR Verification through Tech. Support Engineer
Update CD to customer
NOTES
Assigning Technical Support Call Priorities

• Extremely Critical – Work stopped
• Critical – Work severely impacted
• Urgent – Work impacted
• Not Critical
• General Information
Software Performance Report Priorities

• Top Priority – Highly critical software issue that is causing a work
stoppage.
• High – Critical software issue that affects immediate work and a
practical alternative technique is not available.
• Medium – Software issue that does not affect immediate work or a
practical alternative technique is available.
REGISTERING FOR ON-LINE SUPPORT

Go to www.ptc.com/support and click Sign-up Online , to open the
registration form and enter your Configuration ID.
To find your Pro/ENGINEER Configuration ID, click Help > About

Pro/ENGINEER .
Complete the information needed to identify yourself as a user with your

personal data. Please write down your username and password for future
reference.
NOTES
ONLINE SERVICES
After you have registered you will have full access to all Online Tools.
You can search our Knowledge Base using a Search-Engine. Our Online
Support Applications controls the status of calls (Call Tracker) and SPRs
(SPR Tracker) and adds comments to these. If you add a comment, the
Technical Support Engineer assigned to your call will be notified
automatically.
Additionally, contact information such as the customer feedback line and

electronic order of software and manuals are available.
The Software Update Tool allows you to request the latest software
updates for any PTC product.
FINDING SOLUTIONS IN THE KNOWLEDGE BASE

The Technical Support Knowledge Base contains over 18,000 documents.
Technical Application Notes (TANs), Technical Point of Interest (TPIs),
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs), and Suggested Techniques offer up-
to-date information about all relevant software areas. All FAQs and
Suggested Techniques are available in English, French, and German.
NOTES
Terminology used by Technical Support

TAN – Technical Application Note provides information about SPRs that
may affect more than just the customer originally reporting an issue.
TANs also may provide alternative techniques to allow a user to continue
working.
TPI – Technical Point of Interest provides additional technical information

about a software product. TPIs are created by Technical Support to
document the resolution of common issues reported in actual customer
calls. TPIs are similar to TANs, but do not reference an SPR.
Suggested Techniques – Provides step-by-step instructions including

screen snapshots, on how to use PTC software to complete common tasks.
FAQ – Frequently Asked Questions provides answers to many of the most

commonly asked questions compiled from the PTC Technical Support
database.
NOTES
GETTING UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION

To subscribe to our Knowledge Base Monitor e-mail service, go to
www.ptc.com/support.
1. Click Technical Support > Online Support Applications >

Knowledge Base Monitor .
2. Select the PTC Product or Module for which you want to get
information.
3. You will receive daily e-mail with update information; this can
help you by upgrading to a new PTC product or to a new release.
Figure 1: Knowledge Base Monitor Sign Up
NOTES
CONTACT INFORMATION
PTC Technical Support Worldwide Electronic
Services.
These services are available seven days a week, 24 hours a day.
Web:
• www.ptc.com/support/index.htm (Support)
• www.ptc.com/company/contacts/edserv.htm (Education)
E-mail:
• cs_ptc@ptc.com (for opening calls and sending data)

• cs-webmaster@ptc.com (for comments or suggestions about
the Customer Service Web site)
FTP (for transferring files to PTC Technical Support):
• ftp.ptc.com
Technical Support Customer Feedback Line

The Customer Feedback Line is intended for general customer service
concerns that are not technical product issues.
E-mail:
• cs-feedback@ptc.com
Telephone:
• www.ptc.com/cs/doc/feedback_nums.htm
NOTES
Telephone
For assistance with technical issues, contact the Electronic Services noted
in the previous section, or the Technical Support line as listed in the Phone
and Fax Information sections below.
PTC has nine integrated Technical Support Call Centers in North

America, Europe, and Asia. Our worldwide coverage ensures telephone
access to Technical Support for customers in all time zones and in local
languages.
North America Phone Information

Customer Services (including Technical Support, License Management,
and Documentation Requests):
Within the United States and Canada:
• 800-477-6435
Outside the United States and Canada:
• 781-370-5332
• 781-370-5513
Maintenance:
• 888-782-3774
Education:
• 888-782-3773
NOTES
Europe Phone Information

Technical Support Phone Numbers:
Austria 0800 29 7542

Belgium 0800-15-241 (French)
0800-72567 (Dutch)
Denmark 8001-5593
Finland 0800-117092
France 0800-14-19-52
Germany 0180-2245132
49-89-32106-111 (for Pro/MECHANICA® outside of
Germany)
Ireland 1-800-409-1622
Israel 1-800-945-42-95 (All languages including Hebrew)
177-150-21-34 (English only)
Italy 800-79-05-33
Luxembourg 0800-23-50
Netherlands 0800022-4519
Norway 8001-1872
Portugal 05-05-33-73-69
South Africa 0800-991068
Spain 900-95-33-39
Sweden 020-791484
Switzerland 0800-55-38-33 (French)
0800-83-75-58 (Italian)
0800-552428 (German)
United Kingdom 0800-318677
License Management Phone Numbers:
Belgium 0800-75376
Denmark 8001-5593
Finland 0800-117-092
Eastern Europe 44 1252 817 078
Cu s t o m e r Su p p o rt I n f o rm a t i o n Pag e C- 1 1
NOTES
France 0800-14-19-52
Germany 49 (0) 89-32106-0
Ireland 1-800-409-1622
Italy 39 (0) 39-65651
Netherlands 0800-022-0543
Norway 8001-1872
Portugal 05-05-33-73-69
Russia 44 1252 817 078
Spain 900-95-33-39
Sweden 020-791484
Switzerland 41 (0) 1-8-24-34-44
United Kingdom 0800-31-8677
Education Services Phone Numbers:
Benelux 31-73-644-2705
France 33-1-69-33-65-50
Germany 49 (0) 89-32106-325
Italy 39-039-65-65-652
39-039-6565-1
Spain/Portugal 34-91-452-01-00
Sweden 46-8-590-956-00 (Malmo)
46-8-590-956-46 (Upplands Vasby)
Switzerland 41 (0) 1-820-00-80
United Kingdom 44-0800-212-565 (toll free within UK)
44-1252-817-140
Asia and Pacific Rim Phone Information

Technical Support Phone Numbers:
Australia 1800-553-565
China* 10800-650-8185 (international toll free)
108-657 (manual toll free)
Hong Kong 800-933309
India* 000-6517
NOTES
Indonesia 001-803-65-7250
7-2-48-55-00-35
Japan 120-20-9023
Malaysia 1-800-80-1026
New Zealand 0800-44-4376
Philippines 1800-1-651-0176
Singapore 65-830-9899
South Korea 00798-65-1-7078 (international toll free)
080-3469-001 (domestic toll free)
Taiwan 0080-65-1256 (international toll free)
080-013069 (domestic toll free)
Thailand 001-800-65-6213
*Note: Callers dialing from India or China must provide the operator with
the respective string:
China MTF8309729
India MTF8309752
The operator will then connect you to the Singapore Technical Support
Center.
License Management Phone Numbers
Japan 81 (0) 3-3346-8280

Hong Kong (852) 2802-8982
Education Services Phone Numbers
Australia 61 2 9955 2833 (Sydney)

61 3 9561 4111 (Melbourne)
China 86-20-87554426 (GuangZhou)
86-21-62785080 (Shanghai)
86-10-65908699 (Beijing)
Hong Kong 852-28028982
India 91-80-2267272 Ext.#306 (Bangalore)
91-11-6474701 (New Delhi)
91-226513152 (Mumbai)
Cu s t o m e r Su p p o rt I n f o rm a t i o n Pag e C- 1 3
NOTES
Japan 81-3-3346-8268
Malaysia 03-754 8198
Singapore 65-8309866
South Korea 82-2-3469-1080
Taiwan 886-2-758-8600 (Taipei)
886-4-3103311 (Taichung)
886-7-3323211 (Kaohsiung)
ELECTRONIC SERVICES
Up-to-Date + Worldwide = Maximum
Information ISO 9000 Productivity
Certification with
Quality Control
PTC
System
Products
INDEX
Approaches To Performance Improvement Create, 6-2
Drawing Rep Tool, 18-9 Dimension Tolerance
Merging Drawings, 18-10 Displaying Tolerance, 8-3
Model Simplification, 18-11 Specify Dimension Tolerances, 8-2
Reducing Drawing Retrieval Time, 18-8 Standard, 8-2
Reducing Drawing View Regeneration Time, 18-4 Dimensions
Reducing the Repaint Time, 18-3 Creating Draft Dimensions, 6-4
Approaches To Performance Improvement, 18-3 Creating Ordinate Dimensions, 6-2
Arrows, 5-9 Creating Ordinate Dimensions for a Flat
Assemblies State Sheetmetal Part, 6-3
Drawings, 3-2 Creating Reference Dimensions, 6-3
Exploded Views, 3-2 Hole Tables, 6-4
BOM Redefining Features, 6-3
Create, 16-2 Dimensions
Filter, 16-6 Adding Text, 5-9
Level, 16-5 Arrows, 5-9
Pagination, 16-9 Baseline References, 5-8
Repeat Region Attributes, 16-4 Cleaning Up, 5-6
Simple Repeat Region, 16-2 Dual, 5-7
Sort, 16-6 Extension Lines, 5-9
Summation, 16-9 Leaders, 5-9
BOM Balloons, 16-10 Move, 5-5
Changing Cross-Sections, 4-9 Ordinate, 5-7
Configuration File Options, 6-5, 7-11 Snap Lines, 5-6
Configuration File Options, 15-6, 19-4 Drafting
CONFIGURATION FILE OPTIONS, 8-7 Applications, 11-2
Configuration Files Geometry Types, 11-2
Config.pro, 1-5 Drawing
Config.sup, 1-5 Setup File Options, 2-9
Drawing Setup Files, 4-16 Drawing
Drawing Setup Files, 1-6 Configuration Files, 2-8
Editing, 1-5 Drawing Default Layers, 13-2
Configuration Files Options, 5-12 Drawing Format
Controlling Layer Display in the Drawing, 13-7 Create, 15-2
Cosmetic Sketches Including Parametric Information, 15-4
Projected Sections, 10-2 Drawing Retrieval and Regeneration
Regular Sections, 10-2 Process, 18-2
Cosmetic Threads Drawing Setup File Options, 7-11, 16-11
Changing the Format, 10-6 Drawing Setup File Options, 13-8, 17-11,
Create, 10-3 19-5
Using Standard Hole, 10-13 DRAWING SETUP FILE OPTIONS, 8-9
Cross-Sections, 2-6 Drawing Setup Files, 5-14
Changing Cross-Hatching, 4-9 Drawing Setup Files, 1-6
Full, 2-6 Drawing Templates
Dimension Create, 19-9
INDEX Page-1
Dimension and Balloon Priority, 19-11 Configuring the Plotter, 20-3
Model Requirements, 19-10 Destination, 20-2
View Definition, 19-10 Plotter command, 20-5
Drawings Pro/BATCH, 20-6
Associative, 1-2 Pro/ENGINEER, 20-2
Drawings Pro/BATCH
Assemblies, 3-2 Adding Objects, 20-8
Configuration Files, 1-3 Creating a New Batch File, 20-8
Drawing Interface, 1-7 Defining the Action and Options, 20-9
Icons, 1-9 Pro/ENGINEER Command, 20-9
Menus, 1-7 Setting up Preferences, 20-7
Message Window, 1-10 Starting Pro/BATCH, 20-7
Model Tree, 1-10 Setting up Your Configuration File, 19-2
Exploded Views, 3-2 Setting up Your Drawing Setup File, 19-2
Multiple Models, 3-2 Symbols
Creating, 3-3 Create, 12-2
Setting the Active Model, 3-3 Creating Symbol Geometry, 12-2
Showing Details, 5-2 Grouping Symbol Geometry, 12-3
Templates, 1-2 Placing Symbol Instance, 12-6
Engineering Markups, 21-2 Symbol Palette, 12-6
Family Table Variable Text, 12-3
Create, 17-2 Table
Creating a Parts Catalog in Drawing, 17-5 Blank the Cell Borders, 9-6
Generic Part, 17-2 Changing the Size, 9-5
Verify, 17-5 Creating a Table, 9-2
Geometric Tolerance Justification, 9-3
Create, 8-4 Merge Cells, 9-6
Modify, 8-7 Origin, 9-6
Locating Draft Geometry Text
Construction Geometry, 11-4 Inserting OLE Objects, 7-8
Cross Hair, 11-3 Text Fields, 7-7
Draft Grid, 11-4 Text Style, 7-7
References, 11-3 Text Style Libraries, 7-8
Markups Views, 2-2
Creating a Markup, 21-2 Adding Cross-Sections, 2-6
Retrieving Markups, 21-3 Alignment, 4-2
Saving and Viewing a Markup, 21-3 Assembly, 4-10
Note Assembly Member Display, 4-12
Content, 7-2 Auxiliary, 2-3
Delete, 7-3 Boundaries, 4-6
Leader, 7-5 Changing the Callout, 4-7
Move, 7-4 Changing the Reference Point, 4-8
Save, 7-6 Changing Type, 4-14
Superscript and Subscript, 7-5 Color of Model Geometry, 4-5
Text Style, 7-6 Configuration File Options, 4-15
Wrap Text, 7-4 Controlling Displays, 4-5
Overlays, 21-4 Controlling View Display, 2-5
Print Creating, 2-2
Configuration File Options, 20-9 Cross Sections, 4-9
Print Detailed, 2-4
Page-2 INDEX
Exploded, 4-13
General, 2-2
Graph, 2-4
Hidden Lines, 4-5
Modifying Scale, 4-6
Orientation, 4-2
Origin, 4-3
Projection, 2-3
Remove, 4-6
Revolved, 2-4
Snapshot, 4-11
Tangent Lines, 4-5
Z-Clipping, 4-12
Views, 4-2
INDEX Page-3
Page-4 INDEX

PTC ProE - Fundamentals of Drawing

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

PTC ProE - Fundamentals of Drawing

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

PTC Global Services

Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

Order Number DT-782-320-EN

Education Services Registration in North America

Technical Support (Monday - Friday)

CREATING VIEWS 2-1

ASSEMBLY AND MULTI-MODEL DRAWINGS 3-1

MODIFYING VIEWS 4-1

SHOWING DIMENSIONS 5-1

CREATING DIMENSIONS 6-1

CREATING NOTES 7-1

TOLERANCES ON DRAWINGS 8-1

DRAWING TABLES 9-1

COSMETIC FEATURES 10-1

2-D DRAFTING 11-1

RESOLVING REGENERATION PROBLEMS 14-1

DRAWING FORMATS 15-1

CREATING A BILL OF MATERIALS 16-1

FAMILY TABLES 17-1

WORKING WITH LARGE DRAWINGS 18-1

DRAWING STANDARDS AND TEMPLATES 19-1

MARKUP MODEL 21-1

CREATING ISO-STANDARD DRAWINGS A-1

USING PTC HELP B-1

PTC GLOBAL SERVICES: TECHNICAL SUPPORT C-1

• Create and modify configuration and drawing setup files.

PRODUCTION DRAWINGS IN PRO/ENGINEER

Using Drawing Templates

• Define the layout of views

Figure 1 Creating a drawing using a drawing template.

There are default templates provided by the system. Customized drawing

Using Configuration Files

Table 1: Configuration File Options Affecting Drawings

Files Automatically Loaded by the System

• Config.sup in the loadpoint/text directory (the directory in which

Editing the Configuration File during a

Using Drawing Setup Files

By modifying this drawing setup file, you can customize the

Specifying Your Default Drawing Setup File

Figure 2: Edit and Insert menus

Figure 3: Sketch and Format menus

Table 2: Drawing icons

• Click [Select] icon.

Right mouse button is object sensitive. Depending on the type of selected

Figure 4: Object Sensitive Pop-up Menu

Figure 5: Use the MODEL TREE Short Cut Commands

Table 3: Drawing Setup File Options

In second exercise, drawing templates are used to automate the drawing

EXERCISE 1: Setting Up for Detailing Using a

1. Change the working directory to FUND_DRAW_320. Click File >

2. Create a default configuration file for the current session. Click

3. In the OPTION input box of the OPTIONS dialog box, begin

Table 4: Configuration File Options

5. Click Close from the OPTIONS dialog box.

EXERCISE 2: Create a Drawing Using a Template

1. Click File > New > Drawing .

2. Enter [rotor_shield] as the name. Leave the Use defult

3. Specify the default model. In the DEFAULT MODEL area, click

4. In the SPECIFY TEMPLATE area, leave the Use template

5. Specify the template. In the TEMPLATE area, click Browse .

6. Click OK in the NEW DRAWING dialog box.

8. As you can see, the views are placed automatically. Parametric

9. Save and erase the drawing.